wginstrhet
Installing
[email protected]/
DOS
Version 7.xx
Installer’s Guide Edition 12/01/01
ii
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Copyright and Trademark Notices
Copyright  1992–2002 The Amanda Company. All Rights Reserved. This
guide and the software described herein are copyrighted with all rights
reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored
in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form by any
means without the prior written permission of The Amanda Company.
Amanda and [email protected] are registered trademarks and sales trademarks of
The Amanda Company. Other brand names and product names mentioned in
this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
owners.
Limited Warranty on Software
The Amanda Company warrants the media on which the software is recorded
to be free from defects in materials and faulty workmanship for a period of
90 days from the date the software is delivered. If a defect in the media
should occur during this period, you may return the media to The Amanda
Company and The Amanda Company will replace the media without charge.
THE AMANDA COMPANY MAKES NO WARRANTIES (OTHER
THAN THOSE SET FORTH ABOVE) TO ANY PERSON OR ENTITY
WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT OR ANY DERIVATIVES
THEREOF OR ANY SERVICES OR LICENSES AND DISCLAIMS ALL
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, PERFORMANCE,
NONINFRINGEMENT, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THE AMANDA COMPANY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
ANY BUG, ERROR, OMISSION, DEFECT, DEFICIENCY, OR
NONCONFORMITY IN ANY SOFTWARE. THE SOFTWARE IS
LICENSED “AS IS,” AND THE PURCHASER ASSUMES THE ENTIRE
RISK AS TO ITS QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE.
IN NO EVENT AND NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DOCUMENT,
REPRESENTATION, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL THE AMANDA
COMPANY BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL, CONTINGENT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
iii
INCLUDING DAMAGES FROM LOSS OR CORRUPTION OF DATA,
INTERRUPTED USE, LOST PROFITS, COST OF PROCURING
SUBSTITUTE GOODS, TECHNOLOGY OR SERVICES, EVEN IF THE
AMANDA COMPANY OR AN AUTHORIZED AMANDA COMPANY
DEALER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES. YOU AGREE THAT THE AMANDA COMPANY’S
LIABILITY ARISING OUT OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, WARRANTY, OR OTHER LEGAL OR EQUITABLE
THEORY SHALL NOT EXCEED ANY AMOUNTS PAID BY YOU FOR
THIS PRODUCT. Any written or oral information or advice given by
Amanda Company dealers, distributors, agents, or employees will in no way
increase the scope of this warranty, nor may you rely on such oral or written
communication. Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of
implied warranties or liability for incidental or consequential damages, so
the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. This warranty gives
you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary
from state to state. This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the
State of California without regard to the conflicts of laws or provisions
thereof.
Fraudulent Usage Advisory
Although the Amanda software is designed to resist fraudulent usage,
including unauthorized access to a long distance network, no product,
including the Amanda software, is able to prevent such unauthorized usage.
The Amanda software is likewise unable to prevent such uses as may
constitute an invasion of privacy or other tort. THE AMANDA COMPANY
MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY AGAINST
UNLAWFUL OR UNAUTHORIZED USE OF YOUR AMANDA
SYSTEM OR ITS CAPABILITIES AND HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL
LIABILITY ARISING FROM SUCH USE. YOU AGREE TO
INDEMNIFY, DEFEND, AND HOLD THE AMANDA COMPANY
HARMLESS FOR ANY UNAUTHORIZED OR FRAUDULENT USE OF
YOUR LICENSED AMANDA SOFTWARE.
THE AMANDA COMPANY
13765 ALTON PARKWAY, UNIT F
IRVINE, CA 92618
TELEPHONE (949) 859–6279 FAX (949) 859–4380
iv
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Conventions
This manual uses the following terminology and conventions:
Amanda
The name by which this manual refers to the
[email protected]/DOS system to make
reading about the system easier. Because of
the name Amanda, the system is also referred
to as “she.”
caller
Someone who calls into Amanda. A caller often obtains information, leaves a message for
someone, and/or provides information. Because Amanda is referred to as “she,” callers
and users are referred to as “he.”
user
Someone with an extension that Amanda
transfers calls to and/or stores messages for. A
user can access Amanda to play, delete, and
send messages as well as set personal options
such as Do Not Disturb.
fixed-space type
This guide displays information that you must
type and messages from Amanda in fixedspace type.
Assumptions
This guide is written for an installer who is familiar with PCs and
understands telephone switching systems. It assumes that you know
something about the following:
•
•
•
•
•
How to safely open a personal computer to install or remove boards.
For example, the computer must be turned off while you are installing and removing boards.
Computer terms, such as serial port, parallel port, and DOS prompt.
How to identify basic components of a personal computer, for example, motherboard, I/O controller, video card, I/O ports, modem, and
so forth.
How to connect the monitor, keyboard, and power to the computer.
How to use DOS commands, such as CD, TYPE, COPY, and EDIT.
v
•
•
•
•
•
How to get to the CMOS settings and make changes.
Telephony terms, such as station side, CO, single-line, hunt group,
pilot number, pickup group, coverage path, hookflash, call forward
ring-no-answer, call forward busy, DTMF, and tone patterns.
The difference between RJ-11 and RJ-14 connectors.
The difference between the functions of the telephone switching system and Amanda.
How to use a butt set or line monitor to observe test calls.
If you are unfamiliar with any of the above, please consider attending one of
our regularly scheduled training seminars. Please contact our sales
department for more information on dates and cost.
Depending on how you purchased our product or what voice boards you are
installing, parts of this guide may not pertain to you. For example, if you
purchased a turnkey solution comprised of Amanda preloaded onto a PC,
you can skip all sections regarding the system requirements and the
installation of the voice boards and Amanda software.
vi
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Contents
Copyright and Trademark Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
Limited Warranty on Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
Fraudulent Usage Advisory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Assumptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Chapter 1:
Introducing Amanda. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
General Uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Purpose of This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Customer Service and Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
End User Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
System Administration Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Installation Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Application Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Chapter 2:
Installing RDSP/x32 Boards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Installation Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Configuring RDSP/x32 Voice Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
ShowJump Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Installing Voice Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Connecting Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
viii
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Chapter 3:
Installing RDSP/RTNI Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring an RDSP/x000 Voice Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Understanding MVIP Streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring MVIP Streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the MVIP Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Base I/O Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring an RTNI-xATI Voice Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the MVIP Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Base I/O Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Line Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ShowJump Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the MVIP Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Amanda to Use the ATI Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
17
19
19
21
22
23
25
26
28
28
29
30
31
32
33
33
Chapter 4:
Other Cards and Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Installing a LAN Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Using a UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Chapter 5:
Installing Amanda Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running the Installation Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Updating Amanda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activating your Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
39
48
48
Chapter 6:
Running the Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Running Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Chapter 7:
Defining Dial Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Defining Dial Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
ix
Chapter 8:
Defining Tone Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Using this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Using GetTones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Using AccuCall Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Chapter 9:
Defining Integration Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Using the Trace File for Integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Setting Up the Trace File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Creating Test Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Running the Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Reading the Trace File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Adding Integration Strings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Using Character Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Running Integration Helper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Placing Test Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Forward from Ring No Answer Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Direct Call Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Forward from Busy Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Chapter 10:
Configuring Amanda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Using This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Using the Questionnaire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Configuring a New Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Selecting a Type of Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Using Default and Recommended
Mailboxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Chapter 11:
Faxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Using This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Using a Fax Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Suggested Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Detecting a Fax Machine Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Modifying the PCPM Tone Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Creating the Hot Box Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Setting the Hot Box Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Sending Faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
x
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Chapter 12:
Using Serial Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial Integration Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bellcore Standard SMDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NEC 2000 and NEC 2400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AT&T System 75 or Definity-G3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ericsson MD-110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
137
137
138
143
146
148
151
Chapter 13:
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Types of Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telephone Line Options Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sharing Amanda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the box_grt Configuration Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Incoming Trunk Call and CO Line IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Multiple Employee Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Multiple Direct Messaging Mailboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
155
155
156
157
158
159
167
168
Chapter 14:
Accessing Amanda Remotely. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessing Amanda from Another Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up Amanda’s Computer as a Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up the Remote Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting by Null Modem Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting by Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
169
169
171
172
173
174
Chapter 15:
Programming Amanda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Tokens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mailbox Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Success and Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tracing Token Execution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Kinds of Tokens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Literals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
177
177
179
179
180
181
181
182
183
183
185
186
xi
Files and Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Flow of Control: Branching and Looping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
T1 Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Customizing the Employee Directory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Translating to Amanda’s Tokens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Token Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Chapter 16:
Programming Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
System Paging of a User for Special Callers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Translating to Amanda’s Tokens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Switching and Maintaining Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Using Amanda’s Tokens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Another Consideration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Using Amanda’s Tokens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Order Shipment Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Translating to Amanda’s Tokens:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
One-call and Two-call Faxbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Sending Faxes to Amanda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
One-call Faxback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Two-call Faxback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
IVR and Voice Form Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Making the User Comfortable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Using Greetings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Using Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Making Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Providing Information and Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Using the Telephone Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Choosing Tokens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Using Tokens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Gathering Testing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
xii
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Chapter 17:
Installing the Clients. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing from Various Platforms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing from a File Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing from a Floppy Drive on Windows 3.11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing from a Floppy Drive on Windows 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Client Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reviewing Client Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
279
279
280
280
281
282
284
Chapter 18:
Configuration Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fax Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hot Box Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outdial Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Per Port Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial Port Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SMDI Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T1/DID Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
287
287
323
327
328
330
331
334
336
339
Appendix A:
Troubleshooting Amanda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resetting a Port from the Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What to Do When… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Amanda Does Not Transfer the Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Caller Doesn’t Hear the Busy Message or RNA Greeting. . . . . . . . . . . .
Notification Does Not Work Correctly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Host/Remote Programs Do Not Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message: RDSP Not Located at Any Interrupt Vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Halts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
341
341
341
342
342
344
345
346
346
347
Appendix B:
Troubleshooting the Clients. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
NIC Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Common Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Chapter 1:
Introducing Amanda
Requirements
At a minimum, the PC on which you install Amanda must have:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
MS-DOS version 6.22 in the directory C:\DOS.
A 486SX processor running at a minimum of 25MHz.
A VGA card.
A minimum of 4MB of RAM.
A minimum of 640K of conventional memory.
A 3.5-inch, 1.44MB floppy disk drive and appropriate controller.
An IDE hard disk drive with an access time of less than 14ms and
appropriate IDE controller.
No LPT2 port (if disabled, it must be non-interfering).
No devices at addresses 300, 301, 302, 303, 304, or 305.
No devices using IRQ5 (other than the data modem).
No devices using IRQ7 (other than the LPT1 port). (This IRQ will
be used by your voice boards.)
To operate Amanda as Voice Server over a network, you must have
an NE2000 or compatible LAN adapter, configured to use IRQ 10 at
address 340H.
To operate Amanda as Voice Server with more than one client, you
need a Client Connection Bank (CCB) to activate additional clients.
NOTE: Within the CMOS settings, all adapter ROM shadowing
should be disabled except for system ROM shadowing at
address F000.
2
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Amanda can run with any of the following voice boards:
•
•
Brooktrout 232, 432, 2132, and 4132 voice boards
A Brooktrout RDSP/RTNI two-board combination consisting of:
-
The Digital Signal Processors (DSPs) provided by an RDSP/x000
voice board
-
An analog telephony interface using the Brooktrout RTNI-xATI
board
Some PCs are incompatible with Amanda. If you see the error “rdsp not
located” or find that Amanda appears to come up but the boards do not
answer, check your CONFIG.SYS file for the following line:
X=ED00-EDFF
This line indicates that your PC is NOT compatible with Amanda.
Environmental Requirements
•
•
•
•
•
•
Locate the unit in an area free of excess moisture, dust, corrosive
gases, and chemicals.
Install Amanda securely on a table or desk at least 2 feet (.6 meters)
above the floor.
Use a properly grounded electrical outlet which is not controlled by
a switch.
Ensure that the operating temperature is 40 to 95 degrees Fahrenheit
(2 to 35 degrees Centigrade), away from direct sunlight.
Ensure that the humidity is 15% to 90%, noncondensing.
For proper ventilation and servicing of the unit, provide at least 1
foot (0.3 meters) clearance on all sides and above the unit.
Electrical Requirements
•
•
•
•
90 to 130 VAC, 50 to 60 Hz, 3-prong outlet with separate ground,
separately fused at 15 amps.
Outlet not controlled by an on/off switch.
Use of electrical line conditioning equipment such as a surge protector and an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) is strongly recommended.
Grounding to comply with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1459.
Chapter 1: Introducing Amanda
3
General Uses
[email protected]/DOS is an automated attendant and voice processing
system designed especially for ease of use and flexibility. As a PC-based
product, Amanda takes advantage of the technical innovations in the
personal computer market. In addition, Amanda’s standard hardware
components can be repaired or replaced by any PC service company. The
computer on which Amanda is installed must be used only for Amanda.
Depending on what lines from your PBX are connected to Amanda and
when calls are sent to Amanda to be processed, Amanda can serve you or
your customer in a variety of ways.
Configured as a primary attendant: Amanda answers all your incoming
calls on the lines you designate and allows the callers to direct their calls to a
specific person or department without being placed on indefinite hold. If a
specific person is unavailable, Amanda can take a private message for that
person without missing any details.
In this case, the telephone switching system sends all incoming calls to
Amanda.
Configured as a secondary attendant: Amanda assists your regular
operator when call volume is heavy, allowing callers to direct their own calls
or hold for the operator. Some companies provide specific incoming lines for
Amanda as a backdoor attendant for calls from vendors, family members,
friends, and special clients who prefer to have Amanda process their calls.
In this case, the telephone switching system sends incoming calls to Amanda
only when the regular operator’s extension is busy or not answered.
Configured as an off-duty attendant: Amanda provides 24-hour access to
your company and its employees when an operator is unavailable.
In this case, the telephone switching system sends all incoming calls to
Amanda while the office is closed.
4
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Configured as a voice messaging center: Amanda takes messages and
allows users to send, store, and forward messages, increasing productivity
and enhancing inter-office communication.
In this case, the telephone switching system transfers any incoming call to
Amanda if the extension being called is busy or not answering.
Configured as an information system: Amanda provides answers to your
callers’ most frequently asked questions (so you can avoid costly
interruptions and provide a higher level of customer service 24 hours a day).
Information such as your address, available hours, directions to your offices,
and so forth, might be better handled by Amanda. Amanda’s serial ports can
access databases and other information stored in other computers, allowing
Amanda to give callers information on account balances, train schedules, and
so forth.
In this case, the telephone switching system or even an operator can send
incoming calls to Amanda. Then automatically, or if selected, Amanda plays
out the requested information.
Purpose of This Guide
This guide explains how to set up [email protected]/DOS for the first
time. This guide covers:
•
•
Connecting and configuring Amanda to work with your telephone
switching system
Configuring Amanda to provide the voice mail services that the
owner selects
Chapter 1: Introducing Amanda
5
Customer Service and Support
The Amanda Company provides customer service and support Monday
through Friday from 8:00 A.M. to 8:00 P.M. Eastern Time, except holidays.
Customer Support:
(800) 800–9822
For sales, contact The Amanda Company at the East Coast office.
Dealer Sales:
Telephone: (800) 410-2745
Distribution Sales:
Telephone: (800) 410-2745
International Sales:
Telephone: (203) 744-3600
International Support:
Telephone: (203) 744-0860
Web Site:
http://www.taa.com
End User Support
End user support covers the actual usage of Amanda through the telephone,
such as picking up messages, sending messages, changing greetings, and
using distribution lists. Registered Amanda sites receive free end user
support for the life of their systems. Be sure to send in your registration card!
System Administration Support
System administration support covers the configuration of Amanda; such as
setting up mailboxes, programming notification, scheduling automatic
changes, and creating reports. Registered Amanda sites receive free system
administration support for up to six months after the installation. Be sure to
send in your registration card!
6
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Installation Support
Installation support covers the initial connection of Amanda to a telephone
switching system as well as solutions to problems that occur when the
system is reconfigured or Amanda is upgraded.
The Amanda Company now offers installation support to any dealer who
buys a turnkey system.
Qualified Amanda marketing partners and solution providers, who are in
good standing, receive installation support for any system.
Application Support
Application support covers extended features that can be added to Amanda
using Amanda’s powerful Token Programming Language. The Amanda
Company can write custom applications for you. All Amanda Solution
Providers, who are in good standing, receive application support. Please
contact your Amanda sales representative for more information.
Chapter 2:
Installing RDSP/x32 Boards
Installation Checklist
Follow this checklist or use it to verify that you have completed all the
necessary steps for connecting Amanda to the telephone switching system.
Be sure to…
1.
Install properly addressed voice boards
2.
Install Amanda software without errors
3.
Connect the line cords from voice boards to the telephone switching
system
4.
Program the telephone switching system for voice mail integration
5.
Test each voice board port for answering
6.
Run Setup to define dial codes
7.
Run Setup to obtain tone patterns
8.
Run Setup to define telephone switching system integration patterns
9.
Run Setup to define Amanda system configuration options
8
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Configuring RDSP/x32 Voice Boards
Amanda recognizes each installed voice board by its unique address. The
first voice board has address 300; the second, address 301; the third, address
302, etc. To set a voice board’s address, you must configure the pins on the
voice board correctly using shorting jumpers. Voice boards are normally
shipped with address 300 (board 1) when you receive them. You should
check the address and change it, if necessary.
If you look at the voice board with the 4-wire (RJ-14) jacks to the right, the
10 sets of pins are in a row along the top of long voice boards (models 4132
and 2132) or along the bottom of short voice boards (models 432 and 232).
The jumper positions are numbered from 0 to 9 from left to right on the long
boards. On the short boards, they are labeled as powers of 2 (1, 2, 4, 8, 16,
32, …). However, use our tables as though both boards were numbered 0 to 9
from left to right.
Chapter 2: Installing RDSP/x32 Boards
9
The following table shows how to set the shorting jumpers for each possible
voice board in Amanda.
Hex
Leftmost
Jumper Positions
Rightmost
Board
Address
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
300
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Open
Open
2
301
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Open
Open
3
302
Closed
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Open
Open
4
303
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Open
Open
5
304
Closed
Closed
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Open
Open
6
305
Open
Closed
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Open
Open
Closed means that two pins are covered/connected by the shorting jumper,
and Open means that the two pins are not covered/connected by the shorting
jumper. In the diagrams in this chapter, the blacked out pin positions
represent closed positions.
TIP:
Installers often place shorting jumpers over only one pin
when the position is Open. This does not connect the pins,
but it does prevent losing jumpers.
Notice that the jumper positions numbered 3 through 7 are always closed
and that the jumper positions numbered 8 and 9 are always open. You will
change only the leftmost three jumper positions (those numbered 0, 1, and 2
in the table).
10
Installing [email protected]/DOS
The next table show the jumper positions graphically.
A Graphical View
Board
Hex
Address
1
300
2
301
3
302
4
303
5
304
6
305
CAUTION:
Jumper Positions
Do not add or remove shorting jumpers while power is applied to the board.
Chapter 2: Installing RDSP/x32 Boards
11
ShowJump Utility
Brooktrout provides the ShowJump utility which also shows how to
configure the jumpers on various types of Brooktrout boards. On Amanda,
this utility is stored in the C:\PLATFORM directory.
To use ShowJump:
1.
At a DOS prompt, type:
C:\PLATFORM\SHOWJUMP
The Brooktrout Board Jumper Configuration Utility Screen displays the
jumper configuration for hex address 300 on boards 2108 and 4108
(which Amanda does not support).
2.
Press Page Down until the board you are interested in is displayed.
3.
Then type the hex address and press Enter.
The jumper configuration for the displayed board changes to fit the
address that you entered.
4.
Press Esc to exit.
Installing Voice Boards
After making sure the address for the voice board is correct, you can install
it.
To install the voice board:
1.
If this is a new installation, go to step 2. Otherwise, shut down Amanda
and turn off the computer:
a.
b.
c.
Press Alt+S (if Amanda is running as a standalone) or s (if
Amanda is running as a voice server).
Type in the password. (The default is AMandA with only the
first two and the last letter capitalized.)
Press Enter.
12
Installing [email protected]/DOS
d.
e.
f.
Press Y (to confirm the shutdown).
Press Y again (to reconfirm).
After the DOS prompt C:\AMANDA> appears, turn off the
power.
2.
Remove the computer cover and locate an available slot. A full length
slot is needed for models 2132 and 4132.
3.
Remove the back slot cover and install the voice board. If there is a rear
card guide, slide the end of the voice board into it properly.
4.
Close the computer cover and turn on the power.
CAUTION:
Use an ESD-safe station while configuring and installing your board. Otherwise, static discharge may damage your board. (ESD stands for electrostatic
discharge.)
Connecting Ports
You create a port by connecting a telephone line to a voice board. Amanda
can support from 2 to 24 ports. On a Brooktrout voice board with two
connectors, the top connector represents the first two ports and the bottom
connector represents the second two ports for a total of four ports per board.
Each connector on a voice board is an RJ-14 modular jack. The inner pair is
one port, and the outer pair is the other port.
Chapter 2: Installing RDSP/x32 Boards
13
Ports are numbered consecutively from 1 to 24. Port 1 is connected to the
lowest addressed voice board (usually address 300). Each connector on the
voice board is linked to your telephone switching system by a standard 4wire line cord to a standard RJ-14 modular jack which should represent two
analog (single-line) extensions.
14
Installing [email protected]/DOS
COM1
VGA Card
Voice Ports
1/2
432
3/4
COM2
Modem
The above diagram shows the back of Amanda.
Chapter 2: Installing RDSP/x32 Boards
15
Voice Ports
1&2
Voice Ports
3&4
Telephone
Phone Switch
tline-R.cad
The above diagram shows how the telephones, telephone switching system,
and Amanda are connected.
16
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Chapter 3:
Installing RDSP/RTNI Boards
Installation Checklist
The RDSP/RTNI two-board combination puts all the Digital Signal
Processors (DSPs, specialized CPUs) on one board and provides an analog
telephony interface with the other.
You must configure and install each of the following:
•
•
An RDSP/x000 (that is RDSP/4000, RDSP/8000, RDSP/12000,
RDSP/16000, RDSP/24000) board that provides the DSPs.
An RTNI-xATI (that is RTNI-4ATI, RTNI-8ATI, RTNI-12ATI,
RTNI-16ATI, RTNI-24ATI) board that provides an analog telephony interface.
You must connect the interface board to the RDSP/x000 board using the
MVIP bus cable, which will transfer voice data between the two boards. The
connector cable for this is supplied with the board set. Since the RDSP/x000
board does not provide its own clock, it also receives timing information
from the bus.
In addition, you must connect the RTNI board to the telephone network.
Follow this checklist or use it to verify that you have completed all the
necessary steps for connecting Amanda to the telephone switching system.
18
Installing [email protected]/DOS
NOTE: The GetTones and AccuCall Plus utilities cannot define
dial codes while the RDSP/RTNI two-board combination is
installed. The utilities do not know how to make MVIP
connections to the DSP resource in order to dial. The only
solution is to use a 232 or 432 voice board while you define
the tones. Then you replace the 232 or 432 voice board with
the ATI board combination.
Be sure to…
1.
Configure an RDSP/x000 board:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Configure an RTNI-xATI board:
a.
b.
c.
3.
Configure MVIP Streams
Configure the MVIP Termination
Configure the Base I/O Port
Configure the MVIP Termination
Configure the Base I/O Port
Configure the Line Interface
Configure an RTNI-2T1 board:
a.
b.
c.
Configure the Base I/O Port
Configure the IRQ Jumpers
Configure the Line Interface
4.
Install the boards
5.
Install the MVIP cable
6.
Install Amanda software without errors
7.
Connect the line cords from the voice boards to the telephone switching
system
8.
Test each voice board port for answering
9.
Run Setup to define dial codes
10. Program the telephone switching system for voice mail integration
Chapter 3: Installing RDSP/RTNI Boards
19
11. Run Setup to obtain tone patterns
12. Run Setup to define telephone switching system integration patterns
13. Run Setup to define Amanda system configuration options
Requirements
Before installing the RDSP/x000 board, verify that the host system meets
each of the following requirements:
•
•
Bus speed is 8 MHz with 0 wait states or 10 MHz with 1 wait state
Can provide +5v 3.0 A power to the RDSP/x000 board
These requirements are in addition to those for the system.
Configuring an RDSP/x000 Voice Board
The following figure shows the locations of the jumper blocks and
connectors on the RDSP/x000 board. The tables below it describe those
jumper blocks and connectors and show how to jumper the RDSP/x000
board for use with Amanda.
Later sections of this chapter offer more detailed explanations about how to
jumper this board.
20
Installing [email protected]/DOS
The RDSP/x000 Board
J2
2
1
40
39
W1
W4
W2
W3
Jumper Block and Connector Information
Table 1: Jumper Positions for Use with Amanda
Label
Type
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
W1
Jumper
block
DSi MVIP
stream
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Closed
Open
W2
Jumper
block
DSo MVIP
stream
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Closed
Open
W3
Jumper
block
Base I/O
port
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Open
Open
W4
Jumper
block
MVIP termination
Closed
Closed
J2
Connector
MVIP bus
Closed means that two pins are covered/connected by the shorting jumper,
and Open means that the two pins are not covered/connected by the shorting
Chapter 3: Installing RDSP/RTNI Boards
21
jumper. In the diagrams in this chapter, the blacked out pin positions
represent closed positions.
TIP:
Installers often place shorting jumpers over only one pin
when the position is Open. This does not connect the pins,
but it does prevent losing jumpers.
W1
W4
W2
W3
Understanding MVIP Streams
MVIP is a standard protocol for connecting PC resources. The MVIP bus
provides both physical and logical half-duplex internal connections for up to
512 resources.
The MVIP bus is segmented into 8 bidirectional serial data streams, each
composed of a pair of unidirectional streams. Each unidirectional stream can
carry 2.048 megabits of data per second, partitioned by Time Division
Multiplexing into 32 64-kilobits-per-second (Kb/sec.) time slots. A single
MVIP time slot has sufficient bandwidth to do either of the following:
•
•
Carry PCM voice data
Be a 64 Kb/sec. pipe for data communications
Numbering schemes for both streams and time slots start with 0. An MVIP
board is configured to use one of the eight streams on the bus. The port
associated with each time slot is made up of two half-duplex connections.
22
Installing [email protected]/DOS
During configuration, each resource on the board is mapped to a discrete
time slot of the stream.
For example, the stream on an RDSP/24000 board automatically maps time
slots 1, 9, 17, and 25 to RDSP resources to 1, 2, 3, and 4, respectively. The
port associated with Time Slot 4 has two halves: the input designated DSi4,
and the output DSo4. The network interface board is the point of reference
for input and output.
Configuring MVIP Streams
Each RDSP/x000 board uses two MVIP streams: one for receiving and one
for transmitting. The RDSP/x000 board can receive on one of the DSi
streams (DSi0 through DSi7) and can transmit on one of the DSo streams
(DSo0 through DSo7). Each RDSP/x000 board is factory-configured to use
streams DSi6 and DSo6. The Amanda Company recommends that you keep
these settings.
The DSi stream jumper block consists of a pin position for each DSi stream.
If you look at the board with the bracket on your right, the leftmost pin
position corresponds to DSi0, the next pin position corresponds to DSi1, and
so on. The rightmost pin position corresponds to DSi7.
The DSo stream jumper block has the same construction as the DSi stream
jumper block with the leftmost pin position corresponding to DSo0 and the
rightmost pin position corresponding to DSo7.
To configure the DSi and DSo streams:
1.
Find the jumper block for the DSi and DSo streams on the board.
The jumper block for the DSi MVIP stream is labeled W1. It is below
the MVIP connector if the bracket is to your right.
The jumper block for the DSo MVIP stream is labeled W2. It is below
the MVIP connector and the W1 block if the bracket is to your right.
Chapter 3: Installing RDSP/RTNI Boards
2.
23
The settings should be as shown below:
W1
W2
3.
Only the second to last pin position should be closed with a shorting
jumper.
CAUTION:
Do not add or remove shorting jumpers while power is
applied to the board.
Configuring the MVIP Termination
Each RDSP/x000 can terminate the C2 MVIP and C4 MVIP bus signals. In a
series of boards that are on an MVIP bus, the boards at both ends must
terminate C2 and C4 while the other boards must not terminate the signals.
For example, the following figure shows three boards on an MVIP bus. The
left and right boards must terminate the MVIP bus signals while the middle
board must not. Each RDSP/x000 is configured at the factory to terminate
both C2 and C4.
24
Installing [email protected]/DOS
The MVIP termination block consists of two pin positions, one for the C2
and one for the C4. If you look at the board with the bracket on your right,
the pin position on the left corresponds to C4 and the pin position on the right
corresponds to C2. The Amanda Company assumes that you are installing
only one RDSP/x000 board and, therefore, that it should terminate both
signals.
To terminate both MVIP bus signals:
1.
Find the MVIP termination block on the board.
It is labeled W4 and is below the MVIP connector at the right of the W1
block if the bracket is to your right.
2.
For use with Amanda, close both signals’ pin positions using shorting
jumpers (as shown below).
W4
CAUTION:
Do not add or remove shorting jumpers while power is
applied to the board.
Chapter 3: Installing RDSP/RTNI Boards
25
Configuring the Base I/O Port
Each RDSP/x000 uses 47 I/O ports in addition to its base I/O port. Seven of
these additional I/O ports are contiguous to the base I/O port. For example, if
the RDSP/x000’s base I/O port is 300H, then the seven contiguous I/O ports
are 301H, 302H, 303H, 304H, 305H, 306H and 307H. The RDSP/x000 also
uses five additional I/O ports offset from the base I/O port and each of its
seven contiguous I/O ports:
•
•
•
•
•
I/O port plus 400H
I/O port plus 800H
I/O port plus C00H
I/O port plus 1000H
I/O port plus FC00H
Each RDSP/x000 board is factory-configured to use base I/O port 300H. If
you are installing more than one RDSP/x000 board, you need to change the
base I/O ports so that each board has a unique base I/O port. If you are
installing only one RDSP/x000 board, you need to change its base I/O port
only if there is an I/O port conflict with another device.
Each RDSP/x000 must use a base I/O port in the range 0000H through
3FFH. The Amanda Company assumes that you are installing only one
RDSP board and recommends that you use base I/O port 300H.
To configure the base I/O port:
1.
Find the jumper block for the base I/O port.
It is labeled W3 and is below the W2 block if the bracket is to your
right.
2.
Set W3 for use with Amanda as shown below.
Close the five positions on the left using shorting jumpers and open the
two positions on the right.
W3
26
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Hex
Jumper positions
Row
Address
0
1
2
3
4
1
300
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
CAUTION:
5
Open
6
Open
Do not add or remove shorting jumpers while power is
applied to the board.
Configuring an RTNI-xATI Voice Board
An RTNI-xATI board’s main function is connecting any line resource with
any other line or MVIP resource. This is commonly called switching. Your
RTNI-xATI board provides Analog-to-MVIP switching. The line resource
for your ATI board is analog, but only digital PCM signals can be switched,
so the board must convert the incoming analog signal to PCM prior to
switching. This conversion is made by the board’s loop start module which
links the MVIP bus and a trunk line. Amanda uses only the linking function
and not the switching function of MVIP.
The following figure shows the locations of the jumper blocks and
connectors on the RTNI-xATI board. The tables below it describe those
jumper blocks and connectors. They also show how to jumper the RTNIxATI board for use with Amanda.
Chapter 3: Installing RDSP/RTNI Boards
Label
Jumpers
Connectors
27
Type
Jumper
Settings
Description
EJ10
Jumper block
Base I/O Address
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed
W1
Jumper block
MVIP Termination
Closed
W2
Jumper block
MVIP Termination
Closed
J1
Connector
MVIP bus
J4
Connector
Telephony Cable
Closed means that two pins are covered/connected by the shorting jumper,
and Open means that the two pins are not covered/connected by the shorting
jumper.
EJ10
W1
W2
28
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Configuring the MVIP Termination
The MVIP termination block consists of two pin positions, one for the C2
and one for the C4. The top pin position (labeled W1) corresponds to C4 and
the next pin position (labeled W2) corresponds to C2.
You should close both pin positions. The Amanda Company assumes that
you are installing only one RTNI-xATI board along with an RDSP/x000
board. In this case, this board should terminate both signals.
To terminate both MVIP bus signals:
1.
Find the MVIP termination block on the board.
One pin position is labeled W1 and the other is labeled W2. They are
located just below the J1 connector with the bracket on your right.
2.
For use with Amanda, close both signals’ pin positions using shorting
jumpers (as shown below).
W1
W2
CAUTION:
Do not add or remove shorting jumpers while power is
applied to the board.
Configuring the Base I/O Port
Each voice board must have a unique base I/O port. Each RTNI-xATI board
is factory-configured to use base I/O port 308H. It uses the base I/O port and
three others, calculated as offsets of the base I/O port. These I/O ports are:
•
•
•
•
Base I/O port
Base I/O port plus 400H
Base I/O port plus 800H
Base I/O port plus C00H
Chapter 3: Installing RDSP/RTNI Boards
29
For example, if the RTNI-xATI board’s base I/O port is 308H, then the ATI
board uses the following I/O ports:
•
•
•
•
308H
708H
A08H
E08H
If you are installing only one RTNI-xATI board, you must change its base I/
O port only if another device in the computer has the same I/O port. The
Amanda Company recommends that you use 308H.
To set the base I/O port:
1.
Locate the base I/O port jumper block.
It is labeled EJ10.
2.
For use with Amanda, set the jumpers as shown below.
EJ10
CAUTION:
Do not add or remove shorting jumpers while power is
applied to the board.
Configuring the Line Interface
The line interface configuration of your RTNI-xATI board determines which
CO provisions it requires. You must match the line connection to your line
interface module configuration as follows:
30
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Interface Type:
2-Wire Loop Start
USOC Jack Connector: RJ21X
REN/Service Code:
X.XB
Facility Interface Code: 02LS2
The Loop Start module links your MVIP bus and a telephone line from your
CO or PBX. For a loop start, you alert your CO to an outbound call by
connecting the tip to the ring, thereby closing the loop and allowing current
to flow.
Physical Connections
After you have installed the board (as explained in “Installing the Boards” on
page 32), use the cable supplied with the RTNI-xATI board to connect the
Amanda system to the telephone network. Connect the 62-pin connector to
the RTNI-xATI board and the Amphenol 50-pin connector to a 66 Block.
Pinout Table for Amphenol 50-pin Connector
Pin
Description-Color code
Pin
Description-Color code
T1: Channel 1 Tip-white/blue
13
R13: Channel 13 Ring-green/black
1
R1: Channel 1 Ring-blue/white
39
T14: Channel 14 Tip-black/brown
27
T2: Channel 2 Tip-white/orange
14
R14: Channel 14 Ring-brown/black
R2: Channel 2 Ring-orange/white
40
T15: Channel 15 Tip-black/gray
T3: Channel 3 Tip-white/green
15
R15: Channel 15 Ring-gray/black
3
R3: Channel 3 Ring-green/white
41
T16: Channel 16 Tip-blue/yellow
29
T4: Channel 4 Tip-white/brown
16
R16: Channel 16 Ring-yellow/blue
R4: Channel 4 Ring-brown/white
42
T17: Channel 17 Tip-yellow/orange
T5: Channel 5 Tip-white/gray
17
R17: Channel 17 Ring-orange/yellow
26
2
28
4
30
Chapter 3: Installing RDSP/RTNI Boards
31
Pinout Table for Amphenol 50-pin Connector (ConPin
5
Description-Color code
Pin
Description-Color code
R5: Channel 5 Ring-gray/white
43
T18: Channel 18 Tip-yellow/green
T6: Channel 6 Tip-red/blue
18
R18: Channel 18 Ring-green/yellow
6
R6: Channel 6 Ring-blue/red
44
T19: Channel 19 Tip-yellow/brown
32
T7: Channel 7 Tip-red/orange
19
R19: Channel 19 Ring-brown/yellow
R7: Channel 7 Ring-orange/red
45
T20: Channel 20 Tip-yellow/gray
T8: Channel 8 Tip-red/green
20
R20: Channel 20 Ring-gray/yellow
8
R8: Channel 8 Ring-green/red
46
T21: Channel 21 Tip-violet/blue
34
T9: Channel 9 Tip-red/brown
21
R21: Channel 21 Ring-blue/violet
9
R9: Channel 9 Ring-brown/red
47
T22: Channel 22 Tip-violet/orange
35
T10: Channel 10 Tip-red/gray
22
R22: Channel 22 Ring-orange/violet
10
R10: Channel 10 Ring-gray/red
48
T23: Channel 23 Tip-violet/green
36
T11: Channel 11 Tip-black/blue
23
R23: Channel 23 Ring-green/violet
11
R11: Channel 11 Ring-blue/black
49
T24: Channel 24 Tip-violet/brown
37
T12: Channel 12 Tip-black/orange
24
R24: Channel 24 Ring-brown/violet
12
R12: Channel 12 Ring-orange/ black
50
Analog Ground-violet/gray
38
T13: Channel 13 Tip-black/ green
25
BAT-: Negative battery terminal-gray/ violet
31
7
33
ShowJump Utility
Brooktrout provides the ShowJump utility which also shows how to
configure the jumpers on various types of Brooktrout boards. On Amanda,
this utility is stored in the C:\PLATFORM directory.
32
Installing [email protected]/DOS
To use ShowJump:
1.
At a DOS prompt, type:
C:\PLATFORM\SHOWJUMP
The Brooktrout Board Jumper Configuration Utility Screen displays the
jumper configuration for hex address 300 on boards 2108 and 4108.
2.
Press Down Page until the board you are interested in is displayed.
3.
Then type the hex address and press Enter.
The jumper configuration for the displayed board changes to fit the
address that you entered.
4.
Press Esc to exit.
Installing the Boards
Use the following procedure to install one or more RDSP/RTNI boards.
To install the board:
1.
If this is a new installation, go to step 2. Otherwise, shut down Amanda
and turn off the computer:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Press Alt+S (if Amanda is running as a standalone) or s (if
Amanda is running as a voice server).
Type in the password. (The default is AMandA with only the
first two and the last letter capitalized.)
Press Enter.
Press Y (to confirm the shutdown).
Press Y again (to reconfirm).
After the DOS prompt C:\AMANDA> appears, turn off the
power.
2.
Remove the cover.
3.
Locate free bus slots that have 16-bit-compatible, ISA bus edge connectors.
Chapter 3: Installing RDSP/RTNI Boards
33
4.
Carefully align the boards with the slot and firmly seat the boards into
the computer.
5.
Use a bracket screw to securely fasten the boards’ brackets.
The bracket provides grounding for the board.
6.
Turn the computer back on.
7.
From the C:> DOS prompt, follow the installation instructions in
“Chapter 5: Installing Amanda Software.”
CAUTION:
Use an ESD-safe station while configuring and installing your board. Otherwise, static discharge may damage your board.
Installing the MVIP Cable
After installing an RDSP/x000 board you need to connect the MVIP bus
cable to each board.
This 40-pin MVIP-compliant connector is at the top of the board if you look
at the board with the bracket to your right. Use the MVIP connector to
connect the RDSP/x000 board to a telephone network interface board.
If your MVIP connector cable has more than two connector positions, use
the two end-positions for this installation.
Configuring Amanda to Use the ATI Board
There are a couple of Amanda’s configuration options that must be set
correctly when you are using an RTNI-xATI voice board. See “Running
Setup” on page 51 for information about using the Setup utility to set or
check these advanced configuration options.
The configuration option ati_mode must be set to true. Then Amanda makes
the connections needed for the ATI board.
34
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Be aware that RTNI-xATI voice boards cannot detect rotary. If you use an
RTNI-xATI voice board, you must leave the rotary configuration option set
to false.
Chapter 4:
Other Cards and Devices
Installing a LAN Card
To use Amanda as a voice server, you must install a LAN card, also called a
network interface card (NIC). The card must be NE2000 compatible.
If you have any problems with the installation and you purchased the NIC
from The Amanda Company, please contact Customer Service.
To install a LAN card:
1.
Configure the card.
If you purchased your LAN card from The Amanda Company, it is preconfigured for IRQ 10, I/O address 340H, and is to be used with
unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cable. These are the default settings.
If you purchase another LAN card, use this IRQ and address. Follow
that LAN card’s instructions for installation.
NOTE: Addresses 300 through 305 are not available for the LAN
card. See “Chapter 2: Installing RDSP/x32 Boards” and
“Chapter 3: Installing RDSP/RTNI Boards” for more information.
2.
If this is a new installation, go to step 3. Otherwise, shut down Amanda
and turn off the computer:
a.
Press Alt+S (if Amanda is running as a standalone) or s (if
Amanda is running as a voice server).
36
Installing [email protected]/DOS
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Type in the password. (The default is AMandA with only the
first two and the last letter capitalized.)
Press Enter.
Press Y (to confirm the shutdown).
Press Y again (to reconfirm).
After the DOS prompt C:\AMANDA> appears, turn off the
power.
3.
Remove the computer cover and locate an available slot.
4.
Remove the back slot cover and install the LAN card. If there is a rear
card guide, slide the end of the LAN card into it properly.
CAUTION:
5.
When installing your LAN card, you must be careful
about electrostatic discharges (ESD). Use an ESD-safe
environment, a wrist guard, and so on. Otherwise, static discharge may damage your card.
Connect the LAN card to the rest of the network.
The Amanda Voice Server sends and receives NetBEUI commands, and
can be part of any network that supports NetBIOS over NetBEUI.
6.
Reassemble the computer and restart it by turning the power switch on.
Using a UPS
The Amanda Company strongly recommends the installation of an
uninterrupted power supply (UPS) with every Amanda system. It provides
clean power to Amanda and keeps the probability of a computer lockup (and
the resulting loss of data or even loss of the system) as low as possible.
According to some reports, power problems are the primary reason why
computers lose data (45.3%). The next closest cause is storm damage at
9.4%. (Human error and sabotage rank eighth with 3.2%.)
Chapter 4: Other Cards and Devices
37
According to a Bell Laboratories study entitled “The Quality of US
Commercial AC Power,” the main categories of AC power irregularities
across the nation are sags (or brownouts), power surges, blackouts, and
overvoltages. The best solution is a UPS, which can handle 99.3% of these
power problems.
A UPS is a special type of AC power line conditioner. When compared to
the other devices available, such as surge suppressors, filters, isolation
transformers, tap changing regulators, and voltage regulating transformers,
the UPS is rated highest by Bell Laboratories and is relatively inexpensive.
The cost of installing a UPS is nominal when compared to the cost of
repairing a damaged Amanda system or compared to the loss of confidence
from callers and internal Amanda users.
For more information about what causes power irregularities and what
damage they can do to Amanda, call to be faxed Technical Note 10, “The
Importance of a UPS.”
38
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Chapter 5:
Installing Amanda Software
Running the Installation Program
Install Amanda software only after you have:
•
•
Installed the voice boards.
(Voice server only) Installed an NE2000-compatible Ethernet LAN
card.
Follow the installation checklist that is in the chapter that explains how to
configure the voice boards you use:
•
•
“Chapter 2: Installing RDSP/x32 Boards”
“Chapter 3: Installing RDSP/RTNI Boards”
If you are installing Amanda as a voice server, have your MS Workgroup
Add-on for DOS disk at hand.
To start the Amanda installation program:
1.
Insert the disk labeled “[email protected]/DOS, Installation Disk 1
of 5” into a floppy disk drive.
2.
From the DOS prompt C:\>, type the command:
A:\INSTALL
(If the disk is in drive B:, use B:\INSTALL B:.)
Then press Enter.
40
Installing [email protected]/DOS
You see a screen similar to the following:
Correct operation of an Amanda Call Processing system depends on accurate
time and date settings in the computer.
To assure correct operation,
please verify these now. Here are the present time and date:
Current time is
3:13:04.99p
Current date is Tue 01-14-1997
Are these values correct[N,Y]?
3.
Type Y for Yes or N for No.
If you type Y, proceed to step 4.
If you type N, you are prompted for a new date and time, similar to what
is shown below.
a.
b.
Type a new date then press Enter or just press Enter to keep the
current date.
Type a new time then press Enter or just press Enter to keep the
current time.
Please correct the Time and/or Date now.
Current date is Tue 01-14-1997
Enter new date (mm-dd-yy): 01-14-97
Current time is
Enter new time:
3:14:36.11p
Chapter 5: Installing Amanda Software
41
Information similar to the following appears on the screen.
This program installs or un-installs [email protected]/DOS
Version 7.xx Revision X on your computer system.
You may press the [Esc] key at any time to stop
the installation.
PLEASE NOTE:
This installation stores backup copies of any files
that it overwrites on your hard disk.
If after
installing you wish to revert to your previous
system, run this install program again and select
the "Un-install ..." option.
Press [Esc] to quit, any other key to continue ...
4.
Press any key on the keyboard to continue.
An installation, reinstallation, or an update menu appears.
INSTALLATION MENU
Select the type of installation that you want to be performed.
Use the arrow keys to make a selection; then press Enter.
Install [email protected]/DOS Version 7.xx Revision X
Test the configuration of this system only
Exit this installation program now
42
Installing [email protected]/DOS
REINSTALLATION MENU
[email protected]/DOS Version 7.xx Revision X is already
installed on this machine.
Select the action that you want to be performed.
Use the arrow keys to make a selection; then press Enter.
Re-install [email protected]/DOS Version 7.xx Revision X
Un-install the existing [email protected]Group/DOS 7.xx Revision X system
Test configuration of this machine only
Exit this installation program now
UPDATE MENU
[email protected]/DOS Version 7.xx Revision X using RH-RDSP
style boards appears to be installed on this machine.
Select the type of installation that you want to be performed.
Use the arrow keys to make a selection; then press Enter.
Update existing [email protected]/DOS 7.xx Rev. X
Test configuration of this machine only
Exit this installation program now
5.
In any case, select the first option on the menu then press Enter.
If this is a new installation, go to step 6. Otherwise, go to step 7.
Chapter 5: Installing Amanda Software
6.
43
You see a screen similar to the following:
Since this a first time installation, [email protected]/DOS needs to know
if this system uses Brooktrout RDSP/x32 or RDSP/x000 with RTNI-xATI
style boards. Make this choice very carefully since this choice is
PERMANENT!
Select the Brooktrout board type for this installation from the list.
Use the arrow keys to make a selection; then press Enter.
Brooktrout RDSP/x32 style two or four port boards
Brooktrout RDSP/x000 with RTNI-xATI style boards
I am not sure; stop so I can find out first
Use the arrow keys to select the appropriate style of Brooktrout voice
board then press Enter.
7.
The next screen asks whether you are installing Amanda as a standalone
system or as a voice server.
44
Installing [email protected]/DOS
[email protected]/DOS can be installed as a networked Voice Server,
integrated with a local area network (LAN), or as a stand-alone system.
If you elect the Voice Server installation, you must have a properly set
NE2000 compatible Ethernet LAN adaptor installed in this machine prior to
installing this software.
[If you install the LAN adaptor, it MUST be set for IRQ 10 and I/O
address 340, AND you MUST have your MS WORKGROUP ADD-ON FOR DOS disk]
Select the type of configuration that you want to be performed.
Use the arrow keys to make a selection; then press Enter.
No LAN card.
Configure Stand-alone system.
The LAN card is installed.
Exit.
Configure Voice Server system.
I need to install the LAN card first.
If you plan to use Amanda client software to configure Amanda and
allow users to access messages from their computers as well as their
telephones, you need to install Amanda as a voice server, select the second option “The LAN card is installed. Configure Voice Server system.”
If you plan to configure Amanda from this computer and allow users to
access messages only from their telephones, select the first option “No
LAN card. Configure Stand-alone system.”
8.
The next few screens display information about your computer and the
installation. Follow the directions on the screen.
If everything is OK, the installation can continue. Otherwise, the installation stops.
The first screen of the following examples appears only for new installations. If you are installing Amanda as a standalone system, some screens
will have less information than the examples.
Chapter 5: Installing Amanda Software
45
Since this is a new installation, a new CONFIG.SYS file will be
created; you do not need to take any action yourself.
Press [Esc] to quit, any other key to continue ...
Checking your computer for the proper components and conflicts .
. .
Verifying computer processor type
. . .
OK
Verifying the video adaptor type . . . .
OK
Verifying total amount of memory . . . .
OK
Verifying total conventional memory. . .
OK
Verifying operating system version . . .
OK
Verifying sufficient free disk space . .
OK
Press [Esc] to quit, any other key to continue ...
46
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Please note that you have the following additional components . . .
Serial port COM1 at address
: 1016
Serial port COM2 at address
: 760
Serial port COM3 at address
: 744
Parallel port LPT1 at address: 888
Video Adaptor Card type
: VGA (Video Graphics Array)
Video Monitor Display type
: Color
Available disk space
: 176295936
Press [Esc] to quit, any other key to continue ...
Your original installation of [email protected]/DOS 7.xx Revision X
is nearly finished.
The system will next reboot and the initial memory configuration
will begin.
Next, the network portion of the Voice Server will be installed.
Finally, since this is a new installation, the SETUP program will
run automatically to create a configuration file with all default
values for you.
Last, the system will reboot again and Amanda
will be started.
REMOVE INSTALLATION "DISK 5 of 5" FROM DISK DRIVE.
Press any key to continue ...
If the installation proceeds, you will be asked to insert each of the five
installation disks into your floppy disk drive in order.
Chapter 5: Installing Amanda Software
47
If you selected a networked Voice Server installation, you will also be
asked to install the MS-NETWORK files required to connect your
[email protected]/DOS Voice Server to the network. You will be
asked to remove the disk labeled “Microsoft Workgroup Add-On for
MS-DOS, Disk 1 - Setup” from its sealed envelope and insert it in your
floppy disk drive.
Opening the sealed envelope indicates your acceptance of the Microsoft
software license terms shown on the inside cover of the User’s Guide
for Microsoft WORKGROUP ADD-ON MS-DOS included in your package.
During the installation process, your computer will reboot once or
twice.
9.
Follow the directions on the screens. Eventually, a screen informs you
that “This completes the installation….”
NOTE: If this is an upgrade or a reinstallation, the installation program does not update your existing CONFIG.SYS file.
However, it suggests that you change your CONFIG.SYS
to work better with Amanda.
It recommends that you reset the DOS environment memory size to an amount based on the information you provided about ports during the installation.
For example, if the program suggests a setting of 346, you
should add or change the /E parameter in your SHELL
statement. It might look like the following:
SHELL=C:\COMMAND.COM /E:346 /P
The installation program also suggests that you remove the
EMS memory limit allocated for your memory manager (if
that manager is EMM386.EXE).
For example, suppose the DEVICE statement for
EMM386.EXE is similar to the following:
DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE 272 …
You remove the 272. The EMS memory limit is the only
solitary number in the DEVICE statement.
10. Set up Amanda to work with your telephone switching system and
according to your voice mail preferences.
Use the next few chapters to define dial codes, define tone and integration patterns, and set Amanda’s configuration options.
48
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Updating Amanda
If you are upgrading Amanda software, the installation screens are somewhat
different from the new installation described above. Follow the directions on
the screen, and the installation process should go smoothly.
If the installation program recommends changes to your CONFIG.SYS file,
you need to make these changes yourself. The installation program does
NOT create a new CONFIG.SYS file for you because commands you added
or changed to run your system could be replaced.
If you installed Amanda as a standalone only, change C:\CONFIG.SYS, the
CONFIG.SYS file in the root directory.
If you installed Amanda as a voice server, make the recommended changes
to both C:\AMANDA\DOSMODE\CONFIG.SYS and
C:\AMANDA\NETMODE\CONFIG.SYS. Depending on the mode in which
you run Amanda, the CONFIG.SYS file (and other files) are copied to the
root directory (C:\) from either C:\AMANDA\DOSMODE or
C:\AMANDA\NETMODE. Changing the CONFIG.SYS in the root
directory only is like not changing the file at all because it will be replaced
every time you start Amanda.
Activating your Site
Use the Activate utility to enter a product activation key. This is a key
provided by your Amanda sales representative to activate your site. Amanda
places the key in your install.cfg file as the product_activation_key
configuration option. If you already entered this key, press Enter. This utility
also lists the serial numbers and the OEM codes for every board it detects in
your computer.
NOTE: If you have non-Amanda voice boards, there is another activation key that you must enter using the setup program or
install.cfg.
Syntax: activate
Chapter 5: Installing Amanda Software
49
To enter a product activation key:
1.
At the C:\AMANDA> prompt, type:
activate
Amanda lists serial numbers and OEM codes for your boards. You are
prompted:
Enter product activation key:
2.
Type your key and press Enter.
50
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Chapter 6:
Running the Setup Utility
Running Setup
You must configure Amanda to work properly with your telephone
switching system and to let Amanda know your customer’s voice mail and
other preferences. The Amanda Company provides the Setup utility to make
configuring Amanda easier.
You run Setup to configure dial codes, tone patterns, DTMF integration
patterns, and Amanda’s system configuration options.
To run Setup:
1.
If Amanda is running, shut down the Amanda system.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Press Alt+S (if Amanda is running as a standalone) or s (if
Amanda is running as a voice server).
Type in the password. (The default is AMandA with only the
first two and the last letter capitalized.)
Press Enter.
Press Y (to confirm the shutdown).
Press Y again (to reconfirm).
Change to the AMANDA directory—unless you are there already. At
the DOS prompt, type:
CD C:\AMANDA
Then press Enter.
52
Installing [email protected]/DOS
3.
Now that the DOS prompt reads C:\AMANDA, type:
SETUP
Then press Enter.
The [email protected]/DOS Configuration Utility menu appears.
4.
From this menu, you define the following for your telephone switching
system and Amanda. Each is described in one of the next few chapters:
•
Telephone System Dial Codes
•
Telephone System Tone Patterns
•
System Integration Patterns
•
System Configuration Options
System Configuration Options contains two sections:
General Configuration
Displays dialog boxes that guide you through
the options that are most often changed, whether they appear in the INSTALL.CFG file or the
default template for mailboxes (normally mailbox 997).
These dialog boxes are explained in “Chapter
10: Configuring Amanda.”
Advanced Configuration
Allows you to change any configuration setting
in INSTALL.CFG. The options are divided
into categories to make it easier to locate the
options you need to change. The options are parameter lists. Each option is explained in
“Chapter 18: Configuration Reference.”
Chapter 7:
Defining Dial Codes
Defining Dial Codes
To communicate with the telephone switching system, Amanda must know
the switching system’s dial codes. Most Amanda systems are connected to
only one switching system, but you can connect your system to two.
By default, the 1001.PBX file is used to store dial codes. You can change
this if you choose. However The Amanda Company has reserved the
numeric names from 1002 to 2001, so do not use any number in that range as
the name of your file.
As part of a new installation, the file 1001.PBX is created for you based on
the Panasonic KX-T308/616/1232 telephone switching system. If you are
upgrading your Amanda system, the file you used for dial codes in the past
will be renamed to 1001 (and 2001 if two switches are used). Also, the Setup
utility may not know what switching system your dial codes file is based on.
The names of the switching systems appear in the .PBX files containing
codes for these systems and are displayed by the Setup utility. Yours may be
based on an older version of Amanda that did not have the switching system
names in the files. If so, yours may be identified by Setup as “not defined.”
NOTE: Instead of using Setup, you can edit your .PBX file in the
C:\AMANDA\PBX.DB directory using the JOVE utility.
See “Chapter 12: Utilities,” in Administering [email protected]/DOS for information about JOVE.
54
Installing [email protected]/DOS
To define dial codes:
1.
Run Setup as explained in “Running Setup” on page 51.
2.
From the Configuration Utility menu, press 1 to select Telephone System Dial Codes.
The Telephone Switch Type screen lists 1001.PBX and 2001.PBX along
with the names of the switching systems they are based on or identifies
the switching system as not defined.
3.
From the Telephone Switch Type screen, do one of the following:
•
If the telephone switching system is the correct one (or if the telephone switching system is the one you have used in the past—even
though it is identified as not defined):
•
Select the file to be edited then press Enter.
Setup displays the dial codes and their descriptions.
•
If the telephone switching system is not the one listed:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Select one of the .PBX files.
Press F2 to display a list of switching systems.
Use the arrow keys to select the name of your system or the
name of a system which has codes similar to yours then
press Enter.
Press Enter again to display the dial codes and their descriptions.
Chapter 7: Defining Dial Codes
4.
55
To change any dial codes that do not apply to your system:
a.
b.
c.
Use the following Dial Codes Table to understand each of the
codes displayed on the screen.
Use the Up Arrow, Down Arrow, Tab, or Enter keys to select
the code you want to change.
Type the new code over the current code (if there is one).
(You can also use Backspace, Delete, spacebar, and the Right
Arrow and Left Arrow keys to edit the code.)
d.
When you are finished, press F10 to save your changes.
(To return to the Telephone System Dial Codes screen without saving your changes, press Esc.)
e.
5.
Repeat steps A through D for any other codes to be changed.
When you have finished defining the dial codes, press Esc to return to
the Amanda Configuration Utility menu.
Dial Codes Table
Dial Code Label
Description
What to dial to put the caller on transfer hold:
The code Amanda dials to ask the telephone switching system to put the
caller on transfer hold before she transfers a caller to an extension.
Usually, this code is “F-” (a hookflash followed by a half-second pause).
This may need to be changed to “F--” (a hookflash followed by a onesecond pause) or “F,” (a hookflash followed by a two-second pause) for
telephone switching systems that are slow to provide a transfer dial tone
after a hookflash. (Don’t use the quotation marks in the dial code.)
If tmo_dtwait is greater than 0, the number of dashes set for this option
is irrelevant. Use the value 0 for tmo_dtwait for faster call processing.
For more information about tmo_dtwait, see “What to dial to put the caller on transfer hold:” on page 55.
If you are editing C:\AMANDA\PBX.DB\1001.PBX instead of using
Setup, this is the dl_dtwait option.
56
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Dial Codes Table (Continued)
Dial Code Label
Description
What to dial when there is
no transfer dial tone:
The code Amanda dials to return to the caller if both of the following are
true:
You configure Amanda to wait for a transfer dial tone before transferring
a call to an extension
There is no transfer dial tone
In this case, Amanda treats the attempted transfer as though the extension was busy.
Some telephone switching systems use “F-”, others use “-”. (Don’t use
the quotation marks in the dial code.)
If you are editing C:\AMANDA\PBX.DB\1001.PBX instead of using
Setup, this is the dl_ndtret option.
What to dial to return to
the caller after ring no answer:
During supervised transfers, if the extension rings the specified number
of times but is not answered, Amanda dials this code to ask the telephone
switching system to reconnect the caller to Amanda. (See the questionnaire in “Chapter 10: Configuring Amanda” for more information about
configuring the number of rings.)
Usually, this code is “F-”. (Don’t use the quotation marks in the dial
code.)
If you are editing C:\AMANDA\PBX.DB\1001.PBX instead of using
Setup, this is the dl_rnaret option.
What to dial to return to
the caller after busy:
During supervised transfers, Amanda dials this code to ask the telephone
switching system to reconnect the caller to Amanda if the extension is
busy.
Usually, this code is “F-”. (Don’t use the quotation marks in the dial
code.)
If you are editing C:\AMANDA\PBX.DB\1001.PBX instead of using
Setup, this is the dl_bsyret option.
Chapter 7: Defining Dial Codes
57
Dial Codes Table (Continued)
Dial Code Label
What to dial after a call
screening reject:
Description
The code Amanda dials to reconnect to the caller if all of the following
are true:
Amanda is performing a supervised transfer
Call screening is ON
The user at the extension that was called rejects the caller
In this case, Amanda plays the mailbox’s current greeting.
Usually, this code is “F-”. (Don’t use the quotation marks in the dial
code.)
If you are editing C:\AMANDA\PBX.DB\1001.PBX instead of using
Setup, this is the dl_hupret option.
What to dial to connect a
caller to an extension:
During supervised transfers, Amanda dials this code to complete the call
transfer after detecting an answer at the called extension. If call screening is ON, Amanda dials this code only after the user at the extension accepts the call.
Usually, this code is “H” (for Hang up). (Don’t use the quotation marks
in the dial code.)
If you are editing C:\AMANDA\PBX.DB\1001.PBX instead of using
Setup, this is the dl_connect option.
What to dial before the
mailbox extension:
If Amanda needs to dial something after dial tone detection, but before
dialing the extension number, enter that code here.
Usually this is left blank.
If you are editing C:\AMANDA\PBX.DB\1001.PBX instead of using
Setup, this is the dl_prefix option.
What to dial after the mailbox extension:
If Amanda needs to dial something after dialing the extension number,
enter that code here.
Don’t use an “H” for a blind transfer here because this setting is global.
Sometimes you need “1-” to bypass the hands-free answer feature (voice
announce) on some telephone systems. (Don’t use the quotation marks
in the dial code.)
If you are editing C:\AMANDA\PBX.DB\1001.PBX instead of using
Setup, this is the dl_suffix option.
58
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Dial Codes Table (Continued)
Dial Code Label
What to dial on each port
after the system starts:
Description
If you want Amanda to dial some initialization codes when she first
starts up, define those codes here. For example, you may want to remove
call forwarding on the ports.
Usually this is left blank.
If you are editing C:\AMANDA\PBX.DB\1001.PBX instead of using
Setup, this is the dl_init option.
What to dial on each port
before shutdown:
If you want Amanda to dial certain codes when she shuts down, define
those codes here. For example, enabling call forwarding on the ports lets
a live operator take the calls when Amanda shuts down.
Usually this is left blank.
If you are editing C:\AMANDA\PBX.DB\1001.PBX instead of using
Setup, this is the dl_stop option.
What to dial when a port
goes off-hook:
If Amanda must dial some special codes as she goes off-hook to enable
a special feature, define those special codes here. For example, you may
enable special types of SMDI integration over a serial port.
Usually this is left blank.
If you are editing C:\AMANDA\PBX.DB\1001.PBX instead of using
Setup, this is the dl_pickup option.
What to dial to create or
record a conference call:
Controls how to do a conference call when the called party answers the
telephone.
You provide the digits used to conference the caller, called party, and
Amanda (for example, “*3”). (Don’t use the quotation marks in the dial
code.) If your telephone switching system does not have this capability,
leave it blank.
For example, if the Extension field for a mailbox contains 127KM,
Amanda dials 127. When an answer is detected, Amanda dials the conference dial code (such as “*3”) which conferences the caller, the called
party, and Amanda. Instead of hanging up when she connects the two
parties, Amanda records the conversation as a message in mailbox 127.
If you are editing C:\AMANDA\PBX.DB\1001.PBX instead of using
Setup, this is the dl_conference option.
Chapter 7: Defining Dial Codes
59
Dial Codes Table (Continued)
Dial Code Label
Description
Number of seconds to wait
for dial tone detection:
This is the number of seconds Amanda waits for your telephone switching system to provide a continuous dial tone for one full second. If your
system has few DTMF receivers or intercom paths for call transfers, one
may not be immediately available for Amanda to transfer a call. In this
case, this number should be greater than 0.
Use 0 when Amanda does not wait for a dial tone (as when the telephone
switching system returns stutter dial tone or silence on a transfer). A
good value is 4 (seconds) when she does wait for a dial tone. The range
is 0–127.
If you are editing C:\AMANDA\PBX.DB\1001.PBX instead of using
Setup, this is the tmo_dtwait option.
Number of 1/100 seconds
to use for Flash time:
Determines how long Amanda remains on-hook while performing a
hookflash. The value is in hundredths of seconds.
The usual value is 55 (just over half a second).
When set too short, the hookflash does not happen; when set too long, it
hangs up.
If you are editing C:\AMANDA\PBX.DB\1001.PBX instead of using
Setup, this is the flashtm option.
Which DTMF tone to listen to for hangup detection:
If your telephone switching system plays a specific DTMF tone or sequence of tones when a caller hangs up (to make hangup detection faster), enter that DTMF digit here.
If your telephone switching system has this capability, the code is usually the letter “d” which represents DTMF D. This may be a sequence of
DTMF digits rather than a single DTMF digit. The maximum length is
10 characters. If your system does not support this feature, leave it blank.
If you are editing C:\AMANDA\PBX.DB\1001.PBX instead of using
Setup, this is the dt_hangup option.
What to dial to turn on the
message waiting indicator:
If your telephone switching system has message waiting indicators, enter
the code needed to turn the indicator on.
What to dial to turn off the
message waiting indicator:
If your telephone switching system has message waiting indicators, enter
the code needed to turn the indicator off.
60
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Chapter 8:
Defining Tone Patterns
Using this Chapter
You can use either GetTones, an Amanda Company utility, AccuCall Plus, a
Brooktrout utility, to define tone patterns. Both are explained in this chapter.
Neither work with the RDSP/RTNI two-board combination. These utilities
do not know how to make MVIP connections to the DSP resource in order to
dial. The only solution is to use a 232 or 432 voice board while you define
the tones. Then you replace the 232 or 432 voice board with the ATI board
combination.
Using GetTones
Amanda must recognize telephone switching system tone patterns when
performing supervised transfers. The Setup utility runs another utility,
named GetTones, to “learn” the tone patterns for ringing, busy, hang-up, and
reorder (also called fast busy).
Before running the GetTones utility, you must have satisfied all of the
following requirements:
•
•
•
•
Define the dial codes. See “Chapter 7: Defining Dial Codes.”
Connect ports 1 and 2 (the top RJ-14 jack of the first Brooktrout
board) to valid, working single-line extensions on the telephone
switching system.
Know the extension number to which port 1 is connected.
Verify that the extension to which port 1 is connected is not in any
hunt group, and does not have any call forwarding programmed.
62
Installing [email protected]/DOS
•
•
Verify that the extension to which port 2 is connected has outside
line access and can dial a test telephone number that is answered and
does not hang up after answering (time or weather lines are good
choices to call).
Define a non-Amanda extension that has a telephone connected, is
not forwarded, and will not be answered. This becomes your Ring
No Answer (RNA) test station.
To define telephone switching system tone patterns:
1.
Make sure that you have satisfied all the above requirements.
2.
Run Setup as explained in “Running Setup” on page 51.
3.
From the Configuration Utility menu, press 2 to select Telephone System Tone Patterns.
The GetTones for Brooktrout Voice Boards screen appears.
4.
By default, the output file has the same name as your .PBX file. However, it ends with the extension .TON.
Chapter 8: Defining Tone Patterns
5.
63
Enter the outdial code, port 1’s station number, the reorder code, and the
RNA station number. Use the Up Arrow, Down Arrow, Tab, or Enter
key to move from one entry to the next.
outdial code
Type the outside line access and telephone
numbers for a connection to test for tone patterns (such as the time or weather number). For
example:
9,5551111
Then press Enter.
port 1 station number
Type the extension for a standalone (no call
hunting or forwarding) single-line (analog) extension connected to port 1.
Then press Enter.
reorder code
Type any dial code that generates a reorder tone
pattern on the telephone switching system.
Typically, invalid extension numbers work
well, for example, 555 generally works. If not,
try 444 or 777 or any number that generates a
fast busy tone pattern.
Then press Enter.
Ring No Answer
station number
Type a non-Amanda extension that has a telephone connected and is not answered or call
forwarded. If voice-announce or call-announce
is enabled, remember to enter the extension
plus the additional digit or digits that force the
extension to ring. For example, if the RNA test
station is 112, type:
1121Then press Enter.
6.
Press F4 to run GetTones.
GetTones obtains the ring, busy, reorder, and hangup patterns of the
telephone switching system. Messages appear on your screen as the utility gets and tests these patterns.
64
Installing [email protected]/DOS
NOTE: If you have problems with the GetTones utility, such as not
getting good patterns or not being able to verify a tone pattern, try using AccuCall Plus, a Brooktrout utility that also
captures tone patterns. See “Using AccuCall Plus” on
page 64.
Using AccuCall Plus
The C:\AMANDA\PBX.DB\1001.TON file defines the tone patterns that the
telephone switching system returns to Amanda. Amanda recognizes these
tones and uses her knowledge of them when she transfers calls. AccuCall
Plus is a Brooktrout utility that allows you to set up ring, busy, reorder/fast
busy/error, and special tone (such as a fax CNG tone) definitions.
This section is primarily for running tests that create new .TON files. If your
telephone switching system performs inband signaling integration, you may
not need the Ring No Answer (RNA) or ringback pattern.
You might edit an existing file to adjust the cadence or the percentage of
variation. For example, suppose a ring is usually one second on followed by
three seconds off. However, sometimes it is a bit shorter or longer. You may
want to increase the percentage of variation to allow for the differences. If
the busy and reorder tones are very similar, you might need to reduce the
percentage of variation to differentiate between them.
Amanda must be shut down before you run AccuCall Plus.
To run AccuCall Plus:
1.
If Amanda is running, shut down the Amanda system:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Press Alt+S (if Amanda is running as a standalone) or s (if
Amanda is running as a voice server).
Type in the password. (The default is AMandA with only the
first two and the last letter capitalized.)
Press Enter.
Press Y (to confirm the shutdown).
Press Y again (to reconfirm).
Chapter 8: Defining Tone Patterns
65
When the C:\AMANDA prompt appears, you can start running AccuCall Plus.
2.
Change directory to C:\ACCUCALL by typing:
cd c:\accucall
3.
Press Enter.
4.
You can create a new 1001.TON file or edit an existing file.
To create a new 1001.TON file, run AccuCall by typing:
accucall
To edit an existing 1001.TON file, run AccuCall by typing:
accucall C:\AMANDA\PBX.DB\1001.TON
5.
Press Enter.
The AccuCall Plus main screen has several options. The list of function
keys at the bottom of the screen indicate which keys go with each
option.
66
Installing [email protected]/DOS
6.
Select “AUTO RUN” by pressing F6.
Chapter 8: Defining Tone Patterns
67
To define the Ring No Answer (RNA) tone pattern:
1.
Type a telephone number for an extension in the Phone No. field. This
extension number must not be forwarded, not in a hunt group, not in
hands free/speaker phone mode, and not be answered by anyone.
2.
Type 3 in the Verification Count field. This is the number of times you
want to run the test.
3.
Type 10 in the Minimum Cycles field. This is the number of rings AccuCall Plus will listen to before completing the test cycle.
4.
Select Full (the default) as the value for the Frequency Range field.
The possible values are:
Full (300 Hz to 1700 Hz)
High (800 Hz to 1700 Hz)
This is the range of frequencies that AccuCall Plus listens to.
5.
The Frequencies Detected Window displays the frequencies detected by
AccuCall Plus to characterize the tone.
6.
The Cadence Detected Window displays the cadence that AccuCall Plus
detected to characterize the tone. (This is displayed as a horizontal bar
graph.)
7.
Press F9 to begin the test.
8.
After AccuCall Plus has determined the system tone pattern, you can
customize the tone description using the Edit Tones box:
Name:
Example: Panasonic Double Ring
Type:
Ring1 if single ring, single pause
Ring2 if double ring, single pause
Terminating:
NO
Cadence:
NO
Frequency1:
Determined by test
Frequency2:
Determined by test
68
Installing [email protected]/DOS
PCPM Code:
8 (always for ring tones)
Quick Count:
None
On Time:
Determined by test
On Max Variation: Determined by test
On Min Variation: Determined by test
Off Time:
Determined by test
Off Max Variation: Determined by test
Off Min Variation: Determined by test
9.
Save the tone by pressing F8 (twice).
10. From the main screen, press F3 to go to the Filters screen. The Undefined Tone Frequencies box on the right side of the screen lists any
undefined frequencies that were found by the test.
11. Add these frequencies to the Filter table on the left side. Write each frequency in the Filter table, replacing the word “none” with the frequency.
12. Then press F10 to save this information and return to the main screen.
NOTE: All the listed frequencies must be at least 40 Hz apart
so Amanda can distinguish them.
To define the Busy tone pattern:
1.
Fill in the telephone number for an extension that is offhook and
connected to either another internal extension or to an outside line.
2.
Type 3 in the Verification Count field. This is the number of times you
want to run the test.
3.
Type 10 in the Minimum Cycles field. This is the number of rings AccuCall Plus will listen to before completing the test cycle.
Chapter 8: Defining Tone Patterns
4.
69
Select Full (the default) as the value for the Frequency Range field.
The possible values are:
Full (300 Hz to 1700 Hz)
High (800 Hz to 1700 Hz)
This is the range of frequencies that AccuCall Plus listens to.
5.
The Frequencies Detected Window displays the frequencies detected by
AccuCall Plus to characterize the tone.
6.
The Cadence Detected Window displays the cadence that AccuCall Plus
detected to characterize the tone. (This is displayed as a horizontal bar
graph.)
7.
Press F9 to begin the test.
8.
After AccuCall Plus has determined the system tone pattern, you can
customize the tone description using the Edit Tones box:
Name:
Example: Panasonic Busy
Type:
Busy1 if regular busy cadence
Busy2 if double busy cadence
Terminating:
YES (always)
Cadence:
NO
Frequency1:
Determined by test
Frequency2:
Determined by test
PCPM Code:
7 (always for busy tones)
Quick Count:
None
On Time:
Determined by test
On Max Variation: Determined by test
On Min Variation: Determined by test
Off Time:
Determined by test
Off Max Variation: Determined by test
Off Min Variation: Determined by test
70
Installing [email protected]/DOS
NOTE: A normal single busy tone is approximately 500 msec
on and 500 msec off.
9.
Save the tone by pressing F8 (twice).
10. Press F8 to add the tone.
11. From the main screen, press F3 to go to the Filters screen. The Undefined Tone Frequencies box on the right side of the screen lists any
undefined frequencies that were found by the test.
12. Add these frequencies to the Filter table on the left side. Write each frequency in the Filter table, replacing the word “none” with the frequency.
Make sure that the busy frequencies are listed in the first four positions
in the table (these positions are for terminating tones). When a tone is a
terminating tone, Amanda does not wait for it to be repeated before taking control of the call.
13. Then press F10 to save this information and return to the main screen.
To define the Reorder/Fast Busy/Error tone pattern:
1.
Type a telephone number for an invalid extension in the Phone No. field.
This extension number must return the reorder tone. For example, you
might use 777 or 888. Test this tone from a single-line telephone before
you run this test.
2.
Type 3 in the Verification Count field. This is the number of times you
want to run the test.
3.
Type 10 in the Minimum Cycles field. This is the number of rings AccuCall Plus will listen to before completing the test cycle.
4.
Select Full (the default) as the value for the Frequency Range field.
The possible values are:
Full (300 Hz to 1700 Hz)
High (800 Hz to 1700 Hz)
This is the range of frequencies that AccuCall Plus listens to.
Chapter 8: Defining Tone Patterns
71
5.
The Frequencies Detected Window displays the frequencies detected by
AccuCall Plus to characterize the tone.
6.
The Cadence Detected Window displays the cadence that AccuCall Plus
detected to characterize the tone. (This is displayed as a horizontal bar
graph.)
7.
Press F9 to begin the test.
8.
After AccuCall Plus has determined the system tone pattern, you can
customize the tone description using the Edit Tones box:
Name:
Example: Panasonic Reorder Tone
Type:
Busy if normal reorder
Terminating:
YES
Cadence:
NO
Frequency1:
Determined by test
Frequency2:
Determined by test
PCPM Code:
7 (always for busy tones)
Quick Count:
None
On Time:
Determined by test
On Max Variation: Determined by test
On Min Variation: Determined by test
Off Time:
Determined by test
Off Max Variation: Determined by test
Off Min Variation: Determined by test
9.
Save the tone by pressing F8 (twice).
10. From the main screen, press F3 to go to the Filters screen. The Undefined Tone Frequencies box on the right side of the screen lists any
undefined frequencies that were found by the test.
72
Installing [email protected]/DOS
11. Add these frequencies to the Filter table on the left side. Write each frequency in the Filter table, replacing the word “none” with the frequency.
Make sure that the reorder frequencies are listed in the first four positions in the table (these positions are for terminating tones).
12. Then press F10 to save this information and return to the main screen.
To finish AccuCall Plus:
1.
Press F7 to save the tone file.
2.
Type the file name C:\AMANDA\PBX.DB\1001.TON.
3.
Press F8 to save the file.
AccuCall Plus will not allow you to save to file unless you have defined
all the filters. It will also refuse to save to file if any two frequencies are
within 40Hz of each other.
If you have two frequencies that are closer than 40Hz, the best strategy
is to select a value that is between them and then go back to edit every
tone pattern that contains the two frequencies and replace them with that
value. To edit tones press <F8> from the main menu.
4.
Exit the AccuCall Plus program by pressing F10.
Chapter 9:
Defining Integration Patterns
Using the Trace File for Integration
If your telephone switching system supports DTMF integration (also called
inband integration), you can:
1.
Perform tests that add integration information to the TRACE.OUT file.
2.
Convert that information to a set of integration strings.
3.
Add the integration strings to the 1001.PBX file in the
C:\AMANDA\PBX.DB directory using the Setup or JOVE utilities.
NOTE: See “Chapter 12: Utilities,” in Administering [email protected] for information about JOVE.
Depending on the telephone switching system you selected when you
defined dial codes (see “Defining Dial Codes” on page 53), some of the
integration patterns might be already filled in. Many telephone switching
systems are programmable, so existing patterns on the System Integration
Patterns screen may still need modification.
Make sure you define dial codes before performing the procedures in this
chapter. Otherwise you will overwrite all the integration information as the
Setup utility creates the 1001.PBX file for you using The Amanda
Company’s predefined .PBX file for the PBX that you select.
74
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Setting Up the Trace File
To check that trace files are being created:
1.
If Amanda is running, shut down the Amanda system.
2.
At the DOS prompt, type the following to go to the root directory:
CD\
3.
Then press Enter.
4.
Edit the Amanda.bat file by typing:
JOVE AMANDA.BAT
5.
Then press Enter.
The JOVE editor appears on the screen. Towards the bottom of the page
is a line that starts RAMANDA. You are ready to proceed if the line
reads:
RAMANDA /t5 /s1300 %1 %2 %3
If not, edit the line so that it is identical to this line.
6.
To save and close the file, press the four following key combinations in
order:
Ctrl+X
Ctrl+S
Ctrl+X
Ctrl+C
7.
At the DOS prompt, change directories to the pbx database by typing:
CD\AMANDA\PBX.DB
Then press Enter.
8.
Edit the Pbx file by typing:
JOVE 1001.PBX
9.
Then press Enter.
Chapter 9: Defining Integration Patterns
75
10. Press Page Down display the lower portion of the file where the integration (if any) is displayed.
11. Use Down Arrow to move the cursor to the bottom of the file to a blank
line.
12. Type the following:
integration 10
‘rrrrrrrrrr’
This new integration string will capture up to 10 digits of In Band Signaling that will be displayed in the trace file for later inclusion in
1001.PBX.
13. To save and close the file, press the four following key combinations in
order:
Ctrl+X
Ctrl+S
Ctrl+X
Ctrl+C
14. At the DOS prompt, type:
CD\
15. Then press Enter.
16. Start Amanda by typing:
AMANDA
17. Then press Enter.
Creating Test Patterns
After enabling the Trace capability and restarting Amanda, the telephone
switching system must be programmed to perform the following
capabilities:
•
•
Select an extension that forwards on Ring No Answer to Amanda.
Select another extension that forwards to the above extension on
Ring No Answer.
76
Installing [email protected]/DOS
•
•
•
•
•
Select a third extension that forwards on Busy to Amanda.
Select a fourth extension that forwards to the third extension on
Busy.
Select a fifth extension that forwards all calls to Amanda.
If applicable, create a hunt group that will forward back to Amanda
if the hunt group is busy or rings without answer.
Create a Direct Inward Line by having an outside CO trunk line ring
at an extension that will forward on Ring No Answer and Busy to
Amanda. Tests 5 and 6 below do not have CO line identification enabled. Tests 7 and 8 do.
Running the Tests
To run the tests:
1.
Start Amanda by typing the following at the DOS prompt:
amanda
2.
Then press Enter.
Test 1
•
Place a call to the extension that forwards on Ring No Answer to
Amanda. Once Amanda has received the forwarded call, hang up.
Test 2
•
Place a call to the second extension that is forwarded to the first extension. When Amanda has received the call, hang up.
Test 3
•
Place a call to the third extension that forwards on Busy to Amanda.
Make sure that the extension is offhook and connected to another extension or outside line. Once Amanda has received the busy forwarded call, hang up.
Chapter 9: Defining Integration Patterns
Test 4
•
Place a call to the fourth extension that is busy forwarded to the third
extension. Make sure that both extensions are offhook and either
connected to each other, or to outside lines. Once Amanda has received the busy forwarded call, hang up.
Test 5
•
Call in on the CO line that is directed to an extension that is forwarded to Amanda on Ring No Answer. Make sure that CO Line ID is
disabled. Once Amanda receives the call, hang up.
Test 6
•
Call in on the CO line that is directed to an extension that is forwarded to Amanda on Busy. Make sure that the CO Line ID is disabled.
Once Amanda receives the call, hang up.
Test 7
•
Repeat test 5 with CO Line ID enabled.
Test 8
•
Repeat test 6 with CO Line ID enabled.
Test 9
•
Call directly into Amanda from any extension. When Amanda answers the call, hang up.
Reading the Trace File
To read the trace file:
1.
Shut down Amanda.
2.
At the C:\AMANDA> prompt, type:
JOVE TRACE.OUT
77
78
Installing [email protected]/DOS
3.
Then press Enter.
The first line should read similar to:
Oct 09 15:51:00 Begin trace of Amanda…
4.
Press Ctrl+S to perform a search.
5.
Type the following search text:
Using dtmf
6.
Then press Enter.
The JOVE editor searches for the first call’s integration string. The cursor should move to the trace line that reads similar to:
Oct 09 15:53:00 ichan01: Using dtmf data:
#123
The # sign indicates a Ring No Answer forwarded call, and the 123 (for
example) is the extension that forwarded the call to Amanda. These digits could be any combination of DTMF digits. For example, the AT&T
Partner sends:
#03##123#
The #03## is the Ring No Answer code, and the 123# is the extension
number that forwarded. Different telephone switching systems (and
often different models) send different digits.
7.
WRITE DOWN THE INTEGRATION INFORMATION FOR THIS
CALL.
8.
Press Ctrl+S again.
9.
Keep the same search string by just pressing Enter.
You should progress to the next call’s digits.
10. WRITE DOWN THE INTEGRATION INFORMATION FOR THIS
CALL.
Chapter 9: Defining Integration Patterns
79
11. Repeat steps 8 through 10 until all 9 integration stings have been
recorded. Some of the strings may be identical (although the extension
may be different if you tested from different stations).
12. To return to the C:\Amanda> prompt, press the following key combinations:
Ctrl+X
Ctrl+C
To decide what integration strings to add to 1001.PBX:
1.
Look at the integration string from Test 1. This represents a Ring No
Answer call that forwarded to Amanda. Locate the characters that match
the extension number that forwarded. On your notepad, rewrite the
string so that the extension number is replaced by the lower case letter
r’s. For example, if your string was “#123”, then your new string would
be “#rrr”. In the case of the Partner example, the “#03##123# would be
changed to “#03##rrr#.
NOTE: You may have 2, 3, 4 or more digits in your extension
numbers. The number of r’s will match the number of
digits in your extension dial plan.
2.
Go to the integration string for Test 2. It may be similar to the one
above, or it may contain a more complex string that has both the first
and second extensions listed. If the string is identical to the previous
string (for example, #03##123#), draw a line through it on your notepad.
If both extensions are listed, determine which number was the first
extension (originally called) and which was the second extension. If
your string looks similar to “#122123”, then the 122 was the second
extension, and 123 was the first extension. On your string, replace the
first extension with the lower case r’s and the first extension with lower
case s’s. Our example would look like “#sssrrr”. The Partner would
change from “#03##122#123#” to #03##sss#rrr#”.
3.
The integration string from Test 3 may be identical to the string from
Test 1 (except for the extension number). If so, draw a line through it.
80
Installing [email protected]/DOS
If not, then your switch sends a unique busy forwarded integration to
Amanda. For example, the string may look like “*123”. The “*” denotes
a busy forwarded call, and the “123” is the extension that forwarded.
Replace the “123” with lower case b’s. Your string would now look like
“*bbb”.
4.
The integration string from Test 4 may be identical to the one from Test
3. If so, draw a line through it.
If not, then identify the first extension number and replace the number
with lower case b’s. Identify the second extension number and replace
the number with lower case s’s. Your string may have looked like
“*122123” and should now look like “*sssbbb”.
5.
The integration string from Test 5 is to differentiate a trunk based call
from a station based transfer if the switch offers this level of differentiation. If this string is identical to string one or three, draw a line through
it.
If not, evaluate the new string to see what other information was sent in
addition to “123” which is the forwarding extension. If the integration
string contains the trunk ID number (even though it is supposed to be
disabled), replace the numbers with either x’s (if the trunk ID is insignificant).
6.
Repeat step 5 for the string from Test 6, but replace the extension number with b’s rather than r’s.
7.
Repeat step 5 for Test 7. If the string is identical to the one from Test 5,
draw a line through it.
8.
Repeat step 5 for Test 8, but replace the extension number with b’s
rather than r’s. If the string is identical to the one from Test 6, draw a
line through it.
9.
Test 9 captures the signaling for a direct call into voice mail. The integration string probably includes a prefix (usually 1 digit—but it could be
several digits) and the extension number of the calling user. Replace the
extension number with e’s.
Chapter 9: Defining Integration Patterns
81
10. It is extremely important that there are no duplicate integration patterns.
To make sure that each pattern is different, list them on a piece of paper,
then rewrite them changing all character codes to zeros. What is left are
dial code masks which must all be different. For example, using the following dial codes: 1***eee, #02#sss#rrr#, and #03##rrr#, the
dial code masks are 1***000, #02#000#000#, and #03##000#,
which are all different. If any dial code masks are the same, you must
modify the duplicates or delete them.
Adding Integration Strings
You can define integration patterns using either one of the following:
•
•
The Setup utility
The JOVE editor to edit 1001.PBX.
To define DTMF integration patterns using the Setup utility:
1.
Run Setup as explained in “Running Setup” on page 51.
2.
From the Configuration Utility menu, press 3 to select Telephone System Integration Patterns.
The Telephone Switch Type screen appears.
3.
From the Telephone Switch Type screen, select the name of your .PBX
file then press Enter.
82
Installing [email protected]/DOS
The Integration Patterns screen appears. Its first line tells the name and
code (a number between 1001 and 2001) for your switching system (if
they appear in the .PBX file). The following example shows a Toshiba
model.
4.
Type a number of tenths of seconds in the Timeout box.
A value of 0 prevents integration. Any other value is the amount of time
that Amanda will wait for information from the telephone switching system. A suggested value for this timeout is 10 (which equals 1 second). In
some cases you may need a value of 15 or 20.
Depending on the telephone switching system you selected when you
defined dial codes (see “Defining Dial Codes” on page 53), some of the
integration patterns might be already filled in.
NOTE: To move from the timeout field to the integration patterns and vice versa, press Ctrl+Home.
5.
Many telephone switching systems are programmable, so existing patterns on the System Integration Patterns screen may still need modification.
Chapter 9: Defining Integration Patterns
83
Do one or more of the following:
•
Verify that the existing patterns are accurate by checking the manual for your telephone switching system.
•
Edit the existing patterns manually. (Select one, use the arrow keys
to move around, and type over anything that needs to be changed.)
For example, if the Ring No Answer pattern is #6rr, the rr stands for
any two-digit extension. If the #6 is accurate, but you plan to have
three or four-digit extension numbers, you must do some editing.
For three-digit numbers, change the Ring No Answer pattern to
#6rrr instead of #6rr. (See “Using Character Codes” on page 84 for
more information about rrr and other codes.)
•
Delete a pattern by deleting all the characters in it.
To add integration strings to 1001.PBX using JOVE:
1.
At the prompt, type:
CD PBX.DB
2.
Then press Enter.
3.
Type:
JOVE 1001.PBX
4.
Then press Enter. This is the same file we edited earlier.
5.
Press Down Arrow until you select the line that reads:
integration 10
‘rrrrrrrrrr’
6.
Press Delete to remove this line.
7.
Take the integration strings you created in the previous procedure. Type
each one on a separate line in 1001.PBX. For example:
integration 10
‘#03##rrr#
integration 10
‘#03##sss#rrr#
integration 10
‘#00#ee#
84
Installing [email protected]/DOS
NOTE: The 10 is a suggested value for the timeout. 10 equals
1 second. Any other value is the amount of time that
Amanda will wait for information from the telephone
switching system. In some cases you may need a value
of 15 or 20. A value of 0 prevents integration.
These are in addition to the dial codes and any other integration strings
that may have been in the original file. Enter them at the end of the file.
Do not duplicate lines, but do remove any lines that are inaccurate.
8.
To save and close the file, press the four following key combinations in
order:
Ctrl+X
Ctrl+S
Ctrl+X
Ctrl+C
To restart Amanda:
1.
At the DOS prompt, type:
CD\
2.
Then press Enter.
3.
Type:
AMANDA
4.
Then press Enter.
Using Character Codes
You must modify the DTMF patterns so that the integration patterns become
general (not specific to extensions 111 and 127). Call states and extension
information are defined by using one of the character codes shown below.
Each character code represents a call state, the position of the extension
number in the pattern, and the number of digits in the extension. When
inband signaling strings come from the telephone switching system, Amanda
compares them to the defined integration patterns and decides how to handle
the calls.
Chapter 9: Defining Integration Patterns
85
The character codes in the integration patterns are defined as follows:
Code
b
Description
Busy call state
When bbb (or bbbb) appears in the integration pattern, Amanda checks
the Busy Chain. If the Busy Chain is blank, she plays the custom busy
message for mailbox bbb (or bbbb) or the system busy message.
c
ANI or Caller ID digits
When a string of c’s appears in the integration pattern, Amanda stores the
DTMF characters at those locations in the port variable %H. With token
programming the %H can be used to identify callers and so forth.
e
Direct dial call state (used to access a mailbox directly by Amanda asking
for a security code)
When eee (or eeee) appears in the integration pattern, Amanda assumes
the caller wants to log in to mailbox eee (or eeee) and asks for the security
code.
i
Immediate record call state (plays the record tone and starts recording a
message)
When iii (or iiii) appears in the integration pattern, Amanda begins recording a message for mailbox iii (or iiii) without playing a prompt first.
r
Ring-no-answer call state that indicates who the call was for and that it
was not answered
When rrr (or rrrr) appears in the integration pattern, Amanda checks the
Ring No Answer (RNA) Chain. If the RNA Chain is blank, she plays the
current greeting for mailbox rrr (or rrrr) or the system greeting.
See the configuration option “integration_greeting” on page 300 for information about how the system greeting can be played when an integrated call has both the rrr and sss (or rrrr and ssss) fields set.
s
Information regarding where the call came from (for handling message
replies)
If sss (or ssss) is found in the integration pattern along with b’s or r’s,
Amanda recognizes mailbox sss as the sender of the message—if one is
left.
TIP:
When using s’s, the integration requires User IDs for all telephones, even those in the file room and lobby.
86
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Code
t
Description
Trunk call or CO line ID; this can also be used for dynamic port allocation
When ttt (or tttt) appears in the integration pattern, Amanda processes
mailbox ttt (or tttt) normally. Whenever a call comes in on trunk line 3,
for example, mailbox 3 is processed. If trunk lines 1 to 20 support two
companies that share an Amanda system, mailbox’s 1–10 can have
@G(990) in their Extension fields—causing Amanda to play one company’s greeting. mailbox’s 11–20 can have @G(880) in their Extension
fields—causing Amanda to play the other company’s greeting.
x
Wild card that matches anything (use this carefully)
For example 6xxxx would match every inband signaling string that had
a 6 followed by four other characters.
Realize that the character codes you use define not only the placement of the
extension information in the pattern, but also the call state, that is, Ring No
Answer, Busy, Direct, and so forth. Therefore, you can control Amanda’s
behavior based upon your specific requirements. For example, if your
customer does not wish to allow for Busy call states, then modify the
integration character codes and replace the b’s with r’s.
Some telephone switching systems have timing problems that cause the first
DTMF digit to be missed. In such cases, it is useful to add integration
patterns that are variations of the current patterns. For example, you might
add a second pattern for Direct calls (1***eee in our example) as ***eee.
These are identical—except the first digit is missing in the second pattern.
You can also try reducing the delay time (Delay option on SMDI tab in Setup
utility).
Never remove leading digits from a pattern if they differentiate this pattern
from another or if they are “active” digits (such as r’s and b’s).
Chapter 9: Defining Integration Patterns
87
Running Integration Helper
If you know that your telephone switching system supports DTMF
integration, the Integration Helper utility also allows you to determine the
integration patterns.
Before running the Integration Helper be sure that you:
•
•
•
Enable your telephone switching system for voice mail integration.
Program a test extension for call coverage, or call forwarding on
Ring No Answer and Busy, to Amanda. The following procedure assumes that this extension is 111, but it can be any extension.
Make another extension available for placing test calls. The following procedure assumes that this extension is 127.
To run Integration Helper:
1.
Press F4 to run the Integration Helper utility.
The following appears on the screen:
Integration Helper—Waiting for a call on any
port…To abort press ESC…
2.
Place sample calls by calling from the available extension (127) to your
test extension (111). Use these calls to generate DTMF tones so Integration Helper can capture them. You can capture Ring No Answer, Busy,
and Direct call codes—using extensions and CO trunk lines. See “Placing Test Calls” on page 88.
3.
As a code is captured, it appears on the Edit Integration Pattern screen.
You see the captured pattern on two lines, one that is for display only
and the other which you edit. For example, you need to replace extension numbers with patterns such as rrr for ring no answer. (See “Using
Character Codes” on page 84 for more information.)
4.
When you have finished, press Esc to return to the System Integration
Patterns screen. The screen should be filled with the captured DTMF
digits (per your edits) and the descriptions of those codes.
88
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Placing Test Calls
You can place test calls of the following types:
Available extension (127) calls the test extension (111) for Ring No
Answer:
After a Ring No Answer condition occurs, the call should be forwarded to
the Integration Helper program which answers the call and captures the
DTMF digits played by the telephone switching system. You define what
type of test call you made.
Available extension (127) calls the test extension (111) while the test
extension is Busy:
Verify that the test extension (111) has been call forwarded Busy to the
single-line ports you have programmed for Amanda. Make the test extension
(111) Busy. From the available extension (127), call the test extension (111).
The test extension (111) should forward to the single-line ports immediately
after the Integration Helper captures the DTMF digits (if any).
Test extension (111) calls directly to Integration Helper:
From the test extension (111), call the single-line ports. Integration Helper
captures the DTMF digits (if any). Note that some telephone switching
systems use different codes depending upon whether this direct call was
made by dialing an extension or by pressing a message light. You should run
both tests if you suspect this to be true of your system.
Available extension (127) using a CO line calls in and rings the test
extension (111) for Ring No Answer:
From the available extension (127), select an outside CO line and call in to
where you are installing Amanda. When the receptionist answers, ask to be
blind transferred to the test extension (111), which should forward to the
Integration Helper after a certain number of rings.
Chapter 9: Defining Integration Patterns
89
Available extension (127) using a CO line calls in while the test extension
(111) is Busy:
Make the test extension (111) busy. From the available extension (127),
select an outside CO line and call the company where you are installing
Amanda. When the receptionist answers, ask to be blind transferred to the
test extension (111), which should forward to the Integration Helper
immediately.
Forward from Ring No Answer Example
You may have two patterns labeled “Forward from Ring No Answer.” Both
should contain the extension number (111) that was call forwarded to the
Integration Helper. This is the extension that did not answer. One of the
patterns may contain the available extension number you called from (127).
For example, suppose the integration patterns were:
#02#127#111#
and
#03##111
You replace the digits of the test extension (111, the extension that did not
answer) with r’s and the digits of the telephone from which the call was
made, 127, with s’s:
#02#sss#rrr#
and
#03##rrr
90
Installing [email protected]/DOS
This takes care of extensions that have exactly three digits (such as 111 and
127). To handle four-digit extensions, for example, you would have used:
#02#ssss#rrrr#
and
#03##rrrr
Direct Call Example
As a result of the Direct test call, one pattern should be labeled “Direct
call…” and contain the extension number for the telephone from which you
called (111).
Replace the extension number with e’s. For example, change:
1***111
to:
1***eee
This takes care of extensions that have exactly three digits (such as 111 and
127). To handle four-digit extensions, for example, you would have used:
1***eeee
Forward from Busy Example
For patterns labeled “Forward from Busy,” you replace the extension number
that was busy with b’s. If there is a pattern that contains the extension from
which the call was made, replace the extension number with s’s.
Chapter 10:
Configuring Amanda
Using This Chapter
This chapter contains a questionnaire that helps you determine exactly how
your customer needs his Amanda system to be set up. It also guides you as
you configure an Amanda system for the first time. Fortunately, The
Amanda Company has configured Amanda so that over 90% of the
configuration options need no change whatsoever.
For a complete list of the configuration options, see “Chapter 18:
Configuration Reference.”
Using the Questionnaire
Use this “First Use” questionnaire to find out how your customers prefer to
use their Amanda system. Use the results as you run Setup, selection 4, to set
configuration options, and as you create the mailbox template (usually
mailbox 997). Then create mailboxes for users. It comes in both a standalone
and voice server version because setting up mailboxes is different in
Amanda Administrator.
Question Column
The questions address:
•
•
How Amanda handles all callers.
How Amanda interacts with most users. You assign new users the
options that give them an initial, usable mailbox configuration. After
92
Installing [email protected]/DOS
•
each mailbox has been created, the System Administrator can
change these options, and the users themselves can change some options.
System Administration issues.
During your interview with the client, you will use the Question and Circle
Response columns in this questionnaire to select the Amanda features for
this site.
Location Column
You will use the Location and Action columns to implement these features
on Amanda. The Location column uses this symbol → to separate the choices
you must make at each menu level to select the feature from the correct
Amanda screen. For example, “In the Setup utility, select System
Configuration Options→General Configuration→Incoming Calls” means “In
the Setup utility, first select Configuration Options, then select General
Configuration, then select Incoming Calls.”
In the voice server version of the questionnaire, questions 10, 12-23, and 25
(for Amanda Administrator), the Location column directs you to the default
mailbox template (usually 997) that you use to set up new mailboxes. The
Location column directions assume that you are already logged on to
Amanda Administrator and are displaying the Mailbox window. If not, use
one of the following procedures to display the default mailbox template.
To display the Mailbox window (if you are not logged onto Amanda
Administrator):
1.
Start Amanda Administrator.
The Administrator Logon dialog box appears.
2.
Enter your password in the Logon dialog box.
The mailbox List dialog box appears.
3.
Enter 997 (or the mailbox for the default template).
The Mailbox window displays template 997.
Chapter 10: Configuring Amanda
93
To display the Mailbox window (if you are already logged onto Amanda
Administrator but displaying another window):
1.
Click the Mailbox menu and select mailbox.
The mailbox List dialog box appears.
2.
Enter 997 (or the mailbox for the default template).
The Mailbox window displays template 997.
The Location column includes the name of the configuration option (also
called a parameter) for each feature. The current options and their settings
are stored on the Amanda server in C:\AMANDA\INSTALL.CFG. You can
view them using the Setup utility. From Setup, select System Configuration
Options→Advanced Configuration→General.
Standalone Questionnaire
Question
1) Amanda normally says “Please
hold while I try that extension for
you” as she transfers a call. This feature can be turned off.
Do you want Amanda to say “Please
hold….?”
2) Do you want Amanda to verify
that a caller is still on the telephone
before transferring the call to an operator?
(Amanda asks the caller to “Say yes
at the tone” before transferring the
call.)
Circle
Response
Location and Amanda
Parameter (if applicable)
Action
YES
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→General
Configuration→
Incoming Calls.
Set the Amanda Says “Please Hold
While…” check box to T for True,
which is the default.
NO
Amanda parameter is
please_hold
Set the Amanda Says “Please Hold
While…” check box to F for False
You can also bypass this message for
individual mailboxes using the Token
Programming Language (although
only blind transfers are supported).
YES
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→General
Configuration→
Incoming Calls.
Set the Amanda Says “Please Say
‘Yes’…” check box to T for True.
NO
Amanda parameter is
dtmf_gate
Set the Amanda Says “Please Say
‘Yes’…” check box to F for False,
which is the default.
94
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Standalone Questionnaire (Continued)
Question
3) Do you want callers to be able to
hold for busy extensions?
Circle
Response
YES
NO
Location and Amanda
Parameter (if applicable)
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→General
Configuration→
Incoming Calls.
Action
Set the Caller Can Hold check box to
T for True, which is the default.
Set the Caller Can Hold check box to
F for False.
Amanda parameter is
cancel_busy_hold
4) If YES to 3, do you want active
or inactive hold?
On active hold, the caller is prompted to press * to remain on hold.
ACTIVE
INACTIVE
On inactive hold, the caller takes no
action to stay on hold.
Set the Active Hold check box to T for
True, which is the default.
Set the Active Hold check box to F for
False.
Amanda parameter is
active_hold
(800 numbers benefit from using active hold, because the caller cannot
leave the telephone unattended.)
5) Do you want direct messages to
play the Name/Extension recording
instead of the mailbox’s greeting?
YES
(A direct message is left in a user’s
mail box without attempting to ring
that user. By default, Amanda plays
the mailbox’s greeting. The Name/
Ext recording is shorter than the
mailbox’s greeting.)
NO
6) Do you want Amanda to answer
all incoming calls or only answer
when the operator cannot get to the
phone within a certain number of
rings?
ALL CALLS
(This decision can vary from port to
port.)
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→General
Configuration→
Incoming Calls.
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→General
Configuration→
Incoming Calls.
Select the Play User’s Name and Extension Recording option.
Select the Play User’s Greeting option
(which is the default).
Amanda parameter is
short_direct_send
AFTER x
RINGS
What is x?
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→Advanced
Configuration→
Per Port.
Amanda parameter is
n_rings
Set N_RINGS to 1 for each port.
This is a per port setting. The default is
one ring on each port.
(Amanda is being set up as a primary
attendant.)
Set N_RINGS to x for each port,
where x in the number of rings. This is
a per port setting.
(Amanda is being set up as a secondary attendant.)
Chapter 10: Configuring Amanda
95
Standalone Questionnaire (Continued)
Question
Circle
Response
7) Do you want callers who use the
company directory (411) to press *
to transfer to the mailbox being described?
YES
8a) Do you want users and callers to
be able to listen to, rerecord, or cancel messages and greetings that they
create?
YES
Location and Amanda
Parameter (if applicable)
Global settings parameter
is tmo_dir_
transfer.
NO
NO
Action
Set tmo_dir_transfer a number greater
than 0. The default is 2.
Set tmo_dir_transfer to 0.
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→General
Configuration→
Messages.
Set the Allow Listening To… check
box to T for True, which is the default.
Set the Allow Listening To… check
box to F for False.
Amanda parameter is
end_rec_menu
record_menu
8b) Do you want users and callers to
hear a prompt before they start recording or just the beep?
PROMPT and
BEEP
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→Advanced
Configuration→
General.
Set begin_rec_prompt to T for
True, which is the default. Set
record_menu to T for True, which
is the default.
BEEP ONLY
Amanda parameters are
begin_rec_prompt
record_menu
Set begin_rec_prompt to F for
False. Set record_menu to T for
True, which is the default.
9) When users listen to messages,
Amanda normally plays the messages in chronological order.
YES
Set the Urgent Messages First check
box to T for True, which is the default.
Do you want users to hear urgent
messages first?
NO
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→General
Configuration→
Messages.
The prompt is “Begin recording at
the tone. Finish by pressing # or
hanging up.”
Set the Urgent Messages First check
box to F for False.
Amanda parameter is
urgent_to_front
10) When a user listens to messages, should Amanda start with his
first new (unheard) message or the
first message in his message list
(whether heard or unheard)?
NEXT NEW
MESSAGE
FIRST MESSAGE IN
LIST
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→General
Configuration→
Messages.
Amanda parameter is
play_new_first
Set the Play Next New Message check
box to T for True.
Set the Play Next New Message check
box to F for False, which is the default.
96
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Standalone Questionnaire (Continued)
Circle
Response
Question
11) What time stamp should a forwarded message have? You can use
the time the message was recorded
or the time the message was forwarded.
TIME RECORDED
TIME FORWARDED
(When you use the time that the
message was recorded, the person
receiving the forwarded message
may think delivery was slow and be
confused—unless the person forwarding the message adds a comment.)
12) Do you want Amanda to tell the
user the date and time a message
was recorded before playing the
message?
Location and Amanda
Parameter (if applicable)
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→General
Configuration→
Messages.
YES
In Amanda, select Users
menu, then enter 997 in
mailbox.
NO
Select the Time Forwarded option.
Set the D/T option to YES.
Set the D/T option to NO.
NOTE:
YES
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→General
Configuration→
Messages.
NO
Amanda parameter is
abbreviate_dates
14) How many times should the
telephone ring before Amanda decides the user is unavailable?
Select the Time Originally Recorded
option, which is the default.
Amanda parameter is
timestamp_
forwards
This option can be modified for each
user.
13) If YES to 12, do you want
Amanda to say ‘today’ and ‘yesterday’ instead of the exact date? This
option is set for all users.
Action
1
2
3
(After these rings, Amanda takes a
message, reroutes the call, or does
whatever she is configured to do for
Ring No Answer.)
4
5
6
7
8
9
15) Do you want users to be able to
turn Do Not Disturb on and off?
YES
NO
In Amanda, select Users
menu, then enter 997 in
mailbox.
A user can always get the
message date/time by pressing 74 during the message
even if this option is set to
NO.
Select the Amanda Says “Today” And
“Yesterday” For Dates option, (which
is the default).
Select the Amanda Always Says Full
Date option.
Set the Set Maximum Rings value to
the circled number. The current default is 0, which means 4 rings.
CAUTION: If you are using the U token in Extension fields (to perform a
partially supervised transfer), Maximum Rings must be set to 1.
In Amanda, select Users
menu, then enter 997 in
mailbox.
Set Do Not Disturb’s Lock to OFF.
Set Do Not Disturb’s Lock to ON.
Chapter 10: Configuring Amanda
97
Standalone Questionnaire (Continued)
Question
16) Do you want Do Not Disturb
initially ON or initially OFF?
Circle
Response
ON
OFF
17) Do you want users to be able to
turn call screening on and off?
YES
(Call screening allows users to accept or reject calls based on who is
calling.)
NO
18) Do you want call screening initially ON or initially OFF?
ON
OFF
19) Do you want callers to leave
messages for the users they call?
YES
Location and Amanda
Parameter (if applicable)
In Amanda, select Users
menu, then enter 997 in
mailbox.
Set Do Not Disturb to ON.
In Amanda, select Users
menu, then enter 997 in
mailbox.
Set Screen Calls’ Lock to OFF.
In Amanda, select Users
menu, then enter 997 in
mailbox.
Set Screen Calls to ON.
In Amanda, select Users
menu, then enter 997 in
mailbox.
Set Store Messages to YES.
Set Store Messages’s Max to a number
of seconds for each message.
NO
20) Do you want everyone to use
the same greeting (and in the same
voice) when the telephone is not answered?
(NO allows each user to create his
own greeting.)
YES
NO
Action
Set Do Not Disturb to OFF.
Set Screen Calls’ Lock to ON.
Set Screen Calls to OFF.
Set Store Messages to NO;
make sure Copy Messages To is blank.
In Amanda, select Users
menu, then enter 997 in
mailbox.
Set Current Greeting’s Max to 0.
Set Current Greeting to 0;
set Current Greeting’s Max to a number of seconds for each user’s recording.
Each user should record a greeting and
a Name/Extension recording. Until a
user records these, the system greeting
and Name/Extension recording are
used. When the user records Greeting
1, the Current Greeting setting changes from 0 to 1 automatically. The user
may also control what greeting is used.
([email protected]/DOS provides 7 greetings per mailbox.)
98
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Standalone Questionnaire (Continued)
Question
21) If YES to 20, do you want to use
Amanda’s system greeting or a
company-wide custom greeting
when a telephone is not answered?
Circle
Response
SYSTEM
Location and Amanda
Parameter (if applicable)
In Amanda, select Users
menu, then enter 997 in
mailbox.
CUSTOM
(NO allows each user to create his
own busy greeting.)
YES
NO
Set Current Greeting to 0, which is the
default.
Set Current Greeting to 1. Record a
greeting for some mailbox (e.g., 445),
then use DOS to copy it (e.g.,
C:\VMB.DB\5\445\GRT1.VOX)
as GRT1.VOX for each mailbox assigned to a user. For 3-digit extensions
that start with 2, use:
COPY custom_grt
C:\VMB.DB\?\2??\GRT1.VOX
For 4-digit extensions that end with 5,
use:
COPY custom_grt
C:\VMB.DB\?\4???\GRT1.VOX
(Here, custom_grt is
C:\VMB.DB\5\445\GRT1.VOX.)
Update the mailbox template (997) before you create the other mailboxes.
Use the COPY command shown
above after the IDs have been created.
(The system greeting is “Please
leave a message for” followed by
the system or custom Name/Extension recording.)
22) If callers are permitted to hold
when a user extension is BUSY (see
Question 3), do you want everyone
to use the same greeting (and in the
same voice)?
Action
In Amanda, select Users
menu, then enter 997 in
mailbox.
Set Busy Message’s Max to 0.
Set Busy Message’s Max to a number
greater than zero, such as 45.
Each user should record a busy greeting. Until a user records his busy
greeting, the system busy greeting is
used. The user may also control what
busy greeting is used.
Chapter 10: Configuring Amanda
99
Standalone Questionnaire (Continued)
Question
23) If YES to 22, do you want to use
Amanda’s system busy greeting or a
custom busy greeting?
Circle
Response
SYSTEM
CUSTOM
Location and Amanda
Parameter (if applicable)
In Amanda, select Users
menu, then enter 997 in
mailbox.
(The system busy greeting explains
to the caller how to hold for the extension. If the caller presses *,
Amanda plays music, then retries
the extension. If it is still busy,
Amanda changes the prompt: the
caller can hold, enter another extension, or leave a message.)
24) Do you want Amanda to let the
user know who the call is for?
YES
(This is primarily for people who
answer calls for more than one person or share a telephone.)
NO
25) If YES to 24, do you want
Amanda to let the user accept or reject the call based on who it is for?
YES
•
Both who is calling and who
the call is for.
•
Only who the call is for.
BOTH
ONLY WHO
CALL IS FOR
Set Busy Message to SYS.
Set Busy Message to CUS. Record the
busy message for a mailbox (e.g.,
445), then use DOS to copy that message (e.g., C:\VMB.DB\5\445
\BUSY.VOX) as BUSY.VOX for
each user’s mailbox. For 3-digit extensions that start with 2, use:
COPY custom_bsy
C:\VMB.DB\?\2??\BUSY.VOX
For 4-digit extensions that end with 5,
use:
COPY custom_bsy
C:\VMB.DB\?\4???\BUSY.VOX
(Here, custom_bsy is
C:\VMB.DB\5\445\BUSY.VOX.)
Update the mailbox template (997) before you create the other mailboxes.
Use the COPY command shown
above after the IDs have been created.
In Amanda, select Users
menu, then enter 997 in
mailbox.
Set ID Call? to YES.
In Amanda, select Users
menu, then enter 997 in
mailbox.
Set Screen Calls to ON and ID Call? to
YES.
NO
26) If YES to 25, do you want users
to hear:
Action
Set ID Call? to NO.
Use the settings already specified for
Screen Calls and ID Call? in questions
17, 18, and 24.
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→Advanced
Configuration→
General (Settings).
Amanda parameter is
modified_call_
screening
Set modified_call_
screening to F for False.
Set modified_call_
screening to T for True.
100
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Standalone Questionnaire (Continued)
Question
27) Do you want to use a system or
custom Name/Extension recording?
(The system recording says the
mailbox number instead of the user’s name. For example, if the user’s
mailbox is 143, Amanda says “For
mailbox 1-4-3.”)
Circle
Response
SYSTEM
Location and Amanda
Parameter (if applicable)
In Amanda, select Users
menu, then enter 997 in
mailbox.
CUSTOM
YES
•
The date and time every message is received
NO
•
The date and time every mailbox is checked for messages
along with the DTMF the user
entered
YES
30) What password does the administrator want to use for Amanda?
Write password here.
(You may not want to write this
down, but be sure that it gets reset.
The default is AMandA with the
first two and the last letter capitalized.)
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→General
Configuration→
Messages.
The Amanda parameter is
msg_log
29) Do you want to log information
about accesses to mailboxes? If
YES, the USER.LOG file will store
the date, time, and mailbox when
any mailbox is accessed by DTMF.
This file can be analyzed for call
distributions and accesses by dates,
days, and times.
NO
Set Name/Ext to NO. The users cannot
make recordings.
Set Name/Ext. to YES. Each user
should make a recording. Until a user
makes his recording, the system recording is used.
NOTE: It is a good idea to have
someone with a good voice
make a Name/Extension
recording for each user, so
Amanda identifies users
by name on the first day,
even if you allow custom
name/ extension recording.
28) Do you want to log information
about messages? If YES, the
MSG.LOG file will store:
Action
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→General
Configuration→
Messages.
The Amanda parameter is
user_log
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→General
Configuration→
Password.
Amanda parameter is
password
Set the Log Info About Messages
check box to T for True.
Set the Log Info About Messages
check box to F for False, which is the
default.
Set the Log Info About User Access
check box to T for True.
Set the Log Info About User Access
check box to F for False, which is the
default.
Enter a password which contains no
more than eight letters. Passwords are
case-sensitive.
Chapter 10: Configuring Amanda
101
Standalone Questionnaire (Continued)
Question
31) What language should Amanda
use for prompts, such as “Please
hold…?”
Circle
Response
ENGLISH
SPANISH
(You can offer information in more
than one language, ask for details.)
Location and Amanda
Parameter (if applicable)
Action
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→General
Configuration→
General Defaults.
Press F2 and select a language from
the drop down list in the Language list
box. ENGLISH is the default. If you
do not select English, you must also
install the prompts for the language.
Amanda parameter is
prompt_file
32) Will Amanda be connected to a
printer so that you can print reports?
YES
NO
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→General
Configuration→
General Defaults.
Set the Printer Attached To LPT value
to 1.
Set the Printer Attached To LPT value
to 0, which is the default.
Amanda parameter is
lpt_port
33) Do you want to shut down
Amanda for disk maintenance and/
or tape backups?
YES
NO
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→General
Configuration→
General Defaults.
Set the Shutdown For Maintenance
And Backups check box to T for True.
Set the Shutdown For Maintenance
And Backups check box to F for False.
Amanda parameter is
shutdown
34) If YES to 33), do you want
Amanda to shutdown once a week
or everyday?
WEEKLY
Write a day
and a time.
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→General
Configuration→
General Defaults.
Amanda parameter is
shutdown
DAILY
Write down
the time.
35) What words do you want the
screen saver to display on the
Amanda computer?
(Write the words. The default is
“Buy more Amandas.")
Write a phrase.
Select the Once A Week On [TUE] At
[01:30] option. The default is Tuesday
at 1:30 A.M.. You can specify a different day from the TUE drop down list
box. You can enter a different time in
the 01:30 text box. Time value uses the
24-hour format (HHMM).
Select the Everyday at <HHMM> option and enter the time at HHMM, using the 24-hour format.
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→General
Configuration→
General Defaults.
Amanda parameter is
advertising
At the Screen Saver Phrase text box,
enter the phrase. Recommended
length is up to 30 characters, but maximum length is 80.
102
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Standalone Questionnaire (Continued)
Question
36) When users don’t delete messages, they accumulate. Do you
want to get rid of messages that have
been listened to and have been
around for a long time?
Circle
Response
YES
NO
Be aware that deleted messages are
gone forever.
37) If YES to 36, write a number of
days (from 1 to 99) after which a
message that has been heard should
be deleted.
Location and Amanda
Parameter (if applicable)
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→Advanced
Configuration→
General (Settings).
Action
See Action for Question 37.
Set Amanda parameter purge to 0,
which is the default.
Amanda parameter is
purge
Write a number (1-99).
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→Advanced
Configuration→
General (Settings).
Amanda parameter is
purge
Set purge to x, where x is the number of days (1-90) after being heard
that a message is purged.
Chapter 10: Configuring Amanda
103
Standalone Questionnaire (Continued)
Question
37) Do you want to use the hold
music provided by The Amanda
Company or hold music and messages of your own?
Circle
Response
The Amanda
Company
YOUR OWN
Location and Amanda
Parameter (if applicable)
N/A
Action
Amanda plays C:\AMANDA\HOLD.VOX by default.
There is no config option or mailbox
field for this.
To rerecord HOLD.VOX:
1.
Shut down Amanda.
2.
At the DOS prompt (C:\AMANDA), type:
COPY HOLD.VOX MUSIC.VOX
so you can use this file later. If
you already have a MUSIC.VOX file, use another
name.
3.
Restart Amanda.
4.
Using the telephone, log in to
the system administrator mailbox (999), select 8 for the System Administration menu, then
3 to record the busy-hold music.
5.
Make your recording. It becomes the file C:\AMANDA\HOLD.VOX and is played
by Amanda to callers on hold.
6.
If you create HOLD0.VOX,
HOLD1.VOX, etc. Amanda
plays them after HOLD.VOX if
the extension remains busy.
Each one is created as
HOLD.VOX, and must be
changed to HOLDx.VOX with a
DOS command:
COPY HOLD.VOX
HOLDx.VOX
Do the recording for the real
HOLD.VOX (the first music/
message the caller hears) last.
104
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Voice Server Questionnaire
Question
Circle
Response
1) Amanda normally says “Please
hold while I try that extension” as
she transfers a call. This feature can
be turned off.
YES
Do you want Amanda to say “Please
hold….?”
NO
2) Do you want Amanda to verify
that a caller is still on the telephone
before transferring the call to an operator?
YES
(Amanda asks the caller to “Say yes
at the tone” before transferring the
call.)
NO
3) Do you want callers to be able to
hold for busy extensions?
YES
Location and Amanda
Parameter (if applicable)
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→General
Configuration→
Incoming Calls.
Amanda parameter is
please_hold
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→General
Configuration→
Incoming Calls.
Amanda parameter is
dtmf_gate
NO
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→General
Configuration→
Incoming Calls.
Action
Set the Amanda Says “Please Hold
While…” check box to T for True,
which is the default.
Set the Amanda Says “Please Hold
While…” check box to F for False
You can also bypass this message for
individual mailboxes using the Token
Programming Language (although
only blind transfers are supported).
Set the Amanda Says “Please Say
‘Yes’…” check box to T for True,
which is the default.
Set the Amanda Says “Please Say
‘Yes’…” check box to F for False.
Set the Caller Can Hold check box to
T for True, which is the default.
Set the Caller Can Hold check box to
F for False.
Amanda parameter is
cancel_busy_hold
4) If YES to 3, do you want active
or inactive hold?
On active hold, the caller is prompted to press * to remain on hold.
On inactive hold, the caller takes no
action to stay on hold.
(800 numbers benefit from using active hold, because the caller cannot
leave the telephone unattended.)
ACTIVE
INACTIVE
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→General
Configuration→
Incoming Calls.
Amanda parameter is
active_hold
Set the Active Hold check box to T for
True, which is the default.
Set the Active Hold check box to F for
False.
Chapter 10: Configuring Amanda
105
Voice Server Questionnaire (Continued)
Question
Circle
Response
5) Do you want direct messages to
play the Name/Extension recording
instead of the mailbox’s greeting?
YES
(A direct message is left in a user’s
mail box without attempting to ring
that user. By default, Amanda plays
the mailbox’s greeting. The Name/
Ext recording is shorter than the
mailbox’s greeting.)
NO
6) Do you want Amanda to answer
all incoming calls or only answer
when the operator cannot get to the
phone within a certain number of
rings?
ALL CALLS
(This decision can vary from port to
port.)
Location and Amanda
Parameter (if applicable)
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→General
Configuration→
Incoming Calls.
Select the Play User’s Name and Extension Recording option.
Select the Play User’s Greeting option
(which is the default).
Amanda parameter is
short_direct_
send
AFTER x
RINGS
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→Advanced
Configuration→
Per Port.
Amanda parameter is
n_rings
What is x?
7a) Do you want users and callers
to be able to listen to, rerecord, or
cancel messages and greetings that
they create?
Action
YES
NO
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→General
Configuration→
Messages.
Set N_RINGS to 1 for each port.
This is a per port setting. The default is
one ring on each port.
(Amanda is being set up as a primary
attendant.)
Set N_RINGS to x for each port,
where x in the number of rings. This is
a per port setting.
(Amanda is being set up as a secondary attendant.)
Set the Allow Listening To… check
box to T for True, which is the default.
Set the Allow Listening To… check
box to F for False.
Amanda parameter is
end_rec_menu
record_menu
7b) Do you want users and callers
to hear a prompt before they start recording or just the beep?
The prompt is “Begin recording at
the tone. Finish by pressing # or
hanging up.”
PROMPT and
BEEP
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→Advanced
Configuration→
General.
Set begin_rec_prompt to T for
True, which is the default. Set
record_menu to T for True, which
is the default.
BEEP ONLY
Amanda parameters are
begin_rec_prompt
record_menu
Set begin_rec_prompt to F for
False. Set record_menu to T for
True, which is the default..
106
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Voice Server Questionnaire (Continued)
Question
8) When a user listens to messages,
should Amanda start with his first
new (unheard) message or the first
message in his message list (whether heard or unheard)?
9) What time stamp should a forwarded message have? You can use
the time the message was recorded
or the time the message was forwarded.
Circle
Response
NEXT NEW
MESSAGE
FIRST MESSAGE IN
LIST
TIME RECORDED
TIME FORWARDED
(When you use the time that the
message was recorded, the person
receiving the forwarded
message may think delivery was
slow and be confused—unless the
person forwarding the message adds
a comment.)
10) Do you want Amanda to tell the
user the date and time a message
was recorded before playing the
message?
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→General
Configuration→
Messages.
Action
Set the Play Next New Message check
box to T for True.
Set the Play Next New Message check
box to F for False, which is the default.
Amanda parameter is
play_new_first
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→General
Configuration→
Messages.
Select the Time Originally Recorded
option, which is the default.
Select the Time Forwarded option.
Amanda parameter is
timestamp_
forwards
YES
From the Mailbox window in Amanda Adminis-
From the Options group box, select the
Play Date & Time check box.
NO
trator, click the
button after the mailbox
box. Enter 997 in the
mailbox List dialog box
that appears.
From the Options group box, clear the
Play Date & Time check box.
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→General
Configuration→
Messages.
Select the Amanda Says “Today” And
“Yesterday” For Dates option, (which
is the default).
This option can be modified for each
user.
11) If YES to 10, do you want
Amanda to say ‘today’ and ‘yesterday’ instead of the exact date? This
option is set for all users.
Location and Amanda
Parameter (if applicable)
YES
NO
Amanda parameter is
abbreviate_dates
NOTE:
A user can always get the
message date/time by pressing 74 during the message
even if this option is set to
NO.
Select the Amanda Always Says Full
Date option.
Chapter 10: Configuring Amanda
107
Voice Server Questionnaire (Continued)
Circle
Response
Question
12) How many times should the
telephone ring before Amanda decides the user is unavailable?
(After these rings, Amanda takes a
message, reroutes the call, or does
whatever she is configured to do for
Ring No Answer.)
13) Do you want users to be able to
turn Do Not Disturb on and off?
14) Do you want Do Not Disturb
initially ON or initially OFF?
15) Do you want users to be able to
turn call screening on and off?
(Call screening allows users to accept or reject calls based on who is
calling.)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Location and Amanda
Parameter (if applicable)
From the Mailbox window in Amanda Administrator, click the
button after the mailbox
box. Enter
997 in the mailbox List dialog box that appears.
Action
In the Options group box, the current
default for Adjust Maximum Rings is
0, which means 4 rings.
If the circled number is not 4, select
the Adjust Maximum Rings check box
and enter the circled number into the
text box.
CAUTION: If you are using the U token in Extension fields (to perform a
partially supervised transfer), Maximum Rings must be set to 1.
YES
From the Mailbox window in Amanda Adminis-
From the Options group box, clear the
Do Not Disturb Lock check box.
NO
trator, click the
button after the mailbox
box. Enter 997 in the
mailbox List dialog box
that appears.
From the Options group box, select the
Do Not Disturb Lock check box.
ON
From the Mailbox window in Amanda Adminis-
From the Options group box, select the
Do Not Disturb check box.
OFF
trator, click the
button after the mailbox
box. Enter 997 in the
mailbox List dialog box
that appears.
From the Options group box, clear the
Do Not Disturb check box.
YES
From the Mailbox window in Amanda Adminis-
From the Options group box, clear the
Call Screening Lock check box.
NO
trator, click the
button after the mailbox
box. Enter 997 in the
mailbox List dialog box
that appears.
From the Options group box, select the
Call Screening Lock check box.
108
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Voice Server Questionnaire (Continued)
Question
16) Do you want call screening initially ON or initially OFF?
Circle
Response
Location and Amanda
Parameter (if applicable)
Action
ON
From the Mailbox window in Amanda Adminis-
From the Options group box, select the
Call Screening check box.
OFF
trator, click the
button after the mailbox
box. Enter
From the Options group box, clear the
Call Screening check box.
997 in the mailbox List dialog box that appears.
17) Do you want callers to be able
to leave messages for the users they
call?
YES
NO
18) Do you want everyone to use
the same greeting (and in the same
voice) when the telephone is not answered?
(NO allows each user to create his
own greeting.)
From the Mailbox window in Amanda Administrator, click the
button after the mailbox
box. Enter 997 in the
mailbox List dialog box
that appears.
From the Messages group box, select
the Store check box and enter number
of seconds for each message into the
Maximum Length text box.
From the Messages group box, clear
the Store check box.
If the Copy Messages To text box has
a mailbox different from none, do the
following:
1
Select the Copy Messages To
check box.
2
Type none in the Copy Messages
To text box.
3
Clear the Copy Messages To
checkbox.
YES
From the Mailbox window in Amanda Adminis-
From the Personal Greetings group
box, select the RNA Lock check box.
NO
trator, click the
button after the mailbox
box. Enter 997 in the
mailbox List dialog box
that appears.
From the Personal Greetings group
box, clear the RNA Lock check box.
Each user should record a greeting and
a Name/Extension recording. Until a
user records these, the system greeting
and Name/Extension recording are
used. When the user records Greeting
1, the Current Greeting setting changes from 0 to 1 automatically. The user
may also control what greeting is used.
([email protected]/DOS provides 7 greetings per mailbox.)
Chapter 10: Configuring Amanda
109
Voice Server Questionnaire (Continued)
Question
19) If YES to 18, do you want to use
Amanda’s system greeting or a
company-wide custom greeting
when a telephone is not answered?
Circle
Response
SYSTEM
Location and Amanda
Parameter (if applicable)
From the Mailbox window in Amanda Administrator, click the
button after the mailbox
box. Enter 997 in the
mailbox List dialog box
that appears.
(The system greeting is "Please
leave a message for" followed by
the system or custom Name/Extension recording.)
CUSTOM
Action
From the Personal Greetings group
box, click the
button after the
RNA box.
The Greeting List dialog box appears.
Select System and click OK.
From the Greeting List dialog box that
appears, select System.
From the Personal Greetings group
box, click the
button after the
RNA box. When the Greeting List dialog box appears, select 1.
In the corresponding Max. Length text
box, enter the number of seconds for
the custom recording.
To create a company-wide custom
greeting, record a greeting for some
mailbox (e.g., 445), then use DOS on
the Amanda server after shutdown to
copy it (e.g., C:\VMB.DB\5\445
\GRT1.VOX) as GRT1.VOX for each
mailbox assigned to a user. For 3-digit
extensions that start with 2, use:
COPY custom_grt
C:\VMB.DB\?\2??\GRT1.VOX
For 4-digit extensions that start with 4,
use:
COPY custom_grt
C:\VMB.DB\?\4???\GRT1.VOX
(Here, custom_grt is
C:\VMB.DB\5\445\GRT1.VOX.)
Update the mailbox template (997) before you create the other mailboxes.
Use the COPY command shown
above after the IDs have been created.
110
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Voice Server Questionnaire (Continued)
Question
Circle
Response
Location and Amanda
Parameter (if applicable)
20) If callers are permitted to hold
when a user extension is BUSY (see
question 3), do you want everyone
to use the same greeting (and in the
same voice)?(NO allows each user
to create his own busy greeting.)
YES
21) If YES to 20, do you want to use
Amanda’s system busy greeting or a
custom busy greeting?
SYSTEM
From the Mailbox window in Amanda Adminis-
From the Personal Greetings group
box, clear the Custom Busy check box.
(The system busy greeting explains
to the caller how to hold for the extension. If the caller presses *,
Amanda plays music, then retries
the extension. If it is still busy,
Amanda changes the prompt: the
caller can hold, enter another extension, or leave a message.)
CUSTOM
trator, click the
button after the mailbox
box. Enter 997 in the
mailbox List dialog box
that appears.
From the Personal Greetings group
box, select the Custom Busy check
box. Record the busy message for a
mailbox (e.g., 445), then use DOS on
the Amanda server after shutdown to
copy that message (e.g.,
C:\VMB.DB\5\445
\BUSY.VOX) as BUSY.VOX for
each user’s mailbox. For 3-digit extensions that start with 2, use:
COPY custom_bsy
C:\VMB.DB\?\2??\BUSY.VOX
For 4-digit extensions that start with 4,
use:
COPY custom_bsy
C:\VMB.DB\?\4???\BUSY.VOX
(Here, custom_bsy is
C:\VMB.DB\5\445\BUSY.VOX.)
Update the mailbox template (997) before you create the other mailboxes.
Use the COPY command shown
above after the IDs have been created.
NO
From the Mailbox window in Amanda Adminis-
Action
trator, click the
button after the mailbox
box. Enter 997 in the
mailbox List dialog box
that appears.
From the Personal Greetings group
box, select the Custom Busy Lock
check box.
From the Personal Greetings group
box, clear the Custom Busy Lock
check box. Set the Custom Busy Max.
Length to a number greater than zero,
such as 45.
Each user should record a busy greeting. Until a user records his busy
greeting, the system busy greeting is
used. The user may also control what
busy greeting is used.
Chapter 10: Configuring Amanda
111
Voice Server Questionnaire (Continued)
Question
22) Do you want Amanda to let the
user know who the call is for?
(This is primarily for people who
answer calls for more than one person or share a telephone.)
23) If YES to 22, do you want
Amanda to let the user accept or reject the call based on who it is for?
24) If YES to 23, do you want users
to hear:
•
Both who is calling and who
the call is for.
•
Only who the call is for.
25) Do you want to use a system or
custom Name/Extension recording?
(The system recording says the
mailbox number instead of the user’s name. For example, if the user’s
mailbox is 143, Amanda says “For
mailbox 1-4-3.”)
NOTE:
It is a good idea to have
someone with a good
voice make a Name/Extension recording for
each user, so Amanda
identifies users by name
on the first day, even if
you allow custom name/
extension recording.
Circle
Response
Location and Amanda
Parameter (if applicable)
Action
YES
From the Mailbox window in Amanda Adminis-
From the Options group box, select the
Identify Called Party check box.
NO
trator, click the
button after the mailbox
box. Enter 997 in the
mailbox List dialog box
that appears.
From the Options group box, clear the
Identify Called Party check box.
YES
From the Mailbox window in Amanda Adminis-
From the Options group box, select the
Call Screening check box.
NO
trator, click the
button after the mailbox
box. Enter 997 in the
mailbox List dialog box
that appears.
Use the settings already specified for
Screen Calls and ID Call? in questions
15, 16, and 22.
BOTH
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→Advanced
Configuration→ General
(Settings).
Set modified_call_
screening to F for False.
ONLY WHO
CALL IS FOR
Set modified_call_
screening to T for True.
Amanda parameter is
modified_call_
screening
SYSTEM
From the Mailbox window in Amanda Adminis-
From the Options group box, clear the
Record Name & Extension check box.
CUSTOM
trator, click the
button after the mailbox
box. Enter 997 in the
mailbox List dialog box
that appears.
From the Options group box, select the
Record Name & Extension check box.
Each user should make a recording.
Until a user makes his recording, the
system recording is used.
112
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Voice Server Questionnaire (Continued)
Question
Circle
Response
26) Do you want to log information
about messages? If YES, the
MSG.LOG file will store:
YES
•
The date and time every message is received
NO
•
The date and time every mailbox is checked for messages
along with the DTMF the user
entered
27) Do you want to log information
about accesses to mailboxes? If
YES, the USER.LOG file will store
the date, time, and mailbox when
any mailbox is accessed by DTMF.
YES
NO
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→General
Configuration→
Messages.
The Amanda parameter is
user_log
Write password here.
(You may not want to write this
down, but be sure that it gets reset.
The default is AMandA with the
first two and the last letter capitalized.)
29) What language should Amanda
use for prompts, such as “Please
hold…?”
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→General
Configuration→
Messages.
The Amanda parameter is
msg_log
This file can be analyzed for call
distributions and accesses by dates,
days, and times.
28) What password does the administrator want to use for Amanda?
Location and Amanda
Parameter (if applicable)
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→General
Configuration→
Password.
Action
Set the Log Info About Messages
check box to T for True.
Set the Log Info About Messages
check box to F for False, which is the
default.
Set the Log Info About User Access
check box to T for True.
Set the Log Info About User Access
check box to F for False, which is the
default.
Enter a password which contains no
more than eight letters. Passwords are
case-sensitive.
Amanda parameter is
password
ENGLISH
SPANISH
(You can offer information in more
than one language, ask for details.)
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→General
Configuration→
General Defaults.
Press F2 and select a language from
the drop down list in the Language list
box. ENGLISH is the default. If you
do not select English, you must also
install the prompts for the language.
Amanda parameter is
prompt_file
30) Will Amanda be connected to a
printer so that you can print reports?
YES
NO
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→General
Configuration→
General Defaults.
Amanda parameter is
lpt_port
Set the Printer Attached To LPT value
to 1.
Set the Printer Attached To LPT value
to 0, which is the default.
Chapter 10: Configuring Amanda
113
Voice Server Questionnaire (Continued)
Question
31) Do you want to shut down
Amanda for disk maintenance and/
or tape backups?
Circle
Response
YES
NO
Location and Amanda
Parameter (if applicable)
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→General
Configuration→
General Defaults.
Action
Set the Shutdown For Maintenance
And Backups check box to T for True.
Set the Shutdown For Maintenance
And Backups check box to F for False.
Amanda parameter is
shutdown
32) If YES to 31), do you want
Amanda to shutdown once a week
or everyday?
WEEKLY
Write a day
and a time.
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→General
Configuration→
General Defaults.
Amanda parameter is
shutdown
DAILY
Write down
the time.
33) What words do you want the
screen saver to display on the
Amanda computer?
Write a
phrase.
(Write the words. The default is
“Buy more Amandas.")
Select the Once A Week On [TUE] At
[01:30] option. The default is Tuesday
at 1:30 A.M.. You can specify a different day from the TUE drop down list
box. You can enter a different time in
the 01:30 text box. Time value uses the
24-hour format (HHMM).
Select the Everyday at <HHMM> option and enter the time at HHMM, using the 24-hour format.
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→General
Configuration→
General Defaults.
At the Screen Saver Phrase text box,
enter the phrase. Recommended
length is up to 30 characters, but maximum length is 80.
Amanda parameter is
advertising
34) When users don’t delete messages, they accumulate. Do you
want to get rid of messages that have
been listened to and have been
around for a long time?
YES
NO
Be aware that deleted messages are
gone forever.
35) If YES to 34, write a number of
days (from 1 to 99) after which a
message that has been heard should
be deleted.
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→Advanced
Configuration→
General.
See Action for Question 35.
Set Amanda parameter purge to 0,
which is the default.
Amanda parameter is
purge
Write a number (1-99).
In the Setup utility, select
System Configuration
Options→Advanced
Configuration→
General.
Amanda parameter is
purge
Set purge to x, where x is the number of days (1-90) after being heard
that a message is purged.
114
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Voice Server Questionnaire (Continued)
Question
36) Do you want to use the hold
music provided by The Amanda
Company or hold music and messages of your own?
Circle
Response
The Amanda
Company
YOUR OWN
Location and Amanda
Parameter (if applicable)
N/A
Action
Amanda plays C:\AMANDA\HOLD.VOX by default.
There is no config option or mailbox
field for this.
To rerecord HOLD.VOX:
1.
Shut down Amanda.
2.
At the DOS prompt (C:\AMANDA), type:
COPY HOLD.VOX MUSIC.VOX
so you can use this file later. If
you already have a MUSIC.VOX
file, use another name.
3.
Restart Amanda.
4.
Using the telephone, log in to the
system administrator mailbox
(999), select 8 for the System Administration menu, then 3 to
record the busy-hold music.
5.
Make your recording. It becomes
the file C:\AMANDA\HOLD.VOX and is played
by Amanda to callers on hold.
6.
If you create HOLD0.VOX,
HOLD1.VOX, etc. Amanda
plays them after HOLD.VOX if
the extension remains busy. Each
one is created as HOLD.VOX,
and must be changed to
HOLDx.VOX with a DOS
command:
COPY HOLD.VOX
HOLDx.VOX
Do the recording for the real
HOLD.VOX (the first music/
message the caller hears) last.
Chapter 10: Configuring Amanda
115
Configuring a New Installation
Amanda has over 200 configuration options. They are what make Amanda
so powerful and flexible. You will probably leave over 90% of those options
set to their default settings. However, armed with the answers to the First
Use Questionnaire, you should review the most commonly changed options
(those in the General Configuration section of the Setup utility).
To set a new Amanda system’s general configuration options:
1.
Run Setup as explained in “Chapter 6: Running the Setup Utility.”
The Work.Group/DOS Configuration Utility screen appears.
2.
To select System Configuration Options, press 4.
The System Configuration menu appears.
3.
To select General Configuration, press Enter.
The General Configuration menu provides easy access to the configuration options you are most likely to change.
4.
Press I for Incoming Calls.
The Incoming Calls screen appears.
Options with bracketed settings [T] or [F] are like Windows check
boxes. Using T for True is like checking a check box. Using F for False
is like clearing a check box. Pressing the space bar toggles between T
and F. Sometimes one check box is dependent on your selection for an
earlier check box. For example, in the Incoming Calls screen, if you do
not allow the caller to hold, the setting for active hold is ignored.
Options with settings that are in parentheses (*) or ( ) are like Windows
option buttons. You make a selection from the group of options by typing an asterisk in front of any one of the options. (Typing a space
removes an asterisk from one option; if there are only two options, the
asterisk automatically moves to the other option.)
116
Installing [email protected]/DOS
5.
For each check box, select T for True or F for False.
Type an asterisk (*) to select an option button.
(Press F1 for help with any setting you aren’t sure about.)
6.
Press F10 to save your settings and Esc to return to the General Configuration screen.
7.
Press M for Messages.
Chapter 10: Configuring Amanda
117
The Managing Messages screen appears.
8.
For each check box, select T for True or F for False.
Type an asterisk (*) to select an option button.
(Press F1 for help with any setting you aren’t sure about.)
9.
Press F10 to save your settings and Esc to return to the General Configuration screen.
10. Press P for Password.
The Password screen appears. Current Password is display-only.
11. Type the new password for Amanda in the Enter New Password text
box.
118
Installing [email protected]/DOS
12. Press F10 to save your settings and Esc to return to the General Configuration screen.
13. Press G for General Defaults.
The General Defaults screen appears.
Language is an example of a list. Pressing F2 displays a list of choices
from which you select the language to be used.
Sometimes options are dependent on your selection for other options.
For example, in the General Defaults screen, only if you select the
Restricted option button can you access the Port text box and type the
number of the port to which notification is restricted. Likewise, only if
you select the Shutdown For Maintenance And Backups check box is it
important what days or time the shutdown occurs.
For more information about notification, see “Selecting a Type of Notification” on page 120.
14. For check boxes, select T for True or F for False.
Type an asterisk (*) to select an option button.
Select the day of the week from a list.
Type numbers for the ports and times.
Chapter 10: Configuring Amanda
119
Type a phrase for the screen saver.
Press F1 for help with any setting you aren’t sure about.
15. Press F10 to save your settings and Esc to return to the General Configuration screen.
16. If you have installed Amanda as a Voice Server, press Esc to return to
the System Configuration menu.
17. Press A for Advanced Configuration.
18. Press N for Network.
The Network Configuration screen appears.
Press F1 for help with the settings. Type in the appropriate numbers and
strings. If you type a space, the Setup utility interprets it as a zero.
NOTE: To set the client_activation_key and n_clients, see “Adding
Client Connections” on page 282. When n_clients is 0, you
have only one client. This allows you to run Amanda Administrator to control Amanda Voice Server. Both
client_activation_key and the n_clients are read-only. You
cannot edit these two using the Setup utility.
120
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Selecting a Type of Notification
Many telephones have message lights (also called message waiting lights) to
let users know that they have unheard messages. You use notification records
to turn the lights on and off. You can also notify users about waiting
messages by paging them, calling their extensions, or calling them at an
outside number.
Part of installing Amanda is selecting the type of notification:
•
•
•
Roving
Dedicated
Restricted
With roving notification, Amanda tries to use the last port in the hunt group
(for example, port 4 on a 4-port system) for notification. If the last port is
busy, Amanda tries the second-to-last port (for example, port 3), and so forth.
If, on your telephone switching system, the port that turns on the message
light must also turn it off, you must have only one port perform notification
(control voice notify, message lights, paging, and so forth). You must use
dedicated or restricted notification, rather than the default roving
notification.
With dedicated notification, one port is used:
•
Only for notification
BUT that port
•
Cannot take incoming calls
Dedicated notification eliminates glare (the collisions between incoming
calls and notifications). However, you have one less port for receiving calls.
With restricted notification, one port is used:
•
Only for notification
AND that port
•
Can take incoming calls
Chapter 10: Configuring Amanda
121
With restricted notification, glare can still occur. However, all your ports can
be used for receiving calls.
See Administering [email protected]/DOS for more information on
notification records.
If you are using JOVE to edit INSTALL.CFG, for roving notification, set
both n_ochan and notify_restriction to 0. For dedicated notification, set
n_ochan to 1 and notify_restriction to 0. For restricted notification, set
n_ochan to 0 and notify_restriction to a specific port number.
NOTE: When using roving or restricted notification, program your
phone system to have the ports in a linear hunt group (not
a circular hunt group). In a linear hunt group, port 1 always
rings first, port 2 rings only if port 1 is busy, and port 3 only
rings if port 1 and port 2 are both busy. Then when Amanda’s last port rings, all the other ports must be busy.
If a caller hears DTMF and then a hangup instead of the
company greeting, a collision has occurred.
Using Default and Recommended
Mailboxes
The following is a complete list of the default (and recommended)
mailboxes in case you need to change (or set) them. If two departments share
an Amanda system, you might use these mailboxes for one department and
create another set for the other department. (For more information about
sharing an Amanda system, see “Sharing Amanda” on page 157.) If you
intend to use the defaults, don’t overwrite these mailboxes when you create
new mailboxes for employees.
122
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Default and Recommended mailboxes
Mailbox
0
Configuration
Option
(no option)
Purpose
Mailbox for operator or receptionist. Mailbox 0 has been created for
you.
By default, this mailbox has Do Not Disturb locked OFF, call screening locked OFF, Greeting 0 as the current greeting, 999 in the Done
Chain, stores messages, and is set to ring six times.
8
(no option)
Mailbox that acts as a shortcut to mailbox 998. Mailbox 8
makes it easier to send callers directly to voice mail. Live operators press transfer, call Amanda, dial 8# followed by the
mailbox number, and hang up. The caller goes directly to voice
mail.
411
box_idx
Mailbox for employee directory. Mailbox 411 has been created for
you.
By default, this mailbox has Do Not Disturb locked ON, call screening
locked OFF, Greeting 1 as the current greeting, an empty Done Chain,
and does not store messages.
990
box_grt
Mailbox for Company Greeting. Mailbox 990 has been created for
you.
By default, this mailbox has Do Not Disturb locked ON, call screening
locked OFF, Greeting 1 as the current greeting, 991 in the Done Chain,
and does not store messages.
991
(no option)
Mailbox for Caller Instructions. Mailbox 991 has been created for you.
By default, this mailbox has Do Not Disturb locked ON, call screening
locked OFF, Greeting 1 as the current greeting, 0 in the Done Chain,
and does not store messages.
Chapter 10: Configuring Amanda
123
Default and Recommended mailboxes (Continued)
Mailbox
994
Configuration
Option
hot_box
Purpose
Mailbox for use with PCPM codes. For example, you can set up a
hot_box to detect calls from modems. The mailbox 994 is recommended but has not been created for you. As you create a hot box mailbox,
make sure that the mailbox does NOT store messages and that Do Not
Disturb is off. In addition, the Extension field must transfer the caller
to the fax machine or whatever device is to be used by this box.
In most cases, only one hot_box is defined to detect fax tones and the
remainder are unused. However, you cannot separate these for companies or departments that share Amanda.
995
future_delivery
Mailbox that stores messages to be delivered at some time in the future.
Mailbox 995 has been created for you.
By default, this mailbox has Do Not Disturb locked ON, call screening
locked OFF, Greeting 0 as the current greeting, nothing in the Done
Chain, and stores messages.
You don’t need to (and cannot) separate these for companies or departments that share Amanda.
996
guest_defaults
Mailbox which is the template for all new guest mailboxes.Mailbox
996 has been created for you.
By default, this mailbox has Do Not Disturb OFF, call screening OFF,
Greeting 0 as the current greeting, nothing in the Done Chain, and
stores messages.
You cannot separate these for companies or departments that share
Amanda.
997
defaults_box
Mailbox which is the template for all new mailboxes. Mailbox 997 has
been created for you.
You cannot separate these for companies or departments that share
Amanda.
998
box_snd
Mailbox for direct messaging. Mailbox 998 has been created for you.
By default, this mailbox has Do Not Disturb locked ON, call screening
locked OFF, an empty Done Chain, and does not store messages.
124
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Default and Recommended mailboxes (Continued)
Mailbox
999
Configuration
Option
(no option)
Purpose
Mailbox for system administration and for a quick hangup. Mailbox
999 has been created for you.
You cannot separate these for companies or departments that share
Amanda.
By default, this mailbox has Do Not Disturb locked OFF, call screening locked OFF, an empty Done Chain, and an H in the Extension field.
Never change or delete this mailbox.
Chapter 11:
Faxing
Using This Chapter
This chapter:
•
•
•
Explains how to set up a fax modem for use with Amanda. This applies to any voice board supported by Amanda and applies to both
Amanda Standalone and Amanda Voice Server.
Explains how to detect a fax machine automatically.
Provides an overview of Amanda Fax, a fax driver for sending faxes
from any Windows application that can print. Amanda Fax is a client
of Amanda Voice Server. It cannot be used with Amanda Standalone.
Using a Fax Modem
You can use a fax modem on any [email protected]/DOS system.
The fax modem used in Amanda may be internal or external as long as it
meets all of the following requirements:
•
•
Class 2 or Class 2.0 compliant. (Be aware that Class 2 is different
from Class 2.0.)
Internal fax modems must have a UART 16550 serial interface, and
external fax modems must be connected to UART 16550 serial
ports.
126
Installing [email protected]/DOS
The MSD.EXE program in DOS can verify whether or not your PC has these
high speed serial ports. So can IS16550. (The syntax is IS16550 /x where x is
the number of the COM port.)
NOTE: If you have a Class 2 modem, the default configuration settings for fax options should work well with your modem. If
you have a Class 2.0 modem, change the setting for
fax_send_reverse to F for False.
You must configure the fax modem for one of the following:
COM1 with IRQ4 and no other devices on COM1 or using IRQ4
COM2 with IRQ3 and no other devices on COM2 or using IRQ3
COM3 with IRQ11 and no other devices on COM3 or using IRQ11
We recommend using COM1 and/or COM2 for fax modems. This port must
be dedicated to the fax modem.
NOTE: If you have a turnkey Amanda system, it comes with an internal modem which uses COM4 and IRQ5. This is used
only by the host software on the Amanda computer that allows you to control Amanda from a remote site using the remote program. None of Amanda’s configuration options
have anything to do with this modem, but the fax modem
cannot be set to COM4 or IRQ5. Even if your system is not
a turnkey system, we recommend that you install an internal data modem using the same COM port and IRQ so you
can contact Amanda remotely. If you ever need customer
support from The Amanda Company, this modem will
make it possible to solve your problem much more quickly.
See “Chapter 14: Accessing Amanda Remotely” for more
information about host and remote software.
To configure a fax modem for Amanda:
1.
Run the Setup utility.
2.
From the Work.Group/DOS Configuration Utility menu, select System
Configuration Options or press 4.
3.
From the System Configuration menu, press A for Advanced Configuration.
Chapter 11: Faxing
127
4.
From the Advanced Configuration menu, press S for Serial.
The Serial Port Definition dialog box appears.
(If you type a space, the Setup utility interprets it as a zero.)
5.
Change:
serial_portn 0
To:
serial_portn y
The option maps Amanda's logical port to a physical port on the PC.
The n is the number of the logical serial port and the y is the physical
serial port (for example, COM1). It is best to make n and y the same
number. For example, map logical port 2 to COM2.
6.
Modify the baudn, databitsn, stopbitsn, and parityn to
match the correct values for the serial integration link you are receiving.
The n is the number you used for n in step 5.
128
Installing [email protected]/DOS
7.
Press F10 to save your changes.
The Save All Data? dialog box appears.
8.
Press Y for Yes.
9.
From the Advanced Configuration menu, press F for Fax.
The Fax Configuration screen appears.
(If you type a space, the Setup utility interprets it as a zero.)
10. (Skip this step if you dial 9 to access an outside line.) In the Fax section
on Advanced Configuration, change:
fax_dl_init 9,
To:
fax_dl_init n
replace n with the outside access code for the telephone switching system. (Adding a comma causes a 2-second pause.)
11. (Skip this step if you have a Zoom modem.) Change:
fax_flow_control &K3
Chapter 11: Faxing
129
For Aceex modems, use:
fax_flow_control \Q3 X3 &K3
For Practical Peripherals modems, use:
fax_flow_control X3 &K3
This option has the Class 2 command for the type of flow control used
by your fax modem.
12. Change:
fax_id
To:
fax_id fax
where fax is a number or a name used to identify your fax modem (for
example, 'FAXA')
13. Many older Class 2 fax modems need a string of leading digits ‘1111’
for their fax_id. By default, Amanda adds these digits.
However, if they appear on the receiving fax machine, change:
fax_id_pad T
To:
fax_id_pad F
14. Change:
faxn
To:
faxn ext
where n is the number for the logical serial port and ext is the extension
number where the fax modem is connected on the telephone switching
system (this must be a single line extension).
15. This defines the maximum number of digits for a local extension. This
is used when the “72” Fax retrieve command is selected so that
fax_dl_init (usually ‘9,’) will be applied only for outside calls.
130
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Change:
max_local_extension 6
To:
max_local_extension n
where n is the maximum number of digits in a telephone extension on
your telephone switching system.
NOTE: You don’t need to change the default values for the other
serial port and fax configuration options.
To use the fax modem effectively, you must also use tokens
to program the Extension fields for one or more mailbox.
For more information, see the sections on one and two-call
faxbacks in “Chapter 11: Programming Examples,” in
Administering [email protected]/DOS.
Suggested Settings
The following modems have been used with Amanda with the following
settings. This is not a comprehensive list, and many other modems work with
Amanda. The following settings are not even guaranteed to work with your
modem (even if your modem is one of those listed) because modem
manufactures produce a variety of models and change their firmware from
time to time. However, you may want to try them.
Zoom Modems
fax_flow_control
fax_dl_init
&K3
-
Aceex Modems
fax_flow_control
\Q3 &K3
Practical Peripherals Modems
fax_flow_control
X3 &K3
Chapter 11: Faxing
131
SmartOne 1442 Faxmodems
fax_flow_control
&K4
fax_direct_connect H1O0
fax_receive_reverse T
fax_reset
&D3
fax_send_reverse
F
Boca modem M144EW
fax_flow_control
&K3
Detecting a Fax Machine Automatically
Amanda can detect and accept incoming faxes automatically.
To automatically detect and accept an incoming fax:
•
The fax connect tone must be in the PCPM tone table.
The tone information is stored in C:\AMANDA\PBX.DB\1001.TON.
The tone must be one of the first four tones or frequencies defined, and
it must be marked as a terminating tone. The PCPM code associated
with the tone must be in the range 12-21.
•
•
A mailbox (usually 994) must be set up to process faxes. To learn
how to create and program that mailbox, see Administering [email protected]/DOS.
That mailbox must be specified in the hot_box configuration option.
Modifying the PCPM Tone Table
To modify the tone table for Brooktrout voice boards:
1.
Run AccuCall Plus.
For more information about AccuCall Plus, see “Using AccuCall Plus”
on page 64.
132
Installing [email protected]/DOS
2.
To detect a FAX tone, use the following:
NAME:
FAX CNG TONE
TYPE:
OTHER
TERMINATING:
YES
CADENCE:
NO
FREQ1:
1100
FREQ2:
NONE
PCPMCODE:
12 (12 through 21 are acceptable)
QUICKCOUNT:
400
ON TIME:
528
OFF TIME:
2976
All other values can remain at their defaults.
NOTE: Remember to insert the FREQ1 value of 1100 into the filter
table in one of the first four positions. Only frequencies in
the first four positions are used for terminating tones.
Creating the Hot Box Mailbox
The Amanda Company recommends using mailbox 994 as the first hot_box,
but you can use any valid mailbox. Use the Users screen of Amanda
Standalone or the mailbox window of Amanda Administrator to create the
mailbox that will process the PCPM tone. See Administering
[email protected]/DOS for information about creating mailboxes.
Chapter 11: Faxing
133
Scenario #1: Blind transfer to fax machine
After calling Amanda, the caller presses the Start button on his fax machine
during the Company greeting (or some other greeting). Amanda recognizes
the tone and processes mailbox 994. mailbox 994 performs a blind transfer
to the fax machine. The Extension field for mailbox 994 must contain the
extension connected to the fax machine followed by an H (hangup).
Example Extension field:
1000H
where extension 1000 is connected to the fax machine
Scenario #2: Fax message left for user (who can view the fax using
Amanda Messenger)
The caller dials a user and presses the Start button on his fax machine during
the user’s greeting. Amanda recognizes the tone and processes mailbox 994.
mailbox 994 tells Amanda to create a fax message for the user who was
called. The Extension field for mailbox 994 contains tokens similar to the
following:
Example Extension field:
@J(%P,’’,’%X%F-H’)
which translates as the following:
@
Indicates to Amanda that she is to perform token programming
J() token Command that allows a fax to be received as a file or as a
message for a mailbox
%P
Indicates that the owner of the most recently processed mailbox
is to receive the fax message
’’
Makes Amanda wait until a call rings into a fax port
%X
System variable that contains the codes needed to transfer dial
tone on the current port
%F
The extension of the fax port being used
-H
A hangup (after pausing a half second to complete a blind
transfer)
134
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Setting the Hot Box Options
You must let Amanda know the mailbox that will process the PCPM tone by
setting the hot_box configuration option.
To designate a mailbox to accept incoming faxes:
1.
Run the Setup utility. At the DOS prompt, from the directory
C:\AMANDA, type:
SETUP
Then press Enter.
2.
From the main menu, press 4.
The System Configuration Options menu appears.
3.
From the System Configuration menu, type:
A
(for Advanced Configuration).
4.
From the Advanced Configuration menu, type:
H
(for Hot Boxes).
5.
Select the number that corresponds to the PCPM code.
6.
Type the mailbox number next to the code.
Your typing replaces previous setting (by default -1 for no mailbox).
7.
Press F10 to save.
Chapter 11: Faxing
135
Sending Faxes
If you are using Amanda as a voice server, you can install Amanda’s fax
driver—Amanda Fax. You can use Amanda Fax from any Windows
application that has a Print command. You can send documents,
spreadsheets, pictures, or anything else that the application can print. You
can:
•
•
•
Fax an item to another location via Amanda Voice Server’s fax modem.
Create a fax message to be mailed to users on your Amanda system.
Save the item as a file that can be:
-
Sent later as a fax via Amanda Voice Server’s fax modem.
For example, if you copy this file to Amanda Server using Amanda
Monitor, you can fax it to callers.
-
Imported as a fax message.
To fax documents via Amanda Voice Server or create fax messages to be
sent via Amanda Messenger, you need a fax modem attached to and properly
configured for use with your Amanda Voice Server.
In all cases, you need Amanda Fax installed on each workstation from which
faxes will originate.
For details about installing and using Amanda Fax, see
[email protected]/DOS Workstation Features. For details about
faxbacks, see the “Programming Examples” chapter in Administering
[email protected]/DOS.
136
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Chapter 12:
Using Serial Integration
Serial Integration Overview
Serial integration is a type of digital integration in which the telephone
switching system uses the computer’s serial port to communicate to
Amanda. A data line from the central office or telephone switching system
sends information and instructions (about the caller and called party) to your
on-site voice mail box.
For example, the telephone switching system can tell Amanda why the call
was transferred to Amanda, which extension the call is or was intended to go
to, and possible which extension the call is coming from. If you call Amanda
from an internal extension, Amanda recognizes you and asks only for your
security code. This makes getting your messages faster.
Amanda can support the following types of serial integration on Brooktrout
voice boards:
•
•
•
•
Bellcore Standard
NEC 2000 and NEC 2400
AT&T System 75 or Definity-G3
Generic which can apply to other types of serial integration when the
options are set correctly
NOTE: The Amanda Company recommends using a user’s telephone extension number as his mailbox in all cases, but,
with digital integration, this one-to-one correspondence is
required.
138
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Bellcore Standard SMDI
This section covers serial integration for any telephone switching system that
uses Bellcore Standard Simplified Message Desk Interface (SMDI). For
example, Centrex, Northern Telecom SL-1 with a VoiceBridge, and Fujitsu
F-9600 use SMDI.
To modify configuration options for use with Bellcore Standard SMDI:
1.
Choose an available serial port on the computer. The serial port you use
must be COM1, COM2, COM3, or COM4.
Whatever serial port you use, make sure nothing else is configured to
use that port or the IRQ (hardware interrupt) configured for use with that
port.
2.
Run Setup as explained in “Chapter 6: Running the Setup Utility.”
NOTE: As an alternative, you can use the JOVE utility to access the
configuration options in C:\AMANDA\INSTALL.CFG.
3.
From the Work.Group/DOS Configuration Utility menu, select System
Configuration Options. You press 4.
4.
From the System Configuration menu, press A for Advanced Configuration.
5.
From the Advanced Configuration menu, press S for Serial.
The Serial Port Definition dialog box appears.
(If you type a space, the Setup utility interprets it as a zero.)
Chapter 12: Using Serial Integration
6.
139
Change:
serial_portn 0
To:
serial_portn y
The option maps Amanda's logical port to a physical port on the PC.
The n is the number of the logical serial port and the y is the physical
serial port (for example, COM1). It is best to make n and y the same
number. For example, use serial_port1 1 or serial_port2 2,
and so forth.
7.
Modify the baudn, databitsn, stopbitsn, and parityn to
match the correct values for a serial integration link you are receiving.
The n is the number you used for n in step 6.
8.
Press F10 to save your changes.
The Save All Data? dialog box appears.
140
Installing [email protected]/DOS
9.
Press Y for Yes.
10. From the Advanced Configuration menu, press I for SMDI.
The SMDI Configuration screen appears.
(If you type a space, the Setup utility interprets it as a zero.)
11. In the SMDI section of Advanced Configuration, change
smdi_port 0
To:
smdi_port n
where n is the number for n in step 6.
12. Verify that the smdi_type option is:
smdi_type 'smdi'
Change it if necessary.
13. Modify smdi_base_port 1 if the first port on the telephone switching system is not identified as the logical port 1. For example, some telephone switching systems use the port’s extension or another logical
terminal number to identify the port.
Chapter 12: Using Serial Integration
141
The first port may be extension 241, with the second port 242, etc.
These numbers must be consecutive. For example, if the first or base
port is 241, you use smdi_base_port 241.
14. You can also set smdi_pretimeout n, where n is the maximum
number of seconds that an SMDI packet can precede the forwarded call.
The default is 50.
15. You can also set smdi_delay n, where n is the number of tenths of
seconds that Amanda waits after the call is answered before looking for
integration information. This allows more than one packet to be sent to a
port per telephone call. Amanda uses the last (most recent) packet. The
default is 0. The range is 0 to 255.
16. Press F10 to save your changes.
The Save All Data? dialog box appears.
17. Press Y for Yes.
NOTE: The smdi_max, smdi_start, smdi_stop, and smdi_term configuration options do not apply to telephone switching systems that use Bellcore Standard SMDI.
You must also modify your C:\AMANDA\PBX.DB\1001.PBX file to
include the SMDI information. Using the Amanda Setup utility (selection 3)
or the JOVE utility, verify that your integration lines are as follows. When
using Setup, type 30 in the Timeout field. (30 equals 30 tenths of seconds or
a total of 3 seconds.) Then enter the integration strings in the column for the
extension plan your system uses. Use an <available> entry for each string
you are adding. (See “Using Character Codes” on page 84 for more
information about the codes such as rrr or rrrr.)
4-digit Extension Plan
3-digit Extension Plan
Forward no answer
Axxxrrrr0000000
Axxxxrrr0000000
Forward no answer
Bxxxbbbb0000000
Bxxxxbbb0000000
Forward no answer
Nxxxrrrr0000000
Nxxxxrrr0000000
Forward no answer
Axxxrrrrxxxssss
Axxxxrrrxxxxsss
Forward busy
Bxxxbbbbxxxssss
Bxxxxbbbxxxxsss
142
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Forward busy
Nxxxrrrrxxxssss
Nxxxxrrrxxxxsss
Direct station access
Dxxxxxxxxxxeeee
Dxxxxxxxxxxxeee
If you are using the JOVE utility, the integration timeout precedes each
integration string as follows. This example is only for 4-digit station plans.
4-digit Station Plan
integration 20
'Axxxrrrr0000000'
integration 20
'Bxxxbbbb0000000'
integration 20
'Nxxxrrrr0000000'
integration 20
'Axxxrrrrxxxssss'
integration 20
'Bxxxbbbbxxxssss'
integration 20
'Nxxxrrrrxxxssss'
integration 20
'Dxxxxxxxxxxeeee'
NOTE: To modify the above for another digit plan, use the appropriate number of r's, b's, s's, e's, and x's. Also, while 30 is
used in the example (causing Amanda to timeout after 3
seconds if the packet has not been received), you may use
some other number. The number is in tenths of seconds.
To program the message waiting lights, use the following in the Method field
of the two notification records used for Light ON and Light OFF:
4-digit Station Plan
Light ON:
@S(1,'OP:MWI 000%U!\D')
Light OFF:
@S(1,'RMV:MWI 000%U!\D')
3-digit Station Plan
Light ON:
@S(1,'OP:MWI 0000%U!\D')
Light OFF:
@S(1,'RMV:MWI 0000%U!\D')
Chapter 12: Using Serial Integration
143
NOTE: The message codes above are for a 4-digit and 3-digit station plan. To modify to another digit plan, use the appropriate number of 0's. These examples use logical serial port 1;
for other ports, the 1’s would have to be replaced.
NEC 2000 and NEC 2400
This section covers serial integration for NEC 2000 and NEC 2400 systems.
To set configuration options for serial integration on NEC 2000 or NEC
2400:
1.
Follow steps 1 through 11 in the Bellcore Standard SDMI procedure “To
modify configuration options for use with Bellcore Standard SMDI:” in
the “Bellcore Standard SMDI” section.
2.
Change the smdi_type option to:
smdi_type 'necmci'
3.
Modify smdi_base_port 1 if the first port on the telephone switching system is not identified as the logical port 1. For example, some telephone switching systems use the port’s extension or another logical
terminal number to identify the port. The first port may be extension
241, with the second port 242, etc. These numbers must be consecutive. For example, if the first or base port is 241, you use
smdi_base_port 241.
4.
You can also set smdi_pretimeout x, where x is the maximum
number of seconds that a packet can precede the forwarded call. Start
with 50, the default, but you may need to experiment to determine the
best setting. On the NEC 2000, one solution provider reports that 15 is a
good setting.
5.
Set smdi_start option to the number that indicates the position in the
integration packet sent by the telephone switching system where the
field containing the port number starts. Start counting positions in the
packet with the number 1. The default is 8.
smdi_start 8
144
Installing [email protected]/DOS
6.
Set the smdi_stop option to the number that indicates the position in the
integration packet sent by the telephone switching system where the
field containing the port number ends. Start counting positions in the
packet with the number 1. The default is 11.
smdi_stop 11
7.
You can also set smdi_delay x, where x is a number of tenths of seconds. Amanda waits that long after the call is answered before looking
for integration information. This allows more than one packet to be sent
to a port per telephone call. Amanda uses the last (most recent) packet.
The default is 0.
NOTE: The smdi_max and smdi_term configuration options
do not apply to NEC telephone switching systems.
You must also modify your C:\AMANDA\PBX.DB\1001.PBX file to
include the SMDI information. Using the Amanda Setup utility (selection 3)
or the JOVE utility, verify that your integration lines are as follows. When
using Setup, type 20 in the Timeout field. (20 equals 20 tenths of seconds or
a total of 2 seconds.) Then enter the integration strings in the column for the
station plan your system uses. Use an <available> entry for each string you
are adding. (See “Using Character Codes” on page 84 for more information
about the codes such as rrr or rrrr.)
4-Digit Station Plan
3-Digit Station Plan
Forward no answer:
40xxxssssxxxxxrrrrxx
40xxxsssxxxxxxrrrxxx
Forward busy:
41xxxssssxxxxxbbbbxx
41xxxsssxxxxxxbbbxxx
Forward all:
42xxxssssxxxxxrrrrxx
42xxxsssxxxxxxrrrxxx
Direct station access:
43xxxeeeexxxxxxxxxxx 43xxxeeexxxxxxxxxxxx
Direct station access
from trunk:
432xxttttxxxxxxxxxxx
432xxtttxxxxxxxxxxxx
Chapter 12: Using Serial Integration
145
If you are using the JOVE utility, the integration timeout precedes each
integration string as follows. This example is only for 4-digit station plans.
4-Digit Station Plan
integration 20
'40xxxssssxxxxxrrrrxx'
integration 20
'41xxxssssxxxxxbbbbxx'
integration 20
'42xxxssssxxxxxrrrrxx'
integration 20
'43xxxeeeexxxxxxxxxxx'
integration 20
'432xxttttxxxxxxxxxxx'
NOTE: To modify the above for another digit plan, use the appropriate number of r’s, b’s, s’s, e’s, and x’s. In the example,
20 is used (causing Amanda to timeout after 2 seconds if
the packet has not been received) because it works for all
serial integration. The number is in tenths of seconds.
To program the message waiting lights for NEC 2000, use the following in
the Method field of the two notification records used for Light ON and Light
OFF:
Light ON:
@S(1,’\002’)S(1,’0!A1’)S(1,’%U’)S(1,’\003’)
Light OFF:
@S(1,’\002’)S(1,’0!A5’)S(1,’%U’)S(1,’\003’)
To program the message waiting lights for NEC 2400 IMG, use the
following in the Method field of the two notification records used for Light
ON and Light OFF:
Light ON:
@S(1,’\002’)S(1,’0!B2’)S(1,’%U’)
S(1,’0000000001’)S(1,’\003’)
Light OFF:
@S(1,’\002’)S(1,’0!B6’)S(1,’%U’)
S(1,’0000000001’)S(1,’\003’)
NOTE: These examples uses logical serial port 1; for other ports, the
1’s would have to be replaced.
146
Installing [email protected]/DOS
AT&T System 75 or Definity-G3
If you use AT&T System 75 or Definity-G3 (smdi_type s75), call Amanda
Company customer support team for more information. Call to be faxed
Technical Note 14, “Serial Integration for System 75 and Definity-G3.”
To set configuration options for use with System 75 and Definity-G3:
1.
Follow steps 1 through 11 in the Bellcore Standard SDMI procedure “To
modify configuration options for use with Bellcore Standard SMDI:” in
the “Bellcore Standard SMDI” section.
2.
Change the smdi_type option to:
smdi_type 's75'
NOTE: Type 's75' with a lower case 's'. This option is case sensitive.
3.
Modify smdi_base_port 1 if the first port on the telephone switching system is not 1. For example, some telephone switching systems use
the port’s extension or another logical terminal number to identify the
port. The first port may be extension 210, with the second port 211, etc.
(These numbers must be consecutive.) For example, if the first or base
port is 210, you use smdi_base_port 210.
4.
You can also set smdi_delay x, where x is a number of tenths of seconds causes Amanda to wait that long after the call is answered before
looking for integration information. This allows more than one packet to
be sent to a port per telephone call. Amanda uses the last (most recent)
packet. The default is 0.
5.
Press F10 to save your changes.
The Save All Data? dialog box appears.
6.
Press Y for Yes.
NOTE: The smdi_max, smdi_pretimeout, smdi_start, smdi_stop,
and smdi_term configuration options do not apply to
AT&T System 75 and Definity-G3 telephone switching
systems.
Chapter 12: Using Serial Integration
147
You must modify your C:\AMANDA\PDX.DB\1001.PBX file to properly
integrate the 7404D set information. Using either the Amanda Setup utility
or the JOVE utility, verify that your integration lines are:
integration
integration
integration
integration
integration
integration
integration
integration
integration
integration
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
'xxxxxxxxxxxxxx*xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxrrr
'xxxxxxxxxxxxsssxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxrrr
'xxxxxxxxxxxxxx*xxxxAxxxxxxxxxxxrrr
'xxxxxxxxxxxxeeexxxxAxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
'xxxxxxxxxxxxxx*xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxbbb
'xxxxxxxxxxxxsssxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxbbb
'xxxxxxxxxxxxxx*xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxrrr
'xxxxxxxxxxxxsssxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxrrr
'xxxxxxxxxxxxxx*xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxrrr
'xxxxxxxxxxxxsssxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxrrr
D'
D'
C'
C'
B'
B'
S'
S'
x'
x'
NOTE: The integration lines above are for a three (3) digit station
plan. When you have a mixed dialing plan, (for example, 3
and 4 digit extensions) you must have integration strings to
handle ALL possible combinations.
To modify to another digit plan, use the appropriate number of r’s, b’s, s’s, e’s, and x’s. The proper integration lines
vary depending on your System 75 software release, digital
telephone set model, and the data cartridge that you use in
the digital set. If you experience problems with the integration strings defined above, run option 3 in the Setup utility
(Integration Helper) to assist you, or contact Amanda Company customer support.
Also, you need to defined the telephones system dial code “What to dial
when a port goes off-hook” with the code you defined above in FEATURE
ACCESS CODE Call Pickup Access Code.
Finally, you must create mailboxes for each extension number where
Amanda’s ports are connected. The parameters must be defined as follows:
Extension: @G(990)
Do Not Disturb: OFF LOCK: ON
Store Messages? NO
Chains RNA: 990
Chains Busy: 990
148
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Mailbox 990 is the default Company Greeting mailbox. If you have
redefined the Company Greeting mailbox for any of the ports, use that
mailbox instead of 990.
Light ON:
*4%U
Light OFF:
#4%U
NOTE: The examples use %U (for mailbox), but you may prefer
%E (for Extension field) or %V (for Variable field). You
can use %E when the Extension field contains only the extension number. (For example, if the Extension field contains an H for a blind transfer or starts with a @, %E is
unusable.) You can use %U only if the mailbox is the same
as the extension number. If you use %V, the Variable field
in the notification record must contain the extension number.
The *4 and #4 are the AT&T default values, often left as the standard, but
fully configurable. Watch out for dialplan conflicts if you change them
because the conflicts can slow down system operation if a needed wait for
dial timeout (that is, a four-digit speedial code) has the same first few digits
as the message waiting light feature.
Ericsson MD-110
This section covers serial integration for the Ericsson MD-110 system.
To set configuration options for serial integration on Ericsson MD-110:
1.
Follow steps 1 through 11 in the Bellcore Standard SDMI procedure “To
modify configuration options for use with Bellcore Standard SMDI:” in
the “Bellcore Standard SMDI” section.
2.
Change the smdi_type option to:
smdi_type 'md110'
Chapter 12: Using Serial Integration
149
3.
Modify smdi_base_port 1 if the first port on the telephone switching system is not identified as the logical port 1. For example, some telephone switching systems use the port’s extension or another logical
terminal number to identify the port. The first port may be extension
241, with the second port 242, etc. These numbers must be consecutive. For example, if the first or base port is 241, you use
smdi_base_port 241.
4.
You can also set smdi_pretimeout x, where x is the maximum
number of seconds that a packet can precede the forwarded call. Start
with 50, the default, but you may need to experiment to determine the
best setting.
5.
Set the smdi_start option to the number of digits in your extension plan.
For example, the following indicates that you have three-digit extensions.
smdi_start 3
6.
(Optional) Set the smdi_stop option to the number of digits in your port
number information that the telephone switching system will send. This
number will usually be 2.
smdi_stop 2
7.
You can also set smdi_delay x, where x is a number of tenths of
seconds. Amanda waits that long after the call is answered before looking for integration information. This allows more than one packet to be
sent to a port per telephone call. Amanda uses the last (most recent)
packet. The default is 0.
NOTE: The smdi_max and smdi_term configuration options
do not apply to Ericsson MD-110 telephone switching
systems.
You must also modify your C:\AMANDA\PBX.DB\1001.PBX file to
include the SMDI information. Using the Amanda Setup utility (selection 3)
or the JOVE utility, verify that your integration lines are as follows. When
using Setup, type 10 in the Timeout field. (10 equals 10 tenths of seconds or
a total of 1 second.) Then enter the integration strings in the column for the
station plan your system uses.
150
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Use an <available> entry for each string you are adding. (See “Using
Character Codes” on page 84 for more information about the codes such as
rrr or rrrr.)
4-Digit Station Plan
3-Digit Station Plan
Forward no answer:
80rrrrxx
80rrrxx
Direct station access:
81eeeexx
81eeexx
Direct station access:
82eeeexx
82eeexx
Forward no answer:
83ssssrrrrxx
83sssrrrxx
Forward no answer:
85rrrrxx
85rrrxx
Forward no answer:
86rrrrxx
86rrrxx
Forward no answer:
91ssssrrrrxx
91sssrrrxx
Forward busy:
92ssssbbbbxx
91sssbbbxx
Forward no answer:
94rrrrxx
94rrrxx
Forward busy:
95bbbbxx
95bbbxx
If you are using the JOVE utility, the integration timeout precedes each
integration string as follows. This example is only for 4-digit station plans.
3-Digit Station Plan
integration 10
'80rrrxx'
integration 10
'81eeexx'
integration 10
'82eeexx'
integration 10
'83sssrrrxx'
integration 10
'85rrrxx'
integration 10
'86rrrxx'
integration 10
'91sssrrrxx'
integration 10
'92sssbbbxx'
Chapter 12: Using Serial Integration
151
integration 10
'94rrrxx'
integration 10
'95bbbxx'
NOTE: The number of x’s in the above strings is equal to the value
of smdi_stop, while the number of r’s, e’s, b’s, and s’s is
equal to the value of smdi_start. To modify the above for
another digit plan, use the appropriate number of r’s, b’s,
s’s, e’s, and x’s. In the example, 10 is used (causing
Amanda to timeout after 1 second if the packet has not been
received) because it works for all serial integration. The
number is in tenths of seconds.
To program the message waiting lights for NEC 2000, use the following in
the Method field of the two notification records used for Light ON and Light
OFF:
Light ON:
@S(3,’\B06%E01\N’)
Light OFF:
@S(3,’\B07%E01\N’)
\B represents Ctrl+B, the start of transmission (STX) character. %E should
be the same number of digits and smdi_start specifies.
NOTE: These examples uses logical serial port 3; for other ports, the
3’s would have to be replaced.
Generic
This section covers a generic serial integration. It is designed for any
telephone switching system using serial integration other than those that:
•
•
•
Use Bellcore Standard SMDI
Are NEC 2000 or NEC 2400 systems
Are AT&T System 75 or Definity-G3 systems
152
Installing [email protected]/DOS
To set configuration options for generic serial integration:
1.
Follow steps 1 through 11 in the Bellcore Standard SDMI procedure “To
modify configuration options for use with Bellcore Standard SMDI,” in
the “Bellcore Standard SDMI” section.
2.
Change the smdi_type option to:
To:
smdi_type 'generic'
3.
Modify smdi_base_port 1 if the first port on the telephone switching system is not identified as the logical port 1. For example, some telephone switching systems use the port’s extension or another logical
terminal number to identify the port. The first port may be extension
241, with the second port 242, etc. These numbers must be consecutive. For example, if the first or base port is 241, you use
smdi_base_port 241.
4.
You can also set smdi_pretimeout n, where n is the maximum
number of seconds that an SMDI packet can precede the forwarded call.
The default is 50.
5.
You must set smdi_start n, where n is the position in the integration packet sent by the telephone switching system where the field containing the port number starts. Start counting positions in the packet with
the number 1. The default is 8.
6.
You must set smdi_stop n, where n is the position in the integration
packet sent by the telephone switching system where the field containing the port number ends. Start counting positions in the packet with the
number 1. The default is 11.
7.
You must set smdi_max n, where n is the maximum number of characters expected/accepted per packet. The default is 143.
8.
You must set smdi_term n, where n is the termination character set
(if there is one). Leave this option empty if the packets are terminated
only by receiving smdi_max characters.
Chapter 12: Using Serial Integration
9.
153
You can also set smdi_delay n, where n is the number of tenths of
seconds that Amanda waits after the call is answered before looking for
integration information. This allows more than one packet to be sent to a
port per telephone call. Amanda uses the last (most recent) packet. The
default is 0. The range is 0 to 255.
You must also modify the system integration patterns (stored in
C:\AMANDA\PBX.DB\1001.PBX) using the Amanda Setup utility
(selection 3) or the JOVE utility. You may need to write appropriate
notification records to turn message lights on and off. Consult your PBX
manual for this information.
154
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Chapter 13:
Miscellaneous
Configuring Types of Lines
Most people connect Amanda to standard analog lines known as loop start
lines that indicate a new call by sending an AC voltage to the telephone
ringer.
You can also connect Amanda to Direct Inward Dialing (DID) lines with an
appropriate DID interface unit. Amanda assumes that you have a DID
interface unit, such as Exacom DID-200 Series, that processes a hookflash as
battery reversal.
When you use DID, Amanda receives the last few digits of the dialed
number. Those digits are used as (or modified by programming to be) the
internal extension. Then the caller does not have to enter an extension.
Use the following Telephone Line Options Diagram to determine what
configuration settings you need.
CAUTION:
The configuration option ring_mode is a global setting. If any lines into Amanda are loopstart (such as
those that perform notification records), ring_mode
must be true.
156
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Telephone Line Options Diagrams
Chapter 13: Miscellaneous
157
Sharing Amanda
Sometimes more than one company or department share an Amanda system.
Specific ports are assigned to specific groups. For example, on a two-port
system shared by two companies, one company receives calls on port 1 and
another on port 2. This affects the configuration options that determine
which mailbox is used for:
158
Installing [email protected]/DOS
•
•
The company or initial greeting that callers hear when they call one
of the companies.
The caller instructions greeting for each company.
The mailbox/extension for each company when 0 is dialed for the operator needs to be included in the menu for this mailbox.
•
•
The employee directory that contains the names of all the users as
they appear in the Directory Name 1 and Directory Name 2 fields.
The direct message mailbox that allows you to record a message for
a mailbox without having to transfer to that extension. You hear either the mailbox’s greeting or the name and extension recording (depending on the setting for the short_direct_send configuration
option). For example, you can leave a message for someone that you
know is out of the office or not to be disturbed.
When multiple companies share an Amanda system, they divide the ports
between them by doing either of the following:
•
•
Dedicating each port to a specific company greeting using the
box_grt configuration option.
Identifying the incoming CO lines with the Amanda mailbox that has
the same ID number. (To use this method, the telephone switching
system must send some sort of CO line ID number.)
This tenant services feature is based on dynamic port allocation, which
means that any Amanda port can receive the calls for any company sharing the Amanda system. This eliminates the need for dedicating ports to
each company.
Using the box_grt Configuration Option
Typically, you dedicate each port to a specific company greeting using the
box_grt configuration option.
To use the box_grt:
•
In the Per Port section of Advanced Configuration, change the mailbox for the company greeting on a per port basis.
Suppose the first company uses ports 1 and 2, and the second company
uses ports 3 and 4. Then box_grt for ports 1 and 2 might be set to mailbox 990, while box_grt for ports 3 and 4 might be set to mailbox 880.
Chapter 13: Miscellaneous
159
Using Incoming Trunk Call and CO Line IDs
Most telephone switching systems use three or four digit numbers to identify
a trunk call or CO line. You can use these IDs for dynamic port allocation by
doing all of the following:
•
Adding the appropriate integration string to the 1001.pbx (and/or
2001.pbx) file.
Depending on the number of digits in the ID, you use ttt or tttt in your
integration string.
To capture the inband signalling information you need for the integration string, you need to use one of the following:
-
A digit grabber/line monitor
-
A dummy integration string
Then you edit the trace.out file to see the actual characters sent.
•
Creating mailboxes that match the IDs.
The Extension field of each mailbox must direct the call to the appropriate company greeting.
To create the appropriate integration string using a digit grabber:
1.
Place a trunk call into Amanda over a CO line (for example CO line
701).
2.
Write down the exact character string sent (as reported by the digit grabber).
For example, it might be #01##701#.
160
Installing [email protected]/DOS
3.
Run the Setup utility as explained in “Running Setup” on page 51.
4.
From the Configuration Utility menu, press 3 to select Telephone System Integration Patterns.
The Telephone Switch Type screen appears.
5.
From the Telephone Switch Type screen, select the name of your .PBX
file then press Enter.
The Integration Patterns screen appears. Its first line tells the name and
code (1001 or 2001) for your switching system (if they appear in the
.PBX file).
NOTE: To move from the timeout field to the integration patterns and vice versa, press Page Up or Page Down.
6.
Press Down Arrow until the next <available> line is selected.
7.
Type #01##ttt#.
The ttt represents the actual CO line ID number, in this example, 701.
8.
Press Down Arrow again.
The description should read “:Direct call from CO trunk.”
9.
Press F10 to save, then Esc to return to the C:\Amanda prompt.
10. Next you must create a mailbox with the same ID number. See “To program Amanda:” on page 162.
Chapter 13: Miscellaneous
161
To create the appropriate integration string using a dummy integration
string:
1.
Perform steps 3 through 6 in the previous procedure (“To create the
appropriate integration string using a digit grabber:”).
2.
Type cccccccccccccc.
Be sure to use at least as many c’s as you can expect in the inband signal
to be captured.
3.
Press Down Arrow
The Description should read “Unknown/Invalid integration.”
4.
Press F10 to save, then Esc to return to the C:\AMANDA prompt.
5.
Start Amanda.
6.
Place a trunk call into Amanda over a CO line (for example CO line
701).
7.
After the call is answered, hang up.
8.
Shut down Amanda.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
9.
Press Alt+S (if Amanda is running as a standalone) or s (if
Amanda is running as a voice server).
Type in the password. (The default is AMandA with only the
first two and the last letter capitalized.)
Press Enter.
Press Y (to confirm the shutdown).
Press Y again (to reconfirm).
At the C:\AMANDA prompt, type:
edit trace.out
10. Press Enter.
11. Press Page Down or search for RING.
In the next few lines of the trace file are the actual inband digits.
162
Installing [email protected]/DOS
12. Write down the inband digits.
13. Press Ctrl+X then Ctrl+C to return to the C:\AMANDA prompt.
14. Return to the Setup utility and replace the string of c’s with the correct
digits—except for the CO line ID which you replace with t’s.
To program Amanda:
1.
Create mailboxes that match the CO Line IDs, for example, mailboxes
701, 702, 703, etc.
2.
For each of these mailboxes:
•
Under Options, Do Not Disturb must be locked OFF
•
Under Messages, Store needs to be OFF
Chapter 13: Miscellaneous
163
The figures below show mailbox 701 as an example.
164
Installing [email protected]/DOS
The Users Screen
Save Auto Delete Notify Table Copy Esc/EXIT PgDn/NEXT PgUp/PREV
Mailbox: 701
Extension: @G(990)
Dir Name 1:
Comment:
Created:
Saved:
Messages
Current:
Maximum:
NEVER
NEVER
Read-Only:
Chains
Done:
RNA:
Busy:
Delay:
Menus
1:
4:
7:
0 (default is 4)
OFF Lock: ON
OFF Lock: OFF
NO
Max: 180 sec
0
Guests: -1
0
Max: 45 sec
SYS Max: 45 sec
YES Name/Ext? YES
Conn Secs:
User Secs:
0, 0 new (
0 sec)
0
Total: 0
3.
Security Code:
Dir Name 2:
Basic Options
Maximum Rings:
Do Not Disturb:
Screen Calls?
Store Messages?
Copy Messages To:
Message Volume:
Current Greeting:
Busy Message?
ID Call? NO D/T?
Users
0
0
Groups
1: 1
2: 0
3: 0
4: 0
0
2:
5:
8:
0:
Statistics Started:
Calls: 0 Last:
Transfers: 0 Last:
Logins: 0 Last:
Notifies: 0 Last:
3:
6:
9:
NEVER
NEVER
NEVER
NEVER
NEVER
Create a token string in the Extension field that will play the greeting for
the company that uses that CO Line.
For example, if Company A uses LINE701 and LINE702 and its company greeting is Greeting 1 for mailbox 990 (the default Company
Greeting mailbox), then both mailbox 701 and mailbox 702 should have
the following in their Extension fields:
@G(990)
This token string tells Amanda to play Greeting 1 from mailbox 990
when a call comes in on LINE701 or LINE702.
Chapter 13: Miscellaneous
165
Similarly, if Company B uses LINE703 and LINE704 and its company
greeting is Greeting 1 for mailbox 890, then both mailbox 703 and mailbox 704 should have the following in their Extension fields:
@G(890)
TIP:
4.
5.
If later Company A decides it needs only one line and
Company B is happy to pay for three lines, you can
switch LINE702 to Company B by changing the Extension field in mailbox 702 to:
@G(890)
The Company Greetings mailboxes (990 and 890 in this example) have
the following settings:
•
Under Options, Do Not Disturb must be locked ON
•
Under Messages, Store needs to be OFF
•
The Done Chain should contain the number of the Caller Instructions mailbox (whose greeting is “Press 1 for technical support;
press 2 for …”)
For example, if Company A uses the default Company Greeting
mailbox (990) and the default Caller Instructions mailbox (991),
mailbox 990 should look like the mailbox in the figures below.
Record the greetings for each company using your telephone or Amanda
Messenger.
166
Installing [email protected]/DOS
The following figures show how this looks in Amanda Administrator
and Amanda standalone.
Chapter 13: Miscellaneous
167
The Users Screen
Save Auto Delete Notify Table Copy Esc/EXIT PgDn/NEXT PgUp/PREV
Mailbox: 990
Extension:
Dir Name 1:
Comment:
Created:
Saved:
Messages
Current:
Maximum:
Security Code:
Dir Name 2:
Basic Options
Maximum Rings:
Do Not Disturb:
Screen Calls?
Store Messages?
Copy Messages To:
Message Volume:
Current Greeting:
Busy Message?
ID Call? NO D/T?
NEVER
NEVER
Read-Only:
Chains
Done: 991
RNA:
Busy:
Delay:
Menus
1:
4:
7:
0 (default is 4)
ON
Lock: ON
OFF Lock: ON
NO
Max: 180 sec
0
Guests: -1
0
Max: 45 sec
SYS Max: 45 sec
YES Name/Ext? YES
Conn Secs:
User Secs:
0, 0 new (
0 sec)
0
Total: 0
Users
0
0
Groups
1: 1
2: 0
3: 0
4: 0
0
2:
5:
8:
0:
Statistics Started:
Calls: 0 Last:
Transfers: 0 Last:
Logins: 0 Last:
Notifies: 0 Last:
3:
6:
9:
NEVER
NEVER
NEVER
NEVER
NEVER
Using Multiple Employee Directories
To have different employee directories:
•
In the Per Port section of Advanced Configuration, change the mailbox for the employee directory on a per port basis.
For example, for a four-port Amanda system shared by two companies,
box_idx for ports 1 and 2 might be set to mailbox 411, while box_grt for
ports 3 and 4 might be set to mailbox 311.
168
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Using Multiple Direct Messaging Mailboxes
To use different mailboxes for direct messaging:
•
In the Per Port section of Advanced Configuration, change the mailbox for the direct messaging on a per port basis.
For example, for a four-port Amanda system shared by two companies,
box_snd for ports 1 and 2 might be set to mailbox 998, while box_grt for
ports 3 and 4 might be set to mailbox 888.
Chapter 14:
Accessing Amanda Remotely
Accessing Amanda from Another Computer
You can control and configure [email protected]/DOS remotely from
another computer using the Host and Remote programs. Host runs on
Amanda (server or standalone) and Remote runs on the computer that is
accessing Amanda remotely. You also need either a null modem cable to
connect the computers or a modem on each computer.
These programs allow the remote computer’s monitor and keyboard to take
over for Amanda’s monitor and keyboard. For example, you can run Setup
and other programs on Amanda’s computer while sitting at the remote
computer. You should see whatever is (or would be) visible on Amanda’s
monitor, and you can use Amanda as though you were operating her
keyboard.
There are two versions of the Host program: HOST.COM 2.0 and
HOST.COM 3.0. The Host programs are both DOS programs. Your new
[email protected]/DOS system comes with HOST.COM 3.0.
There are also two versions of the Remote program: REMOTE.COM, a
DOS program which is in the C:\AMANDA directory on your Amanda
system, and WINREM.EXE, a 32-bit application sold separately by The
Amanda Company.
REMOTE.COM is a DOS program. It can be run from Windows when
Windows is in DOS mode. (REMOTE.COM does not run in a DOS box.)
170
Installing [email protected]/DOS
WINREM.EXE runs in either Windows 95 or Windows NT. It has many
more features than REMOTE.COM. For example, it allows you to copy files
from the host computer to the remote computer and vice versa.
WinRem is not shipped with [email protected]/DOS, but works with
[email protected]/DOS. Contact your sales representative for more
information.
Host Program
HOST.COM
(Host 2.0—found on
older systems)
Remote Program
REMOTE.COM
(also called Remote
2.0)
Compatibility Issues
Designed to be used
together. You cannot
transfer files with this
combination.
Compatible, but
WINREM.EXE
(also called WinRem HOST.COM does not
support the file trans1.0)
fer feature of
WINREM.EXE
Compatible, but
REMOTE.COM
HOST.COM
(Host 3.0—found on (also called Remote REMOTE.COM does
not offer a file transfer
2.0)
[email protected]
feature
Group systems starting with version 6.15) WINREM.EXE
Designed to be used
The file name is the (also called WinRem together. You can
same for both Host
1.0)
transfer files with this
2.0 and 3.0.
combination.
NOTE: DOS programs that use graphics and pop-up decision windows may not be controllable or appear correctly on the
screen while you are using either Remote program. Examples are Edit, MSD, Scandisk, and Defrag (when run in interactive, rather than batch, mode).
Never use Edit remotely. When you press Alt+X to close
the file, you become disconnected. Use JOVE instead.
Chapter 14: Accessing Amanda Remotely
171
Setting Up Amanda’s Computer as a Host
It is a good idea to run the Host program automatically whenever Amanda’s
computer starts. The AUTOEXEC.BAT file already contains lines that you
can use for this purpose.
However, you must remove the REM at the beginning of two lines in the
AUTOEXEC.BAT: the line that contains the HOST command and the line
above it that starts REM ECHO…. You might also have to change the
number of the COM port to be used by the null modem cable or by the
modem in Amanda’s computer. If the line is missing, add it as the first line of
the AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
Then reboot the computer to load the Host program.
The line for the null modem cable is:
REM LH HOST /2 /f /n >>%LOGN%
This lines for the modem and null modem cabled can be explained as
follows:
REM
Indicates that the line is currently ignored. Remove the
REM to use the line.
LH HOST
Tells the computer to load this program in high memory.
/2
The 2 is for COM2. You can change this number to the
number of the COM port the null modem cable or modem
will use.
/f
Indicates that the cable or modem is faster than 2400 bps.
/n
Indicates that a null modem cable will be connected to
both computers.
>>%LOGN%
Sends information about loading the Host program to either the C:\BOOTLOG file or to the screen, depending
whether your AUTOEXEC.BAT file contains the line
SET LOGN=C:\BOOTLOG or the line SET
LOGN=CON:
172
Installing [email protected]/DOS
The line for the modem is:
REM LH HOST /4 >>%LOGN%
Use the list above (for the null modem) to understand each part of this line.
Change the /4 to the number of the COM port used by the modem on
Amanda’s computer, and add a /f if your modem can handle data speeds of
higher than 2400 bps.
Setting Up the Remote Computer
The remote computer must have a copy of the Remote program. Then you
can run the Remote program from that computer (for example, a
notebook).You can copy REMOTE.COM from C:\AMANDA to a floppy
disk using the following command at the DOS prompt:
copy c:\amanda\remote.com a:\remote.com
(Your floppy disk drive may be b: rather than a:.) Then you can insert the
floppy disk into the remote computer and copy the file to that computer.
If Amanda is running as a standalone, you can copy the file using the Alt+F
(Filecopy) command from the Main screen. Simply answer the Copy From:
and Copy To: prompts.
Chapter 14: Accessing Amanda Remotely
173
Connecting by Null Modem Cable
To connect over a null modem cable:
1.
Attach one end of the null modem cable to the correct serial port (for
example, COM2) on Amanda’s computer and to a serial port on the
remote computer.
2.
Turn on both computers.
3.
From the remote computer, use the following command to start the
Remote program.
remote /x /n /f
where x is 1 or 2, depending on what COM port the cable is connected
to on the remote computer. For COM1, you can use /1 or nothing at all
because COM1 is the default.
You execute the command from the directory in which the Remote program is stored or you add the path name to the command. For example,
if the program is stored on your hard drive in the UTIL directory on
your C: drive, C:\UTIL\REMOTE would replace REMOTE in the command. If the computer runs a version of Windows, run the command
while the computer is in DOS mode. (Remote may not run in a DOS
box.)
4.
Press Enter.
The following appears on the screen:
Remote Version 2.0
You can run Setup and other programs on Amanda’s computer while sitting at the remote computer. (If the screen is blank because of Amanda’s
screen saver, press the spacebar to exit the screen saver.)
5.
To end the Remote session, press Alt+X.
The program asks you to confirm your decision to exit by typing Y.
The remote computer disconnects from Amanda.
174
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Connecting by Modem
To connect via data modem, both Amanda’s computer and the computer that
will be accessing Amanda remotely must be running and have a modem that
is connected to both a serial port and a telephone line. The data modem must
be connected to either a dedicated telephone number (this works best) or its
own telephone system station.
The Host program can use COM1 through COM4. The Amanda Company
recommends that Amanda’s computer use one of the following for the data
modem:
COM1 with IRQ4 and not other devices on COM1 or using IRQ4
COM2 with IRQ3 and not other devices on COM2 or using IRQ3
COM3 with IRQ11 and not other devices on COM3 or using IRQ11
COM4 with IRQ5 and not other devices on COM4 or using IRQ5
The Remote program works only with COM1 or COM2, with industry
standard IRQ and I/O port addressing. That is:
COM1 with IRQ4 and not other devices on COM1 or using IRQ4
COM2 with IRQ3 and not other devices on COM2 or using IRQ3
To control Amanda via modem:
1.
Use the following command to start the Remote program:
remote /x
where x is 1 or 2, depending on what COM port the cable is connected
to on the remote computer. (For COM1, you can use /1 or nothing at all
because COM1 is the default.)
You execute the command from the directory in which the Remote program is stored or you add the path name to the command. For example,
if the program is stored on your hard drive in the UTIL directory on your
C: drive, C:\UTIL\REMOTE would replace REMOTE in the command.
Chapter 14: Accessing Amanda Remotely
175
If the computer runs a version of Windows, run the command while the
computer is in DOS mode. (Remote may not run in a DOS box.)
2.
Press Enter.
The following appears on the screen:
Remote Version 2.0
Enter phone number:
3.
Type the telephone number for Amanda, then press Enter.
For example, if both modems are on the station side of the telephone
switching system, you might use 9,17147530414,,,,,102 where the commas are two-second pauses and the 102 is for mailbox 102. In this
example, the Extension field for mailbox 102 would have to be 102H to
achieve a blind transfer to extension 102.
Enter password: appears on the screen.
4.
Type JENNIFER in uppercase letters, then press Enter.
You can run Setup and other programs on Amanda’s computer while sitting at the remote computer. (If the screen is blank because of Amanda’s
screen saver, press the spacebar to exit the screen saver.)
5.
When you have finished, type Alt+X to end the connection.
The program asks you to confirm your decision to exit by typing Y.
The remote computer disconnects from Amanda.
176
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Chapter 15:
Programming Amanda
Using Tokens
The Token Programming Language allows you to write programs for
Amanda. These programs consist of tokens entered in Extension fields
(defined per mailbox using Amanda Administrator’s Mailbox window or
Amanda Standalone’s Users screen) and/or in Method fields (defined per
mailbox using Amanda Administrator’s Notify window or Amanda
Standalone’s Notify Screen). This section describes the language and
introduces you to common programming terms. Understanding these terms
can help you understand any programming language.
A token is a sequence of one or more characters that represents an action that
Amanda can perform. The tokens that you use most often are simple and
perform routine actions such as dialing an extension. However, a program
can be much more complicated than that.
With the Token Programming Language, you can use tokens to do either of
the following:
•
Enhance Amanda’s normal processing of the Extension and Method
fields. Normally, she uses Programmed Call Progress Monitoring
(PCPM).
In this case, you add the tokens where appropriate within the field.
For example, 147H is a sequence of four tokens that tells Amanda to
dial the DTMF digits 147 (for extension 147) and then hang up. Notice
that the tokens are not separated by spaces (or any other characters).
You write tokens one right after the other.
178
Installing [email protected]
•
Stop Amanda’s normal processing of the fields and tell her what to
do.
In this case, the first character in the field is @. Then you add the tokens
that tell Amanda what to do.
For example,
@R(G1,%S1)
assigns the DTMF digits entered by the caller to a variable named %S1.
This starts with an @ to indicate that you are NOT processing this
Extension field normally.
Normal processing for the Extension field: Amanda plays “Please hold
while I try that extension,” puts the caller on transfer hold, then evaluates the
tokens in the field. Unless told to do otherwise, she listens for call progress
tones and an answer.
The @ stops Amanda from performing the dial code that puts a caller on
transfer hold (also known as the dl_dtwait dial code). As explained in
Installing [email protected], you use the Setup utility (selection 1) to
set or view the dial codes. The codes are stored in
C:\AMANDA\PBX.DB\1001.PBX, which you can view or edit using the
JOVE utility.
Normal processing of the Notify Method field: Amanda tries to access a
port for an outbound notification call. The @ stops Amanda from going offhook.
When most people think of a program, they think of a series of lines, each of
which contains a single action or command. The Token Programming
Language is similar, but each line become the contents of a different field,
using the Extension field of a mailbox.
If the program contains only a few lines, sometimes you can use just one
Extension or Method field for the entire program. However, when you need
more fields, you use the Extension fields from additional mailboxes. Even if
a Method field must be extended, you extend it to the Extension field in
another mailbox.
Chapter 15: Programming Amanda
179
You use additional fields for any of the following reasons:
•
•
The logic of the program branches or repeats. You use a G() command or I() command to create the branch or loop. See “Flow of
Control: Branching and Looping” on page 190 for more details.
The length of the string of tokens exceeds 65 characters, so you are
forced to continue in another field. You use a G() command to extend the token string to a new Extension field.
Mailbox Settings
If you are using a mailbox’s Extension field for token programming, you
must use all of the following settings:
•
•
Do Not Disturb must be off. Amanda ignores the Extension field altogether if Do Not Disturb is on.
Call screening must be off.
Success and Failure
Amanda evaluates tokens from left to right. If Amanda performs a token
successfully, she goes on to the next token.
When all the tokens have been performed successfully in an Extension field,
Amanda goes to the RNA Chain field. If the RNA field is blank, she goes to
the Done Chain field for the company greeting mailbox (usually mailbox
990).
When all the tokens have been performed successfully in the Notify Method
field, Amanda goes to the next Notify Method field (if there is one). If there
are no more Notify Method fields, Amanda goes to the Done Chain field for
the current mailbox.
If the token is unrecognized (because of a syntax error or a typographical
error) or fails, Amanda immediately goes to the Done Chain field without
processing the rest of the tokens in the field. If the last successful token gives
Amanda an invalid mailbox, she processes the Done Chain field for the
mailbox associated with the current port because she cannot locate a Done
Chain field for the invalid mailbox. (The mailbox associated with the port is
usually 990, the Company Greeting mailbox.)
180
Installing [email protected]
For a literal or system variable, there is no such thing as failure. The token
always succeeds. Some tokens define almost any behavior as successful. For
example, you can have Amanda spell an empty string. Amanda doesn’t say
anything, but no failure occurs either.
Tracing Token Execution
Amanda’s trace files can let you know where and how a token program is
failing. This is an invaluable debugging tool.
Amanda creates trace files as she runs, because the following trace command
should be in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
amanda /t5 /s1300
Like the default trace command, this command creates
C:\AMANDA\TRACE.OUT file and limits its size to the last 1.3MB of data.
(A file this size will fit on a 3 1/2-inch floppy disk.) What is different about
this command is that it writes to the trace file every 10 lines. In this way, if
Amanda crashes while running your token program, no more than ten lines
of trace information can be lost. You can use /t with a number less than 10 if
you need to, but it will slow down the system.
You can also display trace information on-screen.
To display trace information for a standalone system:
1.
Press Ctrl+Home.
2.
Press Alt+T.
Pressing any key stops the display. On-screen traces are stored by default in
C:\AMANDA\SCREEN.OUT. To change the name of this file, use the Setup
utility to change the setting for the configuration option screen_save.
To display trace information on Amanda Voice Server:
•
Press T.
Chapter 15: Programming Amanda
181
Press O to stop the display. On-screen traces for Amanda Voice Server are
not stored in a file. You can create trace files using Amanda Monitor. For
details, see Administering [email protected] You can use Amanda
Monitor to display on-screen traces as well.
Kinds of Tokens
Tokens fall into the following categories:
•
•
•
Literals
Variables
Commands
Literals
A literal is an exact value such as the whole numbers 4 or 1144. Notice that
you do not use commas within numbers. You use 1144—not 1,144.
The DTMF digits and most single-character tokens are literals. For example,
the comma (,) that causes a pause is a literal.
Another type of literal is the string. In the Token Programming Language (as
in most programming languages), a string is a sequences of characters. For
example, JAMES DOLE is a 10-character string that starts with the letter J
and ends with the letter E. To clearly show where a string begins and ends,
programming languages require delimiters (characters that enclose the
string, but are not part of it. In the Token Programming Language, you use
single or double quotation marks as string delimiters. So JAMES DOLE
becomes 'JAMES DOLE' or "JAMES DOLE".
"9," is a string that Amanda might dial for an outside line. It consists of the
DTMF digit 9 followed by the comma for a pause.
A string that has no characters is called the empty string. It often occurs in
programming and is written as '' or "".
If you use one kind of quotation mark within a string, you should use the
other kind as the string’s delimiters: "Amanda's" or 'Do not use " (the double
quotation character)'.
182
Installing [email protected]
Variables
Each variable is the name of a storage location within the computer that can
store a string or a -hole number. After you store something in a variable, you
can use that variable’s name instead of typing the string or the number. This
is useful because:
•
•
•
Amanda’s variables have simple names (no more than four characters) and save you typing time. (You are less likely to make a mistake
typing a short variable name than a long string.)
You can change the contents of the storage location and still use the
same variable.
Amanda can perform the same set of tokens over and over again with
different values because the tokens use the variables rather than the
values. For example, if you change the telephone number stored as a
variable, Amanda dials the new number without you having to
change any tokens.
The Token Programming Language has system, port, and global variables.
Each of them starts with a percent sign (%).
System variables are controlled by Amanda. For example, %D contains the
amount of available disk space, and %C contains the number of the port
currently in use.
Port variables are controlled by you. Their names range from %S0 to %S19.
Port variables provide 20 locations in which to store information on a perport basis. The %S0 accessed by Amanda while using one port is not the
same location as the %S0 accessed by Amanda while using another port.
Global variables are also controlled by you. Their names range from %G0 to
%G9. These 10 locations are used by all the ports. The %G2 accessed by
Amanda while using one port is exactly the same location as the %G2
accessed by Amanda while using another port.
Chapter 15: Programming Amanda
183
Assignment
You control port and global variables. For example, you can assign numbers
or strings to them and later change those numbers or strings. For example,
you might assign the value of 65 to %G4 and the value "Amanda" to %S9.
Assigning a value to a variable copies that value to the variable’s storage
location.
Initially, each port and global variable has the empty string as its value.
Assignment is done in the Token Programming Language using the
assignment command, which starts with the equal sign (=). When the
variable contains a number, you can add to that number or subtract from it
using the command that starts with a plus sign (+).
For example, =(%S1,24) puts the number 24 in the variable named %S1.
+(%S1,15) adds 15 to the 24 in %S1 and then stores the sum 39 in %S1.
+(%S1,-10) subtracts 10 from the 39 in %S1 and then stores the difference
29 in %S1.
Commands
Commands are more complex than literals and variables. Commands
perform actions. For example, a command may tell Amanda to play a
particular message or go to another mailbox.
Each command has a name followed by a series of parts called parameters.
Some parameters contain information that Amanda needs to perform the
command. Others contain information that Amanda obtains for you as she
performs the command. Each parameter is a literal, variable, or another
command.
The parameters are delimited (surrounded) by parentheses and separated by
commas. For example, P(M8) tells Amanda to play message number 8. The
command name is P, and its only parameter is M8, which is surrounded by
parentheses.
184
Installing [email protected]
The command P(0745,T) tells Amanda to say the number 0745 as a time. It
also has the command name P, but it has two parameters: the number 0745
and the literal T.
Chapter 15: Programming Amanda
185
When a command is referred to by name in this guide, the parentheses
appear after the command’s name. For example, the command named P is
referred to as the P() command, which is read as “the P command.”
Parameters
Parameters can be required or optional. The syntax places brackets […]
around optional parameters.
Parameters can also be for input or for output. Input parameters provide the
information that Amanda needs in order to perform the action that you
requested. For example, Amanda might need the name of the file in which to
store a fax or the telephone number for a pager. You supply the input
parameters and make sure that the information in them is correct. Input
parameters can be literals, variables, or other commands.
Output parameters are parameters that store information you asked Amanda
for. Output parameters are always variables because Amanda must store the
information you requested in a storage location. Usually one command asks
for the information, Amanda stores the information in a variable, and
another command uses that variable. For example, you might use the V()
command to retrieve a telephone number from a file. If the output parameter
for the telephone number is %S5, Amanda stores the telephone number in
the variable %S5. Then you use %S5 in a T() command to send a fax using
that telephone number.
The syntax in the guide does not indicate which parameters are input and
which are output. This is clear from the descriptions of the command and
parameters.
When a string is used as a parameter, you don’t always need the quotation
marks, because the commas and parentheses serve as delimiters. You must
use the quotation marks when a variable is part (but not all) of the string. For
example, if %S0 is MARY and %S5 is HU, the string "MARY HU" can be
used as a parameter with or without quotation marks, but the strings "%S0
HU", "%S0 %S5", and "%S0 %S5" must have quotation marks. Most
programming languages do not allow you to put variables within strings. The
Token Programming Language allows this, but it only checks for variables
186
Installing [email protected]
within a string if you delimit that string with quotation marks. You cannot
use a number from 0 to 9 after %S1 in a string because Amanda assumes that
you meant the variable %S10 or %S11, etc.
Most system variables do not have parameters. However, a couple of system
variables have parameters that affect the contents of that system variable. For
example, to use %I, the system variable that retrieves data from specific
fields of specific messages, you use parameters to indicate which field,
message number, and mailbox you want the data from.
Syntax
The exact sequence of characters for each token is defined by its syntax, so
you have to learn to read syntax. The following table shows the conventions
used in this guide. They are similar to the syntax conventions used for other
programming languages.
Syntax Convention
Meaning
bold
Bold is used for characters that must be
used by you exactly as they appear—if
you use them at all.
italics
Italics are used for characters that you
must replace with real strings, numbers,
variables, or other commands.
[ ]
The syntax inside the brackets is optional.
If you don’t use this syntax, its default is
used.
{ }
The syntax inside braces can be repeated.
For example, the following is the syntax for %I:
Syntax:
%I(field,msg_no[,mailbox])
Chapter 15: Programming Amanda
187
%I() has three parameters: field, msg_no and mailbox.
Because the %I and parentheses are bold, you know that you have to include
them in the command. The commas are bold, but the one in front of mailbox
is inside brackets […], which surround optional parts of the syntax. If you
use the bracketed part of the syntax, you must use the comma.
188
Installing [email protected]
Because field is italicized, you know that it is a place holder for information
that you must provide. Field can be any one of the following fields
associated with messages:
D
for the Date field
T
for the Time field
F
for the From field
Because msg_no is also italicized, you know that it is a place holder for
information that you must provide. For example, to find out the date for
message number 8, you replace msg_no with the number 8. Because mailbox
is inside brackets, you replace it only if you use that part of the syntax. For
example, you may want to delete a message belonging to mailbox 151.
Whenever a parameter is optional, such as mailbox, it has a default. A default
is the value that is used for the parameter whenever the parameter is missing.
The default for mailbox is the current mailbox.
Using the syntax, you can create any number of %I() commands. For
example, %I(D,8) provides the date for message 8 for the current mailbox,
and %I(T,6,151) provides the time for message 6 for mailbox 151.
Both the Extension and Notify Method fields can contain up to 65 characters.
If you need more than 65 characters for your program, you use:
•
•
A command that reads additional tokens from a file
The G() command to tell Amanda to go to the Extension field for another mailbox and process the tokens she finds there
Chapter 15: Programming Amanda
189
Files and Directories
This section points out what you need to know about files and file names
when using the Token Programming Language. It assumes that you already
know the following and other facts about files and directories:
•
•
DOS files are stored in directories.
The complete name for a file starts with the root directory (usually
C:), lists the subdirectories leading to the file, and ends with the
name of the file, each of which is separated by a backslash (\).
When you use a DOS file name as a parameter, you must replace each
backslash (\) found in the name with either two backslashes (\\) or one
forward slash (/). For example, C:\AMANDA\FOOBAR.TXT must become
either C:\\AMANDA\\FOOBAR.TXT or C:/AMANDA/FOOBAR.TXT.
You can use variable names as parts of the file name. For example, if %S1 is
C:, and %S2 is Amanda, you can use "%S1\\%S2\\FOOBAR.TXT".
Amanda can read text files (also called ASCII files) as well as files in dBase
format. The former have file names that usually end with .TXT, and the latter
have file names that end with .DBF. Amanda can read from, write to, and
search files that contain database records. A record is a way to group pieces
of information. For example, your name and address is a record in a database
for any company that sends you supplies. The individual parts of your name
and address are fields of that record. In a database, another name for a record
is a row, and another name for a field is a column.
Sample Address Record:
First Name: MARY
Last Name: HU
Street Address: 28291 HOOVER ST.
City: WINTER FALLS
Zip: 48444
State: MI
190
Installing [email protected]
Text files that contain database records should have commas separating each
field of each record and a carriage return/linefeed separating one record from
another. (A carriage return/linefeed is the pair of ASCII characters placed in
a file when you press Enter on your keyboard.)
Sample Address Record as a line in a text file:
MARY,HU,28291 HOOVER ST.,WINTER FALLS,MI,48444
When Amanda reads records from a text file, you tell her the number of the
fields you want to read or change the data in. The fields are numbered
starting with 1. In our example, First Name is 1, and Last Name is 2.
dBase files are created using dBase, a database software product. For dBase
files, you tell Amanda the name of the field instead of its number. When
Amanda reads data from a dBase file, she deletes any spaces at the end of the
data as she stores the data into a variable. For example, if the field contains
"MARY
", Amanda reads only "MARY".
Flow of Control: Branching and Looping
When programming Amanda, you often type the tokens for a program in
more than one field. This is not because you have exceeded the 65-character
limit for the Extension or Notify Method field, but because you want to
control the flow of token processing. For example, the only way to have
Amanda perform different actions based on the value of a variable, is to put
the tokens for one set of actions in another Extension field.
The commands that control the flow of tokens are:
•
The I() command which compares two values. (Notice that this is not
the same as the %I() command/system variable discussed earlier in
this chapter.) This command is similar to the If command or If statement in other programming languages. It is used to branch in either
of two directions, depending on whether the comparison is true or
false. If the comparison is true, Amanda goes to another mailbox’s
Extension field and processes the tokens there. If the comparison is
false (for example, %S1 is not equal to the empty string), Amanda
continues processing tokens where she is.
Chapter 15: Programming Amanda
191
For example, I(%S1,=,'',101) can be read as “If the variable %S1 equals
the empty string, go to mailbox 101. If not, go to the next token in this
mailbox.” I(%G0,>,5,2000) can be read as “If the variable %G0 is
greater than 5, go to mailbox 2000. If not, go to the next token in this
mailbox.”
•
The G() command which tells Amanda to go to another mailbox’s
Extension field right now. (Notice that this is not the same as the
%G0 through %G9 global variables.) There is no comparison
made—just an immediate branch to a new mailbox.
For example, G(2000) can be read as “Go immediately to mailbox
2000.”
A loop is the name given to a set of tokens that are repeated. For example, if
the last token in the Extension field for mailbox 151 is G(151), Amanda
returns to the beginning of the Extension field for mailbox 151. This forms a
loop. It forms an infinite loop unless Amanda can branch to another
mailbox’s Extension field before performing the G() command. Sometimes
you want an infinite loop, but usually an I() command appears within the
loop (somewhere between the beginning of the loop and the G() command)
and allows Amanda a way out of the loop.
For example, if you want Amanda to process the tokens for 151 exactly three
times, you use a variable as a counter. You add 1 to the variable every time
through the loop and branch when the I() command determines that the
variable is equal to 3.
If you want Amanda to process the tokens for 151 until a certain value is
entered by the caller, you store the caller’s input in a variable and use the I()
command to branch when the variable finally contains the value you are
waiting for.
The examples in this section shows a loop in which Amanda repeats the
tokens in one Extension field over and over—until stopped. You can make
more complicated loops. For example, you can use the G() command to go
from mailbox 151 to mailbox 152 to mailbox 153, before returning to
mailbox 151. This is still a loop because eventually Amanda returns to
mailbox 151. It is just a longer, more complicated loop than the earlier
examples.
192
Installing [email protected]
T1 Lines
If you are using a T1 line, the only tokens you can use are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Any DTMF digit (0–9, A, B, C, D, # , *)
Any system, port, or global variable (any token that starts with %)
E
F
P
W
Examples
This section provides practical examples using some of the available tokens.
Customizing the Employee Directory
The default operation of the employee directory minimizes the work you
have to do as a system administrator. All you have to do is put values in the
Dir Name 1 and Dir Name 2 fields for each employee’s mailbox. A little
extra work on your part can make it easier for the caller to use the employee
directory.
Application
This example explains how to streamline the functionality of the employee
directory (by default, mailbox 411) so that the caller does not have to dial the
extension.
The default use of the employee directory:
1.
A caller enters 411 for the employee directory.
2.
The caller enters three digits representing the first three letters in either
the first or last name of the person he wants to call.
Chapter 15: Programming Amanda
193
3.
Amanda reads the extension for each person whose name matches the
digits.
4.
The caller dials the correct extension.
The customized use of the employee directory:
1.
A caller enters 411 for the employee directory.
2.
The caller enters three digits representing the first three letters in either
the first or last name of the person he wants to call.
3.
If more than one employee matches the digits, Amanda asks the caller to
choose.
For example, Amanda might say “For Steve Smith, press 1; for Stella
Clark, press 2.”
4.
Amanda dials the extension.
Translating to Amanda’s Tokens
This example shows the use of the G() command, which stops Amanda from
processing the current mailbox and goes directly to the specified mailbox. It
also illustrates the M() command that causes Amanda to play a greeting and
wait for a single-digit number from the menu as a response.
To customize the employee directory:
1.
Make a list of everyone’s first and last names (as they will appear in the
Dir Name 1 and Dir Name 2 fields in their mailboxes).
Example:
Steve
Forest
mailbox 105
JoAnn
Johnson
mailbox 106
Bob
Knapp
mailbox 107
194
Installing [email protected]
2.
Determine what three digits would match each name:
Example:
3.
Steve
783
Forest
367
mailbox 105
JoAnn
562
Johnson
564
mailbox 106
Bob
262
Knapp
562
mailbox 107
Create mailboxes for each of the sets of three-digits.
Example:
Create mailboxes 783, 367, 562, 564, and 262.
4.
For each of these mailboxes, make sure that:
Do Not Disturb is locked OFF. (Do Not Disturb: OFF Lock: ON)
Call screening is locked OFF. (Screen Calls? OFF Lock: ON)
5.
Fill in the Extension fields for mailboxes that only match one of the
employees with @G(employee_mailbox)
Example:
Because 783 and 367 match Steve Forest, the Extension fields for mailbox 783 and mailbox 367 should be:
@G(105)
Because 564 matches JoAnn Johnson, the Extension field for mailbox
564 should be:
@G(106)
Because 262 matches Bob Knapp, the Extension field for mailbox 262
should be:
@G(107)
or
@P(G1)P(N,107)G(107)
Chapter 15: Programming Amanda
6.
195
For mailboxes that match more than one of the employees:
a.
b.
c.
Record G1 (Greeting 1) as “For first matching name, press 1;
for second matching name, press 2; …” substituting the real
names of employees for the italicized words.
In the Menus fields, put the mailbox for the first matching name
in 1; the mailbox for the second in 2, and so forth.
In the Extension field, puts:
@M(G1,1,30)
This command causes Amanda to play Greeting 1 and waits for the
caller to enter a digit indicating a choice from the menu. If the caller
does not enter a digit within 30 seconds, Greeting 1 repeats.
Example:
Because 562 matches both JoAnn Johnson and Bob Knapp, the Menus
for mailbox 562 would be:
1
106
2
107
The greeting would be:
“For JoAnn Johnson, press 1; for Bob Knapp, press 2.”
TIPS:
To make this better yet, use:
@P(G1)P(N,employee_mailbox)G(employee_m
ailbox)
instead of:
@G(employee_mailbox)
Record a Greeting 1 for each of the new mailboxes that
says “You are being transferred to” after which Amanda
plays the Name and Extension recording for the employee’s mailbox. For mailbox 564 in the example, this would
look like:
@P(G1)P(N,106)G(106)
The P() command plays greetings and so forth. In this case,
the first P() command plays Greeting 1; the second plays
the Name and Extension recording.
If the matching digits conflict with existing mailboxes (for
example, 564 matches JoAnn Johnson, but it is already the
mailbox for another employee), use 99564 or some other
variation that does not conflict with employee mailboxes.
196
Installing [email protected]
When more than one employee matches the digits that the
caller enters, you can add 9 to the menu (with mailbox 411)
and append the greeting to end with: “…press 9 to return to
the employee directory.” Then, if the caller doesn’t want
any of the people mentioned in the greeting, he can try another name.
Token Reference
This section contains two tables, each of which lists all of the tokens in the
Token Programming Language:
•
•
A quick token reference table, which lists each token by its function or purpose. The functions are in alphabetical order so that you
can easily find all the tokens that perform similar functions. For example, the J() and T() commands both deal with faxes so they are
grouped under Fax. This table provides only the syntax for each token. For a full description of the token, you must look in the alphabetical reference.
An alphabetical token reference table, which lists the tokens in alphabetical order based on the first letter in the token’s name. For example, %I and I are found under I. Tokens whose names do not
contain a letter are listed in ASCII order before the letters. This table
provides complete descriptions and examples of each token.
Quick Token Reference
Function/Purpose of Token
Syntax
absolute value
P[repetition](number,N[,hangup])
Add
+(variable[,value])
ANI (Automatic Number
Identification)
%H
Append, file
|(file)
Assignment
=(variable,value[,start,end])
Boards, serial numbers
%B1
%B4
%B2
%B5
%B3
%B6
Chapter 15: Programming Amanda
197
Quick Token Reference (Continued)
Function/Purpose of Token
Syntax
Caller hang-up
H(mailbox)
Caller ID
%H
Comment
%F(field[,mailbox])
Condition
I(value,operator,value,mailbox)
Conference call
ext_noKM
Creating message notification file
X[(file)]
Currency
P[repetition](amount,currency[,hangup])
Current connect time
%T
Current date in American format
%Y
Current port number
%C
Current time
%Z
Current mailbox
P[repetition] (U[,mailbox[,hangup]])
%U
Current mailbox’s Extension field
%E
Date
%I(field,msg_no[,mailbox])
P[repetition](date,D[,hangup])
%Y
Days of week
%W
Deleting file
Y[(file)]
Deleting, message
KD(msg_no[,mailbox[,1]])
Dial (pulse dial)
~
Dial codes
F
198
Installing [email protected]
Quick Token Reference (Continued)
Function/Purpose of Token
Syntax
dial tone
%X
dial tone, wait for
W(n,T[,mailbox])
Directory Name field
%F(field[,mailbox])
Disk space
%D
P[repetition](D)
Dollars
P[repetition](amount,currency[,hangup])
DTMF digits
P[repetition](DTMF)
P[repetition](R)
0
4
8
C
DTMF for relay paging
1
5
9
D
2
6
A
*
3
7
B
#
P[repetition] (R)
%R
DTMF, save caller’s entry
R(greeting[#mailbox],variable
[,timeout[,timeout2]])
Earth recall
E
Exit for caller hang up
H(mailbox)
Exit for mailbox
[ext_no]H
Extension field
ext_no
@
%E
*Extensions, partially supervised transfer
U-ext_no
Chapter 15: Programming Amanda
199
Quick Token Reference (Continued)
Function/Purpose of Token
Fax, incremental
Syntax
<(phone_no)
>(file)
Fax, initialization
%A
Fax, receive
J(file_or_box,phone_no[,tokens])
Fax, send
T(file,phone_no[,tokens])
Fields, process extension or Notify field as
tokens
@
Fields, returns number of characters in a
string
LEN[string]
Fields, values in mailbox record
%F(field [,mailbox])
Fields, Variable field in notification
record
%V
Fields, Extension
%E
Fields, information
%I(field,msg_no[,mailbox])
Files, append
|(file)
Files, as indicators
X[(file)]
Y[(file)]
Z[(file)]
Files, delete record
KV(file,field,value)
Files, from recordings
KR(file_or_box[,recording_info])
Files, import
{file}
200
Installing [email protected]
Quick Token Reference (Continued)
Function/Purpose of Token
Files, read
Syntax
{file}
V(file,field,value{,field,variable}[,n]
[(file)
N(file,field,value{,field,variable})
Files, search
?(line,file,mailbox)
Files, voice
P[repetition](X,file[,hangup])
Files, write
](file)
N(file,field,value{,field,variable})
Francs
P[repetition](amount,currency[,hangup])
Free disk space
P[repetition] (D)
%D
Frequency
KB(frequency,msecs)
From
%I(field,msg_no[,mailbox])
Goto
G(mailbox)
Greeting
P[repetition](greeting[,mailbox[,hangup]])
Hang-up
[ext_no]H
O(time)
Hang-up, cleanup
H(mailbox)
Hang-up, partially supervised
U-ext_no
Hookflash
E
F
O(time)
Chapter 15: Programming Amanda
201
Quick Token Reference (Continued)
Function/Purpose of Token
Syntax
If
I(value,operator,value,mailbox)
Import, file
{file}
Information mailboxes
M(greeting[#mailbox],repetition,delay)
IVR
%I(field,msg_no [,mailbox])
Languages, change
L(file)
Length
LEN[string]
Letters and spaces
P[repetition](A,string[,hangup])
LIGHT.ON
X[(file)]
See also message waiting indicators.
Y[(file)]
Z[(file)]
Menu
M(greeting[#mailbox],repetition,delay)
Messages
%I(field,msg_no[,mailbox])
Messages, by number
P[repetition](Mn[,mailbox[,hangup]])
Messages, delete
KD(msg_no[,mailbox[,1]])
Messages, from recordings
KR(file_or_box[,recording_info])
Messages, number
%M[(mailbox)]
Messages, number of new
%N
Messages, record and send to mailing
list
KJ(mailbox,list_number[,sender])
Messages, total
P[repetition](M[,mailbox[,hangup]])
Message count, total for mailbox
%M[(mailbox)]
P[repetition] (M[,mailbox[,hangup]])
202
Installing [email protected]
Quick Token Reference (Continued)
Function/Purpose of Token
Syntax
Message count, new for current user
%N
Message waiting indicator, creating
X[(file)]
Message waiting indicator, deleting
Y[(file)]
Message waiting indicator, testing for
Z[(file)]
Message waiting indicators, on/off
KA(on_off)
Money
P[repetition](amount,currency[,hangup])
Name and extension
P[repetition](U[,mailbox[,hangup]])
P[repetition](N[,mailbox[,hangup]])
Notification record, Method field
@
Notification record, Variable field
P[repetition] (V)
%V
Notify, relay paging
P[repetition] (R)
%R
Number
P[repetition] (number,N[,hangup])
P[repetition] (V)
On-hook
O(time)
Pager
P[repetition] (R)
%R
%V
Pager, wait for
W(n,P[,mailbox[,hangup]])
Partial supervised transfer
U-ext_no
Chapter 15: Programming Amanda
203
Quick Token Reference (Continued)
Function/Purpose of Token
Pauses
Syntax
,
W(n)
Pesos
P[repetition](amount,P[,hangup])
Playing, absolute value
P[repetition](number,N[,hangup])
Playing, currency
P[repetition](amount,currency[,hangup])
Playing, date
P[repetition](date,D[,hangup])
Playing, disk space
P[repetition](D)
Playing, DTMF digits
P[repetition](R)
P[repetition](DTMF)
Playing, greeting
P[repetition](greeting[,mailbox[,hangup]])
Playing, menu
M(greeting[#mailbox],repetition,delay)
Playing, messages
P[repetition](Mn[,mailbox[,hangup]])
Playing, money
P[repetition](amount,currency[,hangup])
Playing, name and extension
P[repetition](N[,mailbox[,hangup]])
P[repetition](U[,mailbox[,hangup]])
Playing, number
P[repetition](number,N[,hangup])
Playing, number of messages
P[repetition](M[,mailbox[,hangup]])
Playing, prompt
P[repetition](prompt_no,V[,hangup])
Playing, spelling
P[repetition](A,string[,hangup])
Playing, time
P[repetition](time,T[,hangup])
Playing, Variable field
P[repetition](V)
204
Installing [email protected]
Quick Token Reference (Continued)
Function/Purpose of Token
Syntax
Playing, voice file
P[repetition](X,file[,hangup])
Ports
S(port,[string,[variable],[termination],
[length],[timeout])
Ports, change volume
^(volume_change)
Port, current connect time
%T
Port number, current
%C
Port, transfer code for current
%X
Previous mailbox
%P
Prompt
P[repetition] (prompt_no,V[,hangup])
L(file)
Pulse dial
~
Questions and answers
Q({greeting[#mailbox][,E]})
Read, file
{file}
N(file,field,value{,field,variable})
V(file,field,value{,field,variable}[,n]
Recordings, stored as messages or files
KR(file_or_box[,recording_info])
Records, delete
KV(file,field,value)
Remote computers
S(port,[string,[variable],[termination],
[length],[timeout])
Rings, wait for number of
W(n,event [,mailbox])
Rotary training
KT(Gn)
Chapter 15: Programming Amanda
205
Quick Token Reference (Continued)
Function/Purpose of Token
Search, file
Syntax
?(line,file,mailbox)
N(file,field,value{,field,variable})
V(file,field,value{,field,variable}[,n]
KV(file,field,value)
Search, string
KI(target,source,variable)
Security code
KC(mailbox,variable)
KL(mailbox,security_code)
KP(mailbox,security_code)
Serial port access
S(port,[string,[variable],[termination],
[length],[timeout])
Set Name
%F(field[,mailbox])
Shutdown
KS[(errorlevel)]
Sound volume, change
^(volume_change)
Space
%D
P[repetition](D)
Spell
P[repetition](A,string[,hangup])
String, search
KI(target,source,variable)
Strings, length
LEN[string]
Subtract
+(variable[,value])
Testing for message notification file
Z[(file)]
Time
%I(field,msg_no[,mailbox])
P[repetition](time,T[,hangup])
206
Installing [email protected]
Quick Token Reference (Continued)
Function/Purpose of Token
Syntax
Time, connect time
%T
Time, current
%Z
Timed break recall
~
Tokens, processing
@
Tones
0
3
6
9
C
1
4
7
A
D
2
5
8
B
*
#
Total messages
P[repetition] (M[,mailbox[,hangup]])
Transfer code for current port
%X
Transfer, unsupervised (blind)
[ext_no]H
Transfer, supervised
ext_no
ext_noKM
Transferring to specified mailbox
G(mailbox)
Mailbox access
KC(mailbox,variable)
KL(mailbox,security_code)
KP(mailbox,security_code)
Mailbox, current
%U
Mailbox, Extension field of current
%E
Mailbox, new message count
%N
Mailbox, playing Name/Extension recording
P[repetition] (U[,mailbox[,hangup]])
Mailbox, previous
%P
Chapter 15: Programming Amanda
207
Quick Token Reference (Continued)
Function/Purpose of Token
Syntax
Mailbox, total message count
%M[(mailbox)]
Mailbox, value of field
%F(field [,mailbox])
Variable field
P[repetition](V)
%V
Variables
[(file)
](file)
|(file)
+(variable[,value])
=(variable,value[,start,end])
%G0
%G5
%G1
%G6
%G2
%G7
%G3
%G8
%S0
%S4
%S8
%S12
%S16
%S1
%S5
%S9
%S13
%S17
%S2
%S6
%S10
%S14
%S18
%S3
%S7
%S11
%S15
%S19
%G4
%G9
Variables, shift
K<(x[,value])
Voice boards, serial numbers
%B1
%B4
Voice form
Q({greeting[#mailbox][,E]})
Voice, wait for
W(n,V[,mailbox])
Volume change for port
^(volume_change)
Waiting, for a number of tenths of a second
W(n)
Waiting, for dial tone, pager, voice
W(n,event [,mailbox])
%B2
%B5
%B3
%B6
208
Installing [email protected]
Quick Token Reference (Continued)
Function/Purpose of Token
Syntax
Weekday
%W
Write, file
](file)
N(file,field,value{,field,variable})
Alphabetical Token Reference
Token Syntax
Description
-
Literal that pauses processing for .5 (one-half) second.
,
Literal that pauses for 2 seconds. Used when dialing an extension or to introduce a
pause before processing the next token.
NOTE:
?(line,file,
mailbox)
Be careful not to confuse this comma with the separator found in commands and records.
Command that searches the specified file (line by line) for the specified line. The
line must match an entire line within the file. If the line is found, processing continues at the specified mailbox. If the line is not found, processing continues with
the next token.
line
The string or variable to be matched as a line in the file. No line in
the file should exceed 143 characters.
file
A string or variable containing a valid DOS file name for the text file
to be searched. Use the complete path to the file unless the file is in
C:\AMANDA. There is no limit to the number of lines in the file.
mailbox A valid mailbox or a variable containing a mailbox.
Example:
?(%S9,C:\\AMANDA\\FOOBAR.TXT,247)
causes Amanda to search FOOBAR.TXT for a line that matches the characters in
%S9. If a line is found, Amanda continues processing at mailbox 247.
Failure: Invalid mailbox
Chapter 15: Programming Amanda
209
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
@
Description
Literal that causes Amanda to process the Extension or Notify Method field as a set
of tokens instead of processing the field normally.
Normal processing for the Extension field: Amanda plays “Please hold while I
try that extension,” puts the caller on transfer hold, then evaluates the tokens in the
field. The @ stops Amanda from performing the dial code that puts a caller on
transfer hold (also known as the dl_dtwait dial code). As explained in Installing
[email protected], you use the Setup utility (selection 1) to set or view the dial
codes. The codes are stored in C:\AMANDA\PBX.DB\1001.PBX, which you can
view or edit using the JOVE utility.
Normal processing of the Notify Method field: Amanda tries to access a port for
an outbound notification call. The @ stops Amanda from going off-hook.
210
Installing [email protected]
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
[(file)
Description
Command that reads the first line in the specified file as the first ten port variables
(%S0-%S9). The 10 values in the file must be comma delimited. The first value is
%S0, the second is %S1, etc. The quotation marks used to delimit strings do not
appear in the file, but the commas that separate them from the other variables do.
For example, empty strings take up no space in the file.
This command is usually used with the ]() command to keep track of what the port
is doing. You read the variables using the [() command, update them, and then write
them to the file once more using the ]() command.
Read with the [() command and write with the ]() command within the same field
to avoid potential simultaneous access errors caused by another port accessing the
file.
If the file does not exist, Amanda just goes on to the next token.
file
A string or variable containing a valid DOS file name for the text file
to be read. No line in the file should exceed 143 characters. There is
no limit to the number of lines. When you specify a file name, its full
path is required unless the file is stored in the directory for the current mailbox. For example, if you use [(file) with only a file name,
and the mailbox number is 101, your file must be located in the
C:\VMB.DB\1\101 directory or the file cannot be found.
Example:
[(C:\\AMANDA\\FOOBAR.TXT)
places the following line in FOOBAR.TXT
,,,10,,,,5,9,555
In this case %S0, %S1, %S2, %S4, %S5, and %S6 were empty strings.
To count the number of calls, etc. processed by a particular port (or all ports), read
the variables, add 1 to the contents of the one that stores the count, and write the
variables back to the file.
[(C:\\AMANDA\\FOOBAR.TXT)+(%S4)]
(C:\\AMANDA\\FOOBAR.TXT)
If you are counting all ports, use the same file for all ports. If you are counting per
port, use a different file for each port.
Failure: Does not fail
\\
Backslash, the actual "\" character. Can be used in strings.
Failure: Does not fail
\A
Attention, which is a bell sound (Ctrl+G). Can be used in strings.
Failure: Does not fail
Chapter 15: Programming Amanda
211
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
Description
\B
Ctrl+B. Added for Ericsson MD-110 serial integration. For the MD-110,
Ctrl+B is the Start of Transmission (STX) character. Can be used in
strings.
Example:
@S(3,"\B06%Emm\N")
which controls message waiting indicators.
Failure: Does not fail
\N
Newline (Ctrl+J). Can be used in strings.
Failure: Does not fail
\R
Return (Ctrl+M). Can be used in strings.
Failure: Does not fail
\T
TAB (Ctrl+I). Can be used in strings.
Failure: Does not fail
](file)
Command that writes the values of the first 10 port variables (%S0–%S9) to the
specified file. The values are comma-separated and terminated by a carriage return/
linefeed. Usually used in conjunction with the [() command which reads the %S
variables.
file
A string or variable containing a valid DOS file name for the text file
to be read. No line in the file should exceed 143 characters. There is
no limit to the number of lines. When you specify a file name, its full
path is required unless the file is stored in the directory for the current mailbox. For example, if you use ](file) with only a file name,
and the mailbox number is 101, your file must be located in the
C:\VMB.DB\1\101 directory or the file cannot be found.
Example:
See the [() command.
Failure: The file is read-only
Insufficient disk space to save file
212
Installing [email protected]
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
^(volume_change)
Description
Command that changes the volume of the current port.
volume_change
Amount to increase or decrease the current volume. Use a
positive number to increase the volume and a negative
number to decrease the volume. Use the minus sign for
negative numbers, but omit the plus sign for positive
numbers. Amanda gives you a volume as close as possible to what you ask for.
The volume on Rhetorex voice boards ranges from -8
(softest) to +8 (loudest). Initially, the volume is set to 0,
but that is not necessarily its current value. If the value is
+8 and you apply a change of -16, the volume’s value
goes to -8. If the value is 0 and you apply a change of -16,
the value of the volume goes to -8 and an error appears in
the trace file.
For tAA voice boards, the volume ranges from 1 (the softest) to 9 (the loudest). Initially, the volume is set to 5, but
that is not necessarily its current value. If the volume is 5,
and you apply a change of 4, the volume goes to 9. If you
apply a change of 6, the volume goes to 9 and Amanda
ignores the fact that you asked for more volume than was
available.
Example:
^(8)
raises the volume of the port to its loudest.
Failure: Does not fail
Chapter 15: Programming Amanda
213
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
{file}
Description
Command that reads Amanda tokens from an external file. This allows you to exceed the 65-character limit in the Extension and Notify Method fields. If the file
does not exist, Amanda just goes on to the next token.
file
A string or variable containing a valid DOS file name. Use the complete path to the file unless the file is in C:\AMANDA. The file must
be a text file containing valid Amanda tokens. No line in the file
should exceed 143 characters. There is no limit to the number of
lines in the file.
NOTE
Since the entire file is read and since white space is ignored, you can
make the file easier to read by putting one token per line. (White space is
tabs, spaces, and carriage return/linefeeds.)
Example:
{C:\\AMANDA\\RELAY.TXT}
causes Amanda to process the tokens in RELAY.TXT.
Failure: Does not fail
The failure of any token within the file causes the rest of the file to be ignored.
Then Amanda executes the token after the {} token or the RNA chain if there
is no token after the {} token.
|(file)
Command that appends the first ten %S port variables (%S0–%S9) to the specified
file. If the file does not exist, Amanda creates it. The values are comma-separated
and terminated by a carriage return/linefeed.
file
A string or variable containing a valid DOS file name for a text file.
Use the complete path to the file unless the file is in C:\AMANDA.
Example:
|(C:\\AMANDA\\PORTVARS.TXT)
causes Amanda to add a line to PORTVARS.TXT. You can use this to add a line
to PORTVARS.TXT every time the port you are tracing changes the value of a
variable. Later you can review the file.
Failure: The file is read-only
Insufficient disk space to save file
~
Literal that pulse dials the digit 1 to effect a timed break recall.
214
Installing [email protected]
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
Description
+(variable
[,value])
Command that allows you to add a number to or subtract a number from the value
stored in a variable. Usually used to set limits and control programming loops.
variable One of port or global variables.
value
Optional. A number or variable. The default is 1.
Example:
+(%S7,-1)
subtracts 1 from the value stored in %S7.
+(%G6)
adds 1 to the value stored in %G6.
Failure: Does not fail
<(phone_no)
Command that allows a caller to request and transmit multiple fax documents with
one call. It must be used in conjunction with the >() command. To fax multiple documents, you initiate the process with this command and, as the caller requests faxes, you add the file for the requested document using the >() command. The fax is
sent automatically after the caller hangs up.
phone_no
String, number, or variable containing the DTMF digits to be dialed.
This command is used only in Extension fields.
Example:
<(9,7144525570)>(C:\\AMANDA\\PRICES.TXT)>
(C:\\AMANDA\\OPTIONS.TXT)>(C:\\AMANDA\\OPTIONS.TXT)
causes Amanda to call (714)452–5570 (after dialing 9 for an outside line and pausing). Then Amanda faxes two files. Duplicate files are ignored.
Failure: Does not fail
Chapter 15: Programming Amanda
215
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
=(variable,value
[,start,end])
Description
Command that gives the specified variable the specified value. Use start and end
to assign only part of the string (a substring) to the variable.
variable One of the port or global variables.
value
A string, number, or variable.
start
Optional. The starting character position to copy from value. The
default is to copy the entire string.
end
Optional, but must be used if start is used. The last character position to copy from value.
Examples:
=(%S1,"FRENCH")
Gives %S1 the value of "FRENCH"
=(%S1,"FRENCH",3,4)
Gives %S1 the value of "EN".
If %S2 is the telephone number 7530414,
=(%S1,%S2,1,3)
extracts the prefix 753 from %S2 and assigns it to %S1
If %S3 is 1 and S4 is 1,
=(%S1,"MARY",%S3,%S4)
%S1 is assigned "M".
>(file)
Before using this command, you start incremental faxing with the <() command.
Even if the same file is used with the >() command more than once (per incremental
fax), it is faxed only once.
file
A string or variable containing a valid DOS file name for the text file
to be transmitted. Use the complete path to the file unless the file is
in C:\AMANDA.
This command is used only in Extension fields.
Example:
See the <() command.
Failure: Does not fail
0
2
4
6
8
A
C
*
1
3
5
7
9
B
D
#
Literal that plays the DTMF tone corresponding to the specified digit: 0–9, A–D,
*, or #
216
Installing [email protected]
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
Description
System variable containing the value of the fax_dl_init configuration setting.
%A
Example:
If %A is "9,", a 9 followed by a pause is needed to access an outside telephone line.
%B1
%B3
%B5
%B2
%B4
%B6
System variable that contains the serial number of the corresponding voice board.
%B1 is voice board 1, %B2 is voice board 2, etc.
%C
System variable that contains the port number. Each port has its own %C. For example, if the current caller is on Port 3, %C contains a 3.
%D
System variable that contains the percentage of free disk space. Example:
I(%D,<,20,171)
causes Amanda to transfer to mailbox 171. In this case, 171 would have Do Not
Disturb ON and Store Messages NO. The caller would hear a greeting that plays a
warning about disk space being low. The Done Chain field would have something
like mailbox 999, the greeting for which is “Thank you for calling. Good-bye.”
%E
System variable that contains the contents of the current mailbox’s Extension field.
Each port has its own %E. An Extension field can contain up to 65 characters.
Example:
P(A,%E)
causes Amanda to say the characters in the Extension field.
See the P() command for more information.
E
Literal that performs an earth recall. This is used in place of the hookflash on some
telephone switching systems.
ext_no
Series of DTMF digits that indicate an extension number. When these are the first
characters in an Extension field (that is, the Extension field does not start with @),
Amanda performs a supervised transfer as shown in Administering [email protected]
Example:
378
causes Amanda to call extension 378 and supervise the call.
Failure: Invalid extension number
Chapter 15: Programming Amanda
217
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
Description
%F(field
[,mailbox])
System variable that contains the value of the specified field for the specified mailbox. Each port has its own %F.
field
One of the following numbers or a variable containing that number:
1
for the Directory Name 1 field
2
for the Directory Name 2 field
3
for the Comment field (if your system uses Rhetorex voice
boards) or for the Set Name field (if your system is connected
to a Norstar KSU)
mailbox Optional. Any valid mailbox or a variable containing a mailbox. The
default is the current mailbox.
Example:
%F(3,126)
assigns the string from the Comment or Set Name field for mailbox 126 to %F.
Failure: Invalid mailbox
F
Literal that performs a hookflash. The duration of the hookflash is specified in the
telephone switching system dial codes section of the Setup utility. See also recall.
Failure: Does not fail
%G0
%G2
%G4
%G6
%G8
%G1
%G3
%G5
%G7
%G9
The Amanda system has 10 global variables (%G0–%G9). Initially, each variable
is equal to the empty string. The values of %G0–%G9 are the same no matter what
port is current.
If Port 1 changes %G1, then all other ports immediately see the new value for %G1.
Each variable can contain a string of up to 143 characters.
When the system is shut down, the values of %G0–%G9 are lost. They cannot be
stored using the [(), ](), or |() commands.
See also %S0–%S9.
Example:
+(%G0)
adds one to the current value of %G0.
=(%G2,555)
assigns the mailbox 555 to %G2.
G(%G2)
causes Amanda to go to the Extension field for mailbox 555.
Failure: Invalid variable name (such as %G52)
218
Installing [email protected]
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
G(mailbox)
Description
Command that controls processing. Amanda continues standard processing at the
specified mailbox’s Extension field (as shown in Administering [email protected]).
mailbox A valid mailbox or a variable containing a mailbox.
NOTE:
If you use the G() command in a Notify Method field, remember that the
telephone port is still in Notify mode and cannot transfer a call. Therefore, the Extension field that you go to should start with an @.
Example:
G(176)
causes Amanda to go to the Extension field for mailbox 176.
Failure: Invalid mailbox
%H
System variable that contains the empty string unless your 1001.PBX file (in the
C:\PBX.DB directory) is set up for ANI or (in the future) Caller ID digits. Each port
has its own %H.
Example:
If 1001.PBX contains:
integration 10 'Cxxxxxxxccccccc'
and the packet 'C00000007530414' arrives, %H contains the number 7530414 as
long as the port that received the call is active.
[ext_no]H
Command that performs a hang-up. With an extension number, it performs an unsupervised transfer before hanging up. This H() command ends the processing of
tokens for the current Extension or Notify Method field.
If you use an unsupervised transfer in the mailbox’s Extension field, make sure that
Call Screening is locked off. If Call Screening is on for an supervised call, the caller
is screened but that recording is not played to the user.
ext_no Series of DTMF digits that indicate an extension number.
Example:
151H
causes Amanda to transfer the call to extension 151 and hang up (without waiting for a voice or busy signal) when Amanda is processing a call.
Failure: Invalid extension number
Chapter 15: Programming Amanda
219
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
H(mailbox)
Description
Command that performs exit routines when a caller hangs up. It specifies the mailbox to be processed if a hang-up condition is detected while processing the current
set of tokens. (Processing these tokens can take Amanda to more than one mailbox.)
mailbox A valid mailbox or a variable containing a mailbox.
This command is used only in Extension fields.
Example:
H(614)
causes Amanda to go to mailbox 614 when a caller hangs up. Because you are
tracking the number of hang ups, the Extension field for mailbox 614 has tokens
that add one to the variable with which you are counting the hang-ups, for example,
+(%G4).
Failure: Invalid mailbox
220
Installing [email protected]
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
%I(field,msg_no
[,mailbox])
Description
System variable that contains the data from the specified field of the specified message. Each port has its own %I. This lets you extract specific information from a
message. For example, you might use %I in a notification record.
field
One of the following:
D for the Date field
T for the Time field
F for the From field
msg_no The number of an existing message. You cannot use a variable containing that number.
mailbox Optional. Any valid mailbox or a variable containing a mailbox. The
default is the current mailbox.
NOTE:
If a message is from an outside caller, the From field of that message is
equal to -1. If the message is from a caller who is logged on to Amanda,
the From field contains the caller’s mailbox.
Examples:
P(%I(D,5),D)
plays the date of message 5 in the current mailbox.
P(%I(T,5),T)
plays the time of message 5 in the current mailbox.
P(%I(D,5,212),D)
plays the date of message 5 of mailbox 212.
P(%I(F,5,212),U)
plays the Name/Extension recording of the mailbox who sent message 5 of mailbox
212.
See the P() command for more information.
Failure: Invalid mailbox
Invalid message number
Chapter 15: Programming Amanda
221
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
I(value,operator,
value,mailbox)
Description
Command that allows you to control processing based on a condition. If the specified values and operator create a condition that is true, Amanda continues processing at the specified mailbox. If the condition is false, the next token after this
command is executed.
value
Any string, number, or variable.
operator One of the following symbols:
>
greater than
<
less than
=
equal
!
not equal
mailbox Any valid mailbox or a variable containing a mailbox.
Examples:
I("111",<,"222",1000)
continue processing at mailbox 1000.
I("111",>,"222",1000)
continue processing at the next token.
I(%S1,=,"1234",2000)
continue at mailbox 2000 only if %S1 contains the value 1234.
I(%S1,=,"IVR",2000)
continue at mailbox 2000 only if %S1contains the value "IVR".
NOTE: When using the I() command in a Notify Method field, remember that the
telephone port is still in Notify mode and cannot transfer a call. Therefore,
the Extension field that you go to should start with an @.
Failure: Invalid mailbox
If there is a problem with a condition, it is considered false rather than a failure
222
Installing [email protected]
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
J(file_or_box,
phone_no
[,tokens])
Description
Command that allows a fax to be received as a file (for later transmission with the
T() command) or as a message for a mailbox.
Before using this command, make sure the configuration settings for the physical
serial port have been defined.
file_or_box A string or variable indicating where the fax is to be stored. It contains
either a mailbox indicating whose message it is or a valid DOS file
name for a text file. Use the complete path to the file unless the file is
in C:\AMANDA.
phone_no
The telephone number for the fax device that sends the transmission or
a variable containing that number.
Use the empty string to make Amanda wait until a call rings into the
appropriate fax port. (When not in a variable, the empty string must
appear in this command as a pair of double quotation marks—even
though some commands allow you to omit them.)
tokens
Optional. A string or variable that defines the actions Amanda takes to
connect the call to the fax port.
This command is used only in Extension fields.
Example:
J(123,"","P(G1)%X%F-H")
sets up a personal fax mail mailbox. In this case, mailbox 123 receives a fax as a
message and P(G1) plays a greeting such as “Start your fax machine at the tone.”
The following tokens allow for one-call fax transmission:
%X
The system variable that contains the codes needed to get the transfer
dial tone on the current port
%F
The extension of the fax port being used
-H
A hang-up (after pausing a half second to complete an unsupervised
transfer)
J("C:\\FAXES\\FAX1","")
makes Amanda set up one of her fax modems to wait for a call and accept a fax
called C:\FAXES\FAX1. You can use this to fax files to your own Amanda system.
For example, if you print a text file that contains information for customers and
then fax it to Amanda, Amanda can fax that information out to customers using the
T() command.
Failure: Invalid mailbox
Fax modem not configured properly
Physical port not available
Logical port not configured properly
Chapter 15: Programming Amanda
223
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
K<(x[,value])
Description
Command that shifts the values of the %S variables to the left or right.
x
A number (ranging from 0 to 20). When the number is positive, the shift
is to the left. When negative, the shift is to the right.
value
Optional. The data to be placed in the %S variables left empty by the
shift. The default is to perform a circular shift, leaving no variables empty
because the value from %S0 moves to %S19, or vice versa, for every
shift.
Examples:
K<(1)
shifts the contents of %S0 through %S19 to the left by one location. The contents
of %S19 moves to %S18, the contents of %S18 moves to %S17, etc. The contents
of %S0 moves to %S19 because this is a circular shift. None of the previous values
are lost. They are only relocated.
K<(-3,"JOHN DOE")
shifts the contents of %S0 through %S19 to the right three locations, then replaces
each of the first three values (%S0, %S1, and %S2) with the string "JOHN DOE".
The last three values (%S17, %S18, and %S19) are lost.
K<(20,"")
is a quick way to clear all variables, replacing them with the empty string.
Failure: Does not fail
KA(on_off)
Command that dials the PBX parameter dl_light_on or dl_light_off specified in the
telephone system dial codes.
on_off
1 or 0 to indicate whether the message waiting indicator is turned on
or off.
When the value is1, the message waiting indicator is turned on as
Amanda dials the codes for “What to dial to set the message waiting
indicator on” (the dl_light_on parameter).
When the value is0, the message waiting indicator is turned off as
Amanda dials the codes for “What to dial to set the message waiting
indicator off” (the dl_light_off parameter).
Most of the popular telephone systems have specified values that turn the message
waiting indicator on and off. If these values are not pre-defined for your system,
you can set them using Amanda’s Setup utility.
Example:
KA(1)
causes Amanda to dial the string specified in the dial codes for "What to
dial to set the message waiting indictor on."
Failure: Does not fail
224
Installing [email protected]
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
KB(frequency,
msecs)
Description
Command that plays a certain frequency for a certain time period (defined in milliseconds).
frequency
A number of Hz. For example, the only frequencies supported by the
Rhetorex driver are those roughly within the range 300–3000 Hz.
msecs
A number of milliseconds. The range is 1–6553.
Example:
KB(350,2000)
plays the frequency 350 Hz for two seconds.
Failure: Does not fail
KC(mailbox,
variable)
Command that compares the security code for the specified mailbox with the contents of a variable. If there is a match, the command is successful. For callers who
do not know the security code, Amanda continues processing using the mailbox in
the Done Chain field.
mailbox
Any valid mailbox or a variable containing a mailbox.
variable
The port or global variable whose contents are matched against the security code of mailbox.
Example:
R(G1,%S1)KC(212,%S1)KL(%S1)
assigns the DTMF digits entered by the caller to %S1, compares %S1 with the security access code of mailbox 212, and takes the appropriate action.
After the caller passes the security check, the KL() command allows the caller to
log on to the mailbox. See also the KL() command.
Failure: Invalid mailbox
Invalid security code
Security codes do not match
Chapter 15: Programming Amanda
225
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
KD(msg_no
[,mailbox[,1]])
Description
Command that deletes a message from the specified or current mailbox.
Using this command cancels any pending Notify actions for the specified
message automatically.
msg_no A number or a variable containing a number.
mailbox Optional. Any valid mailbox or a variable containing a mailbox. The
default is the current mailbox.
1
Optional. This parameter controls what happens when the message to be
deleted does not exist. With this parameter, token processing continues
with the Done chain. Without this parameter, the user hears, "Sorry, I’m
unable to do that at this time."
Examples:
KD(5)
deletes message 5 of the current mailbox.
KD(10,212)
deletes message 10 of mailbox 212.
Failure: Invalid mailbox
Invalid message number
KI(target,source,
variable)
Command that searches one string (called the source string) to see if it contains a
copy of another string (called the target string).
target
A string or a variable containing the string to be searched for inside the
source.
source
A string or a variable containing the string to search.
variable The port or global variable to which the KI() command assigns one of the
following:
•
Zero if the target is not found in the source.
•
The number of the position within the source string at which the
copy of the target string starts.
Examples:
KI("UL","PAUL INCE",%S1)
is a successful search and assigns the value 3 to %S1
KI("ULL","PAUL INCE",%S1)
fails and assigns the value 0 to %S1
KI(%S0,%S1,%S2)
means if a copy of %S0 is found within %S1, %S2 is assigned its character position. If %S0 is not found, %S2 is assigned the value 0.
Failure: Does not fail
226
Installing [email protected]
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
KJ(mailbox,
list_number
[,sender])
Description
Allows a caller to record a message that, when saved, is sent to a list of
users.
mailbox
Any valid mailbox or a variable containing a mailbox.
list_number Any valid list number (1–8 or 10–30). If the mailbox number is 999,
then the list number is for a system list rather than a user list.
sender
Optional. Provides a sender for the message or treats the message as
though it were from outside the Amanda system.
When 0, the message is treated as a message from outside the Amanda
system. Amanda does not identify the sender. This is the default.
When 1, the Message From field contains the number of the mailbox
containing this token. Amanda plays the name and extension
recording for that mailbox’s owner when identifying the sender.
Example:
KJ(128,5)
causes Amanda to record a message and then send it to the users on
mailing list 5 for mailbox 128.
Failure: Invalid mailbox or list number or out of disk space
KL(mailbox,
security_code)
Command that logs the current caller on to the specified mailbox. The caller is at
the top level menu (the menu that says “Press 1 to play your messages....”).
mailbox
Any valid mailbox or a variable containing a mailbox.
security_code The security code for the specified mailbox.
Example:
R(G1,%S1)R(G2,%S2)P(G5)P(%S1,N)KL(%S1,%S2)
Greeting 1 says, “Please enter the mailbox you wish to log into.” After the caller
enters the mailbox, Amanda assigns it to %S1. Greeting 2 says, “Please enter the
mailbox’s security code.” After the caller enters the code, Amanda assigns it to
%S2. Next Amanda plays Greeting 5, “You are logging into mailbox”, followed by
the mailbox. KL(%S1,%S2) attempts to log the caller into the specified mailbox
using the specified security code.
Failure: Invalid mailbox
Invalid security code
Chapter 15: Programming Amanda
227
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
ext_noKM
Description
Command that tells Amanda to do a supervised transfer to the specified extension,
create a conference call for the caller and the user at the extension (using the
dl_conference configuration setting), and record the call until detecting a hang-up
or #. Amanda then makes the recording a message for the user.
ext_no
Series of DTMF digits that indicate an extension number.
Example:
128KM
causes Amanda to transfer the call (if she is processing a call) to extension 128,
starts a conference call, and records the conference call as a message for mailbox
128.
Failure: Invalid extension number
KP(mailbox,
security_code)
Command that sets the security code for the specified mailbox.
mailbox
Any valid mailbox or a variable containing a mailbox.
security_code String of DTMF digits that indicate the new security code for the
specified mailbox.
Example:
KP(128,”5404”)
causes Amanda to change the security code for mailbox 128 to 5404.
Failure: Invalid mailbox
mailbox is locked or read-only
Security code is an empty string, contains invalid characters, or exceeds limit set
by the configuration option security_min_length. You set this option using the Setup utility.
228
Installing [email protected]
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
Description
KR(file_or_box
[,recording_info])
Command that makes a recording and stores it as either a file or a message for the
specified mailbox.
file_or_box
A string or variable indicating where the recording is to be stored.
It contains either a mailbox indicating whose message it is or a valid DOS file name. Use the complete path to the file unless the file
is in C:\AMANDA.
recording_info A number from 0 to 3 indicating whether the caller hears a beep (to
start recording) and the post record menu. The default is 1.
0
No beep; no post record menu.
1
Beep; no post record menu.
2
Beep; post record menu.
3
No beep; post record menu.
Examples:
KR(212)
makes the recorded response a new message for mailbox 212.
KR("C:\\MSG.VOX")
stores the response in the MSG.VOX file in the root directory. In both cases, the
caller hears the beep for recording but no post record menu.
NOTE:
When using the KR() command, be sure to ask the caller to leave a
message. A suggested example is:
P(G1)KR(212)
Greeting 1 says, “Please leave a message at the tone. Finish by pressing # or hanging up.”
Failure: Invalid mailbox
Unable to create file
KS[(errorlevel)]
Command that starts a system shutdown immediately.
errorlevel
Optional. Specifies the exit code (a DOS errorlevel) at which the system exits. The default exit code (errorlevel) is zero.
This command is used only in Extension fields.
Example:
KS(3)
immediately shuts down the system, exiting with the errorlevel set to 3. The errorlevel can be used by another program or a DOS batch file to determine what action
should be taken next.
Failure: Does not fail
Chapter 15: Programming Amanda
229
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
KT(Gn)
Description
Command for rotary training. Amanda plays the specified greeting. The greeting
should tell the caller to press or dial 0 (zero). If the caller presses DTMF 0,
Amanda sets the port to detect only DTMF digits and proceeds. If the caller dials
rotary 0, Amanda learns it and sets the port to detect only rotary digits.
This feature requires Rhetorex's Vantage VPS voice board with Rotary on Board.
Gn
The greeting (n is replaced by 1-7) to indicate which greeting is to be
played.
Example:
KT(G3)
plays greeting 3 for rotary training.
Failure: Does not fail
KV(file,field,
value)
Command that finds and deletes the first record in the specified file that has the
specified value in the specified field.
file
A string or variable containing a valid DOS file name for the text or DBF
file. Use the complete path to the file unless the file is in C:\AMANDA.
No line in the file should exceed 143 characters. There is no limit to the
number of lines in the file.
field
A number, string, or variable that indicates the number or name of a field.
value
A string or variable that contains the data to be compared with the contents of the specified field.
Example:
KV("C:\\LISTS\\PHONE.LST",4,"STEVE BRUCE")
searches for the first record in the PHONE.LST file that contains the value STEVE
BRUCE in field 4. If found, the entire record is deleted. If not found, no record is
deleted (but the command is still successful).
Failure: The file is read-only
Insufficient disk space to save file
File is not the correct format (text file containing comma-separated fields and carriage return/linefeed separated records or .DBF file)
230
Installing [email protected]
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
L(file)
Description
Command that immediately changes the system prompts to use the specified
Amanda system language file. This changes the system prompts, but the greetings
of the individual mailboxes might need to be recorded by the users in the new language.
file
A string or variable containing the name of a valid Amanda system language file (minus the .IDX extension and the DOS path). Amanda knows
that the system language file names end in .IDX and are located in the
Amanda directory.
Examples:
L(ENGLISH)
changes the prompts to those found in ENGLISH.IDX (if your system has a
Rhetorex voice board) or ENGLISH.BDX (if your system is connected to
a Norstar KSU) in the C:\AMANDA directory.
L(MEXICAN)
changes the prompts to those found in MEXICAN.IDX (if your system has a
Rhetorex voice board) or MEXICAN.BDX (if your system is connected to
a Norstar KSU) in the C:\AMANDA directory.
Failure: Does not fail (If you specify a file that doesn’t exist or is not a prompt
file, Amanda uses the current prompt file.)
LEN[string]
Assumes the value of the total number of characters within a string or digits within
a number.
string
Any string, number, or variable.
NOTE:
The brackets in this syntax are bold. The brackets are a required part of
the syntax whenever you use LEN. Be careful not to confuse them with
the non-bold brackets that indicate that the syntax within the brackets is
optional.
Example:
LEN[7145551212]
assumes the value 10.
I(LEN[%S1],=,4,%S1)
checks the length of the DTMF entry stored in %S1 because all extensions have 4
digits. If %S1 contains a mailbox, Amanda goes to that mailbox. See the I() command for more information.
Failure: Does not fail
Chapter 15: Programming Amanda
231
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
%M[(mailbox)]
Description
Command that returns the total number of messages for the specified or current
mailbox. Each port has its own %M.
mailbox Optional. A valid mailbox or a variable containing a mailbox. The default
is the current mailbox.
Example:
%M(321)
contains the number of messages stored for mailbox 321.
Failure: Invalid mailbox
M(greeting
[#mailbox],
repetition,delay)
When Amanda processes this command, she plays the specified greeting and waits
for a single DTMF digit to be pressed by the caller. Amanda immediately finds the
matching menu selection and continues processing at the specified mailbox. This
eliminates the normal delay for determining that a DTMF entry has been completed.
greeting
One of the seven mailbox greetings (G1–G7). This greeting should be
a menu from which the caller is to make a selection.
mailbox
Optional. Any valid mailbox. The default is the current mailbox.
repetition
The number of times to play the greeting.
delay
The amount of time (in tenths of seconds) to wait before repeating the
greeting.
This command is used only in Extension fields.
Examples:
M(G1,2,20)
Amanda plays Greeting 1 twice, pausing for two seconds before repeating it. If the
caller presses a DTMF digit, Amanda stops the greeting and uses the caller’s digit
to process the menu.
If the caller makes no selection at all, Amanda continues processing at the next token.
If the caller makes an invalid selection, Amanda restarts the M() command.
If the caller makes a valid selection (for example 5), Amanda immediately continues processing at the mailbox specified in the Menu field 5.
M(G1#111,2,30)
plays Greeting 1 from mailbox 111. If there is no response from the caller, Amanda
plays Greeting 1 again after a 3 second pause. If there is still no response, Amanda
executes the next token in the Extension field.
Failure: Invalid mailbox
232
Installing [email protected]
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
%N
Description
System variable that contains the number of new messages for the current mailbox.
Each port has its own %N.
Example:
P(%N,N)
causes Amanda to say the number of new messages as a number.
N(file,field,value
{,field,variable})
Command that searches the specified file for all the records that match the specified
value. This command changes the values in up to 8 fields in each matching record
using the values stored in the specified variables. If no matching records are found,
Amanda continues processing the next token. See also the V() command.
file
A string or variable containing a valid DOS file name for the text or DBF
file. Use the complete path to the file unless the file is in C:\AMANDA.
No line in the file should exceed 143 characters. There is no limit to the
number of lines in the file.
field
A number, string, or variable that indicates the number or name of a field.
The first field indicates what field to compare with value; the additional
(up to 8) fields indicate what fields to change. Each field is changed to the
value of its corresponding variable. (.DBF files have field names; text
files have field numbers.)
value
A string or variable that contains the data to be compared with the contents of the specified field.
variable One of port or global variables.
Example:
N("C:\\LISTS\\PHONE.LST",1,"RYAN GIGGS",3,%S1,2,%S2)
finds all records in the file "PHONE.LST" that have "RYAN GIGGS" in the first
field and replace the contents of field 2 with the value of %S2 and the contents of
field 3 with the value of %S1. Numbers are used for the fields because
PHONE.LST is a text file.
Failure: Specified file does not exist
Value of field not found within the file
O(time)
Command that makes Amanda go on-hook for the specified amount of time. Depending upon the value used, you can cause a hookflash or a hang-up. This is particularly useful for generating an intermediate hang-up condition during token
processing without terminating the actual continued token processing. See also the
H() command.
time
A number in tenths of seconds or a variable containing that number.
Example:
O(20)
causes Amanda to go on-hook for two seconds.
Failure: Does not fail
Chapter 15: Programming Amanda
233
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
Description
%P
System variable that contains the previous mailbox, that is, the last mailbox accessed before the current mailbox. Each port has its own %P. See also %U (current
mailbox).
Example:
While accessing mailbox 990, %U is 990. Then a caller enters 222 and is transferred to that extension. As mailbox 222 is accessed, %U becomes 222, and %P becomes 990.
P[repetition]
(date,D
[,hangup])
Command that tells Amanda to say the specified number as a date.
repetition
The number of times to repeat the date. The default is 1.
date
A number in either of the following formats: MMDDYY (which
assumes the year 19YY,) or MMDDYYYY. For dates after 1999, you
must use MMDDYYYY.
Despite this format, the date is read in the order that most speakers of
the prompt language (specified using the Setup utility) expect to hear
it. If the year is the current year, Amanda does not read the year.
hangup
Optional. The number 1 or 0 indicating how to process a hangup. The
1 means that the processing of this token ends. 0 means that the
processing of this token ends, the string of tokens is aborted, and the
channel hangs up so that it can wait for a new call.
Example:
P(06261994,D)
causes Amanda to say "June twenty-sixth, nineteen ninety-four"
Failure: Does not fail
234
Installing [email protected]
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
P[repetition]
(amount,
currency
[,hangup])
Description
Command that tells Amanda to say the specified number as an amount of
money.
repetition
The number of times to repeat amount. The default is 1.
amount
A number from 0 to 999 million.
currency
Use one of the following:
$
F
P
hangup
For dollars and cents.
For francs and centimes.
For pesos and centavos.
Optional. The number 1 or 0 indicating how to process a hangup. The
1 means that the processing of this token ends. 0 means that the
processing of this token ends, the string of tokens is aborted, and the
channel hangs up so that it can wait for a new call.
Example:
P(06261994,$)
cause Amanda to say "Sixty-two thousand six hundred nineteen dollars
and ninety-four cents"
The monetary terms are always available, regardless of the system
language.
P[repetition]
(number,N
[,hangup])
Command that tells Amanda to say the absolute value of the number.
repetition
The number of times to repeat absolute value. The default is 1.
number
A number or variable representing a number from 0 to 999 million.
hangup
Optional. The number 1 or 0 indicating how to process a hangup. The
1 means that the processing of this token ends. 0 means that the
processing of this token ends, the string of tokens is aborted, and the
channel hangs up so that it can wait for a new call.
NOTE:
Use a condition to test whether the number is positive or negative. Use
a greeting that says “negative” or “minus” to handle negative
numbers.
Examples:
Suppose that %S1 contains -1234 and G1 contains the recording
“negative,” then
I(%S1,>,0,1001)P(G1)P(%S1,N)
causes Amanda to say “negative one thousand two hundred thirty-four”.
(mailbox 1001’s Extension field would not include the greeting—just the
command, P(%S1,N))
P(06261994,N)
Chapter 15: Programming Amanda
235
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
P[repetition]
(time,T
[,hangup])
Description
Command that tells Amanda to say the specified number as a time of day.
repetition
The number of times to repeat the contents of the port variable. The
default is 1.
time
A number or variable containing a number that specifies a time in the
24-hour HHMM format. However, Amanda says the time in a 12-hour
format, followed by A.M. or P.M.
hangup
Optional. The number 1 or 0 indicating how to process a hangup. The
1 means that the processing of this token ends. 0 means that the
processing of this token ends, the string of tokens is aborted, and the
channel hangs up so that it can wait for a new call.
Example:
P(1826,T)
causes Amanda to say “Six, twenty-six P.M.”
Failure: Does not fail
P[repetition]
(A,string
[,hangup])
Command that tells Amanda to say the characters in the specified string.
For a space, Amanda says the word “space”.
repetition
The number of times to repeat the contents of the string. The default
is 1.
string
A string of letters from the alphabet and spaces.
hangup
Optional. The number 1 or 0 indicating how to process a hangup. The
1 means that the processing of this token ends. 0 means that the
processing of this token ends, the string of tokens is aborted, and the
channel hangs up so that it can wait for a new call.
Example:
P(A,"GEORGE BEST")
causes Amanda to say “G,” “E,” “O,” “R,” “G,” “E,” “space,” “B,” “E,”
“S,” “T.”
Failure: Does not fail
P[repetition](D)
Command that tells Amanda to say the percentage of remaining disk space.
repetition
The number of times to repeat the percentage of disk space. The
default is 1.
Examples:
P(D)
causes Amanda to say “The percentage of free disk space is” followed by
the percentage as a number, e.g., forty-two.
Failure: Does not fail
236
Installing [email protected]
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
P[repetition]
(greeting
[,mailbox
[,hangup]])
Description
Command that tells Amanda to play the specified greeting for the specified
or current mailbox.
repetition
The number of times to repeat the greeting. The default is 1.
greeting
One of the seven mailbox greetings (G1–G7).
mailbox
Optional. Any valid mailbox or a variable containing a mailbox. The
default is the current mailbox.
hangup
Optional. The number 1 or 0 indicating how to process a hangup. The
1 means that the processing of this token ends. 0 means that the
processing of this token ends, the string of tokens is aborted, and the
channel hangs up so that it can wait for a new call.
Example:
P(G1)
causes Amanda to play Greeting 1 for the current mailbox.
Failure: Invalid mailbox
P[repetition]
(M[,mailbox
[,hangup]])
Command that tells Amanda to say the total number of messages for the
specified or current mailbox.
Using this command cancels any pending Notify actions for the specified
message automatically.
When this command plays a message that is marked with Receipt
Verification, the verification message’s From field contains the mailbox
which executed this command.
repetition
The number of times to repeat the number of messages. The default is
1.
mailbox
Optional. Any valid mailbox or a variable containing a mailbox. The
default is the current mailbox.
hangup
Optional. The number 1 or 0 indicating how to process a hangup. The
1 means that the processing of this token ends. 0 means that the
processing of this token ends, the string of tokens is aborted, and the
channel hangs up so that it can wait for a new call.
Example:
P(M,212)
causes Amanda to say the total number of messages for mailbox 212.
Failure: Invalid mailbox
Chapter 15: Programming Amanda
237
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
P[repetition]
(Mn[,mailbox
[,hangup]])
Description
Command that tells Amanda to play the message with the specified
number for the specified or current mailbox.
repetition
The number of times to repeat the message. The default is 1.
n
The number of the message to be played.
mailbox
Optional. Any valid mailbox or a variable containing a mailbox. The
default is the current mailbox.
hangup
Optional. The number 1 or 0 indicating how to process a hangup. The
1 means that the processing of this token ends. 0 means that the
processing of this token ends, the string of tokens is aborted, and the
channel hangs up so that it can wait for a new call.
Example:
P3(M1,212)
causes Amanda to play message 1 for mailbox 212 three times.
Failure: Invalid mailbox
P[repetition]
(MN[,mailbox
[,hangup]])
Command that tells Amanda to play all new messages for the specified or
current mailbox.
repetition
The number of times to repeat the message. The default is 1.
mailbox
Optional. Any valid mailbox or a variable containing a mailbox. The
default is the current mailbox.
hangup
Optional. The number 1 or 0 indicating how to process a hangup. The
1 means that the processing of this token ends. 0 means that the
processing of this token ends, the string of tokens is aborted, and the
channel hangs up so that it can wait for a new call.
Example:
P(MN)
causes Amanda to play the new messages for the current mailbox.
Failure: Invalid mailbox
238
Installing [email protected]
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
P[repetition]
(N[,mailbox
[,hangup]])
Description
Command that tells Amanda to play the Name/Extension recording of the
specified or current mailbox. If there is no recording, nothing is played.
See also
P[repetition](U[,mailbox]).
repetition
The number of times to repeat the Name/Extension recording. The
default is 1.
mailbox
Optional. Any valid mailbox or a variable containing a mailbox. The
default is the current mailbox.
hangup
Optional. The number 1 or 0 indicating how to process a hangup. The
1 means that the processing of this token ends. 0 means that the
processing of this token ends, the string of tokens is aborted, and the
channel hangs up so that it can wait for a new call.
Example:
P(N)
causes Amanda to play the Name/Extension recording for the current
mailbox.
Failure: Invalid mailbox
P[repetition]
(DTMF)
Command that tells Amanda to say a number as DTMF digits. This is
usually used for repeating the number corresponding to the DTMF tones
entered by a caller.
repetition
The number of times to repeat the DTMF digits. The default is 1.
DTMF
A number or variable containing a series of DTMF digits.
Example:
P(%S5)
causes Amanda to say the DTMF digits in %S5. For example, if %S5
contains the number 411, Amanda says 4–1–1 instead of four hundred
eleven.
Failure: Does not fail
Chapter 15: Programming Amanda
239
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
P[repetition]
(prompt_no,V
[,hangup])
Description
Command that tells Amanda to look for the specified prompt number in the
current system language file. Then Amanda plays the prompt associated
with that number.
repetition
The number of times to repeat the prompt. The default is 1.
prompt_no The number or variable containing the number for the prompt. The
current range is from 1 to 477. (For some languages, some of the
prompt numbers reference blank messages.)
hangup
Optional. The number 1 or 0 indicating how to process a hangup. The
1 means that the processing of this token ends. 0 means that the
processing of this token ends, the string of tokens is aborted, and the
channel hangs up so that it can wait for a new call.
Example:
P2(15,V)
causes Amanda to play prompt number 15 twice.
Failure: Does not fail
P[repetition](R)
Command that tells Amanda to say the DTMF digits entered by a caller
who requested relay paging notification. (These digits are stored in %R.)
This command can be used in either field, but makes the most sense when
used in a Notify Method field.
repetition
The number of times to repeat the DTMF digits. The default is 1.
Example:
P(R)
causes Amanda to say the DTMF digits stored in the system variable %R.
You can also use:
P(%R)
Failure: Does not fail
240
Installing [email protected]
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
P[repetition]
(U[,mailbox
[,hangup]])
Description
Command that tells Amanda to play the Name/Extension recording of the
specified or current mailbox. If there is no recording, Amanda says
“mailbox,” followed by the digits for the mailbox. See also
P[repetition](N[,mailbox]).
repetition
The number of times to repeat the Name/Extension recording. The
default is 1.
mailbox
Optional. Any valid mailbox or a variable containing a mailbox. The
default is the current mailbox.
hangup
Optional. The number 1 or 0 indicating how to process a hangup. The
1 means that the processing of this token ends. 0 means that the
processing of this token ends, the string of tokens is aborted, and the
channel hangs up so that it can wait for a new call.
Example:
P(U)
causes Amanda to play the Name/Extension recording for the current
mailbox. If it doesn’t exist, Amanda says the digits for the mailbox.
Failure: Invalid mailbox
P[repetition](V)
Command that tells Amanda to say the digits in the Variable field of the
Notification record.
repetition
The number of times to repeat the contents of the Variable field. The
default is 1.
Example:
P2(V)
causes Amanda to say the digits in the Variable field twice. The following
also works:
P2(%V)
Failure: Does not fail
Chapter 15: Programming Amanda
241
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
Q({greeting
[#mailbox][,E]})
Description
Command that allows you to ask a caller a series of questions and store all the caller’s responses as a single message for the current mailbox. Each question is recorded as a greeting which Amanda plays back with a tone. Then Amanda records a
response and goes on to the next question. Up to 20 questions are allowed. To ask
more than 7 questions (after using Greetings 1 to 7 for the current mailbox) you can
use greetings from other mailboxes by specifying which mailbox’s greeting to access with a # sign followed by the mailbox, e.g., G7#123 would use greeting 7 from
mailbox 123. You use the Q() command to create voice forms or implement some
IVR applications.
This command is used only in Extension fields.
greeting One of the seven mailbox greetings (G1–G7).
mailbox Optional. Any valid mailbox. The default is the current mailbox.
E
Gives the caller the opportunity to edit (review, rerecord, append, or cancel) the previous group of answers.
If additional token language processing is required after the caller has hung up, use
the H token as part of the token string.
Examples:
Q(G1,G2,G3,G4,G5,G6,G7,G1#9000,G2#9000)
causes Amanda to ask 9 questions recorded in the specified greetings, record 9 responses, and store the responses as one message for the current mailbox, regardless
of what mailbox’s provide the greetings.
Q(G1,G2,G3,E)
records three answers from the caller and then gives the caller an opportunity to review those answers as if they were one message. When editing, a menu gives the
caller the options of re-recording, appending to or canceling the answers of that
group.
Q(G1,G2,E,G3,G4,E)
asks the caller two questions and then allows the caller to edit those answers. Once
the caller presses 9 to save, Amanda asks the next two questions and then allows
the caller to edit the second group of answers.
NOTE:
While editing, pressing 4 to cancel erases all the previous answers (not
just those in the group being edited) and restarts the Q() command.
Failure: Invalid mailbox
Invalid greeting
242
Installing [email protected]
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
%R
Description
System variable (the relay variable) that contains the DTMF digits entered by the
caller who requested relay paging notification. Each port has its own %R. For more
information, see Administering [email protected] This is primarily used to
send up to 16 digits of information to a user’s pager/beeper.
This token is used only in Notify Method fields.
Example:
9,%VW(9,V)P(U)P(R)
causes Amanda to call someone at home and say the telephone number and other
information in the relay variable.
R(greeting
[#mailbox],
variable
[,timeout1
[,timeout2]])
Command that plays a greeting from the current or specified mailbox and
stores the caller’s DTMF entry as a number in the specified variable. The
greeting is interrupted as soon as the first DTMF tone is entered. If there
is no DTMF entry or if the timeout occurs, the variable is set to the empty
string.
greeting One of the seven mailbox greetings (G1–G7).
mailbox Optional. Any valid mailbox. The default is the current mailbox.
variable One of the port or global variables.
timeout1 A number from 0 to 10500 that represents the time in tenths of seconds
to wait for the first DTMF digit after playing the greeting. The default is
1.2 seconds.
timeout2 A number from 0 to 10500 that represents the time in tenths of seconds
to wait between additional DTMF digits (after the first). The default is the
value of the configuration option tmo_dtmf.
Example:
R(G1,%S6,20)
stores a telephone number entered by a caller for later use. Greeting 1 is
“Enter your telephone number, finish by pressing the # sign.” The caller’s
entry is stored as a number in the port variable %S6. Amanda waits two
seconds after the greeting before deciding that the caller is not going to enter a telephone number.
R(G1#111,%S1)
plays Greeting 1 of mailbox 111. The DTMF digits entered by the caller
become the value of %S1.
Failure: Invalid mailbox
Invalid greeting
Chapter 15: Programming Amanda
243
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
%S0
%S2
%S4
%S6
%S8
%S10
%S12
%S14
%S16
%S18
%S1
%S3
%S5
%S7
%S9
%S11
%S13
%S15
%S17
%S19
Description
Each telephone port has its own set of 20 %S variables where you can store, modify, or retrieve information. One port’s %S1 is not the same as another port’s %S1.
If Port 1 changes %S1, it does not change the value of Port 2’s %S1. Initially, each
variable is equal to the empty string. Each variable can contain a string of up to 143
characters.
See also %G0–%G9.
NOTE:
The [(), ](), and |() commands can be used only with %S0 through %S9.
The variables %S10 through %S19 cannot be read from, written to, or appended to any DOS file.
Example:
+(%S0,5)
adds five to the current value of %S0.
=(%S12,714)
assigns the area code 714 to %S12.
I(%S12=714,555)
causes Amanda to go to the Extension field for mailbox 555 because the condition
is true (%S12 does equal 714).
Failure: Invalid variable name (such as %S52)
244
Installing [email protected]
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
S(port,[string],
[variable],
[termination],
[length],[timeout])
Description
Command that gives Amanda access to other computers via the serial ports. Amanda can send a string to and/or receive a string from the remote computer. When receiving, Amanda terminates the connection when the first of the following occurs:
•
Amanda receives the specified termination string
•
She receives the maximum number of characters
•
A timeout occurs
When sending, Amanda terminates the connection after the string is sent.
Before using this command, make sure the configuration settings for the physical
serial port have been defined.
port
The number for or a variable containing the number for the logical serial port (1,2,3,4) mapped onto a physical COM port by the configuration option serial_port1, serial_port2, serial_port3, or serial_port4.
string
Optional. A string or variable containing the characters to send to the
specified serial port. It can contain alphanumeric characters as wells as
variables and the following special characters:
\A
Attention, which is a bell sound (Ctrl+G)
\N
Newline (Ctrl+J)
\R
Return (Ctrl+M)
\T
TAB (Ctrl+I)
\\
Backslash, the actual "\" character.
The default is to send no string to the serial port.
variable
Optional. The port or global variable that stores the response.
The default is not to store a response.
termination Optional. A string or variable that defines the characters that, when
read, stop Amanda from reading the serial port. This can use the same
special characters as string. The default is "\R\N", the carriage return/
linefeed pair that usually end a line in a text file. The terminating character, if any, does not become part of variable.
length
Optional. A number or a variable containing a number. Its absolute
value defines the maximum number of characters to receive over the
serial port. The default is -143. Use a positive value for length when
you are receiving a packet of characters, you know its exact size, and
you want the command to fail if fewer characters are received. Use a
negative number otherwise.
timeout
Optional. A number or variable that defines the maximum time, in seconds, that Amanda should wait for the first character and also between
characters being received on the serial port. The default is the setting
for the configuration option tmo_serial.
Chapter 15: Programming Amanda
245
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
S token continued
Description
Example:
S(2,%S3,%S4,,,50)
both sends and receives. The command uses COM port 2. %S3 stores the string to
be sent. %S4 stores the string that is received. Amanda waits a half second for the
first character and between characters.
S(2,%S3)
only sends. The command uses COM port 2. %S3 stores the string to be sent. This
command has non-standard syntax. Because all the parameters after the string to be
sent are not being used, this command does not need the additional commas.
S(2,,%S4,,,50)
only receives. The command uses COM port 2. %S4 stores the string that is received. Amanda waits a half second for the first character and between characters.
Failure: Physical port not available
Logical port not configured properly
If a timeout stops Amanda from receiving information before the maximum number of characters is received and the length is a positive number, Amanda considers
the command a failure.
%T
System variable that contains the current connect time, the number of seconds that
the current port/call has been active. Each port has its own %T.
Examples:
P(%T,N)
causes Amanda to say the amount of connect time as a number. See the P() command for more information.
246
Installing [email protected]
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
T(file,phone_no
[,tokens])
Description
Command that sends faxes to either a specified telephone number or to a connected
call. Before using this command, be sure at least one fax modem is installed and
configured on Amanda.
Before using this command, make sure the configuration settings for the physical
serial port have been defined.
file
The file name of the fax you wish to transmit. It can be any valid DOS
file name. Use the complete path to the file unless the file is in
C:\AMANDA.
phone_no The telephone number (or a variable containing that number) for the fax
device that accepts the transmission. Use the empty string to make
Amanda wait for a call to ring into the fax port.
tokens
Optional. A string or variable that defines the actions Amanda takes to
connect the call to the fax port. For more information, please see the example for the J() command.
This command is used only in Extension fields.
Examples:
T(C:/FAXES/NEWINFO.FAX,%G6)
allows the user to request a fax and have the supplier of that fax send it to the provided telephone number. This is commonly called a “two-call fax back”. NEWINFO.FAX is the name of the file, and %G6 contains the fax telephone number.
T(C:/FAXES/NEWINFO.FAX,"",%S5)
allows the user to request a fax and have it sent as part of the current call. This is
commonly called a “one-call fax on demand”. NEWINFO.FAX is the name of the
file, and %S5 provides the tokens that connect the call to the FAX port.
Failure: Fax modem not configured properly
Physical port not available
Logical port not configured properly
%U
System variable that contains the current mailbox number. Each port has its own
%U. See also %P.
Chapter 15: Programming Amanda
247
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
U-ext_no
Description
Command that performs partially supervised transfers. Amanda does not transfer
the call if she detects a busy signal. To use the U token, the setting for Maximum
Rings for the mailbox must be set to 1.
ext_no
Series of DTMF digits that indicate an extension number.
This command is used only in Extension fields.
Example:
U-144
causes Amanda to call extension 144 (if Amanda is processing a call). If the extension rings, she transfers the call and hangs up. If the extension is busy, Amanda lets
the caller know that.
Failure: Does not fail
%V
System variable that contains the value of the Variable field in the current Notification record. Each port has its own %V.
This token is used only in Notify Method fields.
Example:
If the only difference in a Notification template for mailboxes is the pager/beeper
telephone number that Amanda should call, %V can store that number.
9,%VW(3,P)%U*%M*%N#
causes Amanda to call the user and play the number of messages.
248
Installing [email protected]
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
V(file,field,
value{,field,
variable}[,n])
Description
Command that searches the specified file for the nth record that has the
specified value in the specified field. It retrieves values from up to 8 other
fields in that record, putting the retrieved values in the specified variables.
See also the N() command.
file
A string or variable containing a valid DOS file name for the text or .DBF
file. Use the complete path to the file unless the file is in C:\AMANDA.
No line in the file should exceed 143 characters. There is no limit to the
number of lines in the file.
field
A number, string, or variable that indicates the number or name of a field.
The first field indicates what field to compare with value; the additional
(up to 8) fields indicate what fields to copy into the corresponding variables. (.DBF files have field names; text files have field numbers.)
value
A string or variable that contains the data to be compared with the contents of the specified field.
variable One of port or global variables.
n
(Optional) This parameter can be used only with ASCII files. A number
indicating which matching record to use. For example, if n is 3, the first
two matching records are ignored and data is taken from the third matching record.
Amanda identifies n because, when it is used, there is an even number of
parameters instead of an odd number.
Example:
V("C:\\LISTS\\PHONE.LST",1,"JOHN",3,%S1,2,%S2)
searches the file PHONE.LST for the first record that has the value JOHN
in field 1. If the search is successful, the value in field 3 of that record is
stored in %S1 and the value in field 2 is stored in %S2.
Failure: If no record is found
Invalid file
Invalid field
%W
System variable that contains the day of the week (1 is Sunday, and 7 is Saturday).
Chapter 15: Programming Amanda
249
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
W(n,[event
[,mailbox]])
Description
Command that tells Amanda to:
•
•
Wait a number of tenths of a second
Wait for an event, such as a dial tone or another appropriate
answer. If the event does not occur, Amanda goes to the specified mailbox.
n
Without an event parameter (P, V, or T), a number of tenths of a second.
For dial tone (T), the number of seconds.
For pager (P) and voice (V), the number of rings to wait before continuing. If n is 0 for pager or voice, the 0 is replaced with the value of rmt_rna,
a configuration option that you define using the Setup utility.
event
The event that Amanda waits for:
P
A pager answer
V
A voice answer
T
The dial tone
mailbox Any valid mailbox or a variable containing a mailbox. Specifies the mailbox to which control should be transferred if the event does not occur.
Examples:
W(3)
makes Amanda pause for 3 tenths of a second
W(3,P)
makes Amanda wait up to three rings for a paging/beeping system to answer. Use
this to confirm that the paging company answered before playing the DTMF digits
to be displayed on the pager.
W(4,V,111)
makes Amanda wait up to four rings for a voice. If a voice is detected, processing
continues with the next token. Otherwise, control is transferred to mailbox 111.
Failure: Invalid mailbox
Event does not occur and no mailbox is specified
%X
System variable that contains the codes needed to get the transfer dial tone on the
current port. Each port has its own %X. This is the setting of the dl-dtwait configuration option (usually F-).
250
Installing [email protected]
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
X[(file)]
Description
Command that creates the specified file or LIGHT.ON. Used in conjunction with
the Y() and Z() commands, this command can control Amanda’s processing of tokens.
file
A string or variable containing a valid DOS file name for a text file. The
default is to create the file LIGHT.ON in the mailbox’s directory.
Example:
A user’s message waiting indicator toggles on and off. For the first message,
Amanda should turn the indicator on. The indicator should be left on for the second
and later messages (until they are all listened to). So you use:
•
Z() to check whether the indicator is on or not (if LIGHT.ON exists, the indicator is on).
•
X() to create the LIGHT.ON file when a message arrives and the indicator is
not on.
•
Y() to delete LIGHT.ON when the indicator is turned off because the user has
listened to all the messages.
Failure: Does not fail
%Y
System variable that contains the current date in American format: MMDDYYYY.
Example:
P(%Y,D)
causes Amanda to say the current date (contained in %Y) as a date.
See the P() command for more information.
Y[(file)]
Command that deletes the specified file or LIGHT.ON.
file
A string or variable containing a valid DOS file name for a text file. The
default is to delete the file LIGHT.ON in the mailbox’s directory.
Example:
Y(C:\\AMANDA\\FOOBAR.TXT)
causes Amanda to delete FOOBAR.TXT.
See also the X() command.
Failure: Does not fail
%Z
System variable that contains the current time in 24-hour format: HHMM.
Example:
P(%Z,T)
causes Amanda to say the current time (contained in %Z) as a time.
See the P() command for more information.
Chapter 15: Programming Amanda
251
Alphabetical Token Reference (Continued)
Token Syntax
Z[(file)]
Description
Command that tests for the existence of the specified file or LIGHT.ON. If the file
is there, Amanda immediately stops processing the rest of the tokens for this mailbox. Otherwise, the next token is executed.
file
A string or variable containing a valid DOS file name for a text file. The
default is to delete the file LIGHT.ON in the mailbox’s directory.
Example:
Z()X()
causes Amanda to check for LIGHT.ON. If it is not there, the X() command causes
Amanda to create it.
See also the X() command.
Failure: Does not fail
Troubleshooting
Check for the following mistakes:
1.
Did you start the string of tokens without @ when you wanted Amanda
to perform a hookflash or PCPM?
2.
Did you start the string of tokens with @ when Amanda should NOT
perform a hookflash or PCPM?
3.
If the tokens are in an Extension field, did you forget that both Do Not
Disturb and Call Screening must be OFF?
4.
Did you check the trace file for information about what went wrong?
TIP:
Remember that when a string of tokens in an Extension
field fails, Amanda goes to the mailbox specified in the
Done Chain for that mailbox. If you are testing a program
and are not sure which strings of tokens fails, use different
mailboxes in the Done Chain fields to help you. For example, if you do not know which of two strings fails, you
might put mailbox 4000 in one Done Chain and mailbox
4001 in the other. If you use
@P(G1, your_personal_mailbox)
in the Extension field for 4000 and use
252
Installing [email protected]
@P(G2, your_personal_mailbox)
in the Extension field for 4001, then you know which string
fails based on which of your personal greetings Amanda
plays.
Chapter 16:
Programming Examples
System Paging of a User for Special Callers
This example illustrates inter-mixing tokens with Amanda’s standard call
processing.
Application
This application creates a special mailbox (for example, 611) for family,
friends, or special customers. When callers access this mailbox, Amanda
pages you over the telephone paging system in your office. After letting you
know that you have an important call, Amanda transfers that call to your
extension through a “backdoor” even if your regular extension mailbox (for
example, 111) might have its Do Not Disturb setting ON. The steps required
to implement this feature might be summarized as follows:
1.
Put the caller on hold.
2.
Access the telephone switching system paging feature.
3.
Say something such as “There is an important call for David.”
4.
Transfer the call to a “backdoor” mailbox that rings the extension.
254
Installing [email protected]
Translating to Amanda’s Tokens
This could be translated into Amanda tokens as follows:
1.
Dial the code for putting the caller on Transfer Hold (which is normal
processing if the first character is not an @ sign).
2.
Dial the telephone switching system paging access code, for example,
33* (if that is your system’s code for a system page.)
3.
Play a greeting that you have already recorded such as “There is an
important call for David” using the P() token.
4.
Dial the code for retrieving the caller from Transfer Hold and then transfer the caller to a “backdoor” mailbox that rings the extension. For
example, to retrieve the caller you use %X and to access the “backdoor”
mailbox use the G() token.
Result
The final result might be:
33*P(G1)%XG(6111)
where G1 for the current mailbox has the “important call for David”
recording and mailbox 6111 transfers the call to the extension 111 by having
111 in its Extension field with Do Not Disturb set to OFF and its Lock ON.
Switching and Maintaining Languages
This example illustrates how you can completely over-ride Amanda’s
standard processing.
Amanda has the ability to support multiple languages simultaneously on any
port. The only requirements are that you install an alternative language
prompt file and you configure the mailboxes to allow a caller to change to
the alternate language. Additionally, you can control which mailboxes a
caller has access to when they select a specific language.
Chapter 16: Programming Examples
255
Application
Let’s start by allowing a caller to select outgoing greetings in a different
language. When a call is answered by Amanda, processing begins at the
Company Greeting mailbox (which is 990 by default.) After the greeting is
played, processing (by default) continues at mailbox 991 which plays the
caller Instructions. During either the Greeting (990) or the Instructions (991)
you can give the caller the option to press a digit to hear the Instructions in a
different language. When the caller enters the language digit, Amanda
should then be configured to access another mailbox that contains the proper
Instructions using the Token Programming Language.
The following diagram helps illustrate this:
This now gives your callers the option to hear their instructions in the
language of their choice (realize that you can have additional language
selections as additional menu choices). However, after the caller selects
Spanish by pressing 1, when they access a mailbox, Amanda still says in
English, “Please hold while I try that extension.” We have changed which
language instructions a caller hears, but we still have not changed which
256
Installing [email protected]
language system prompts the caller hears. To change the system prompts to
another language we must use tokens (and of course have installed the
appropriate language prompts).
Using Amanda’s Tokens
The token to change system prompts is L(). To change to the Mexican
Spanish system prompts, use L(MEXICAN) provided that the Mexican
Spanish system prompts file resides in the Amanda directory and is named
MEXICAN.IDX (if your system has a Rhetorex voice board) or
MEXICAN.BDX (if your system is connected to a Norstar KSU).
(Argentinian Spanish is ARGENTIN.IDX or ARGENTIN.BDX.)
To accomplish this, we could use another mailbox that changes the system
prompts to Mexican and then continues processing wit the Spanish Caller
Instructions as follows:
mailbox 980’s Extension field contains the tokens @L(MEXICAN)G(981)
which causes Amanda to:
1.
Not put the caller on transfer hold
2.
Change the system prompts to the file "MEXICAN"
3.
Continue processing at mailbox 981.
Chapter 16: Programming Examples
257
NOTE: There are several ways this same activity could have been
accomplished. For example, instead of using the G(981) token, mailbox’s RNA Chain could have had 981 in it. (We
use the RNA Chain, since Amanda returns Ring No Answer after successfully performing the tokens in the Extension field).
Another Consideration
This works for most situations. However, there is one final consideration.
What happens if the caller enters an invalid extension or choice? By
definition, an invalid mailbox has no Done Chain. As a result, Amanda
defaults to using the Done Chain of the Company Greeting mailbox on that
port.
The following diagram illustrates this:
The result is that a caller, who has selected Spanish and entered an invalid
mailbox, eventually ends up at the English Instruction mailbox!
258
Installing [email protected]
To have callers always access the proper language Instruction mailbox, you
can add a control structure to Amanda. In this example, we might perform
the following:
1.
If an alternate language is selected, remember which language was
selected.
2.
Before playing the default Instruction mailbox, determine which language Instruction mailbox should play and continue processing at that
mailbox.
Using Amanda’s Tokens
This could be accomplished with tokens as follows:
1.
To remember that a specific language was selected, we could use a
storage (variable) token such as %S1 to have a value that represents the
language. To assign %S1 a value, we use the =() token. For example,
=(%S1,"MEXICAN") stores the value "MEXICAN" into %S1.
2.
To determine which language Instruction mailbox to access, we could
use the I() token, often called the If token, which allows Amanda to continue processing at the correct mailbox. For example, I(%S1,=,"MEXICAN",981) checks the value of %S1 for "MEXICAN" and if it matched,
then continues processing at mailbox 981 (the Spanish Caller Instructions mailbox in this example). Finally, to make sure that this occurs
before playing the default Instruction mailbox (in this example mailbox
991) we need to insert this control mailbox between the Company
Greeting mailbox (990) and the Instruction mailbox (991) as shown in
the next diagram.
Chapter 16: Programming Examples
259
This configuration now changes Amanda’s standard processing and keeps
the caller connected to the correct language Instruction mailbox. It works
because whenever a new call is answered, Amanda initializes the %S tokens
to "" (the empty string). Therefore, if the caller never presses 1 for Spanish,
then %S1 is never set to the value "MEXICAN" and control is always passed
on to mailbox 991 from mailbox 992.
Order Shipment Information
This example illustrates how you can interact with data files to retrieve
useful information that is given to callers by request.
260
Installing [email protected]
Application
The application is as follows:
1.
Ask the caller to enter an order number (let’s assume that it is five
digits).
2.
Determine whether or not the corresponding order has shipped.
3.
If the order has not shipped, inform the caller. Otherwise, tell the caller
the date the order was shipped.
In order for Amanda to determine an order’s shipped status and its ship date,
she needs to retrieve information from some source. One possible way she
can obtain the data is by using the serial, S(), token to request it from another
computer. An alternative solution is to access the information by looking in a
file on Amanda’s hard disk (or alternatively, a network server). For this
example, we use the second implementation and assume that the following
files exist on Amanda’s hard disk in the root directory:
SHIPPED - An ASCII text file with order numbers that have been shipped
(one per line), for example:
11111
22222
33333
12345
SHIPDATE - An ASCII text file where each line contains an order number
and its ship date separated by a comma (one per line), for example:
11111,06301994
22222,07011994
33333,07061994
12345,07121994
Chapter 16: Programming Examples
261
Translating to Amanda’s Tokens:
1.
To ask the caller for an order number, use R(G1,%S1,20) where Greeting
1 has the recording “Please enter the five-digit order number now.”
After the caller enters the order number, Amanda can perform some
additional checking. For example, to determine if a five-digit order
number was entered, use I(LEN[%S1],!,5,mailbox). If the number of
digits stored in %S1 is not equal to 5, Amanda continues processing
with mailbox mailbox.
2.
To determine whether or not the order shipped, you examine the file
SHIPPED to find out if it contains the caller’s order number. Use
?(%S1,C:\\SHIPPED,mailbox)to find out whether or not a string (%S1),
which contains the order number, is in a file SHIPPED. If it is, Amanda
continues processing with mailbox mailbox.
3.
If the order number is not in the file SHIPPED, Amanda continues processing at the token after the ?() token. Therefore, to tell the caller that
an order has not shipped, you use P(G1) where Greeting 1 plays, “Sorry,
but your order has not yet shipped, please call back tomorrow.” To tell
the caller the order’s ship date, first determine that date using
V(C:\\SHIPDATE,1,%S1,2,%S2), which scans the first column of the
file SHIPDATE for the value in %S1. After finding the first match,
Amanda stores the value in the second column as %S2. Then you use
P(G1)P(%S2,D) to tell the caller the date. Here Greeting 1 plays, “Your
order was shipped on.”
Summary
To summarize the above, the mailbox settings and tokens are as follows:
mailbox
Extension/Recording
Done
Chain
2000
@R(G1,%S1,20) I(LEN[%S1],!,5,2001)G(2002)
2001
“Your order number must be five digits. Good-bye.”
999
2002
@?(%S1,SHIPPED,2003)P(G1)
999
2003
@V(SHIPDATE,1,%S1,2,%S2) P(G1)P(%S2,D)
999
262
Installing [email protected]
One-call and Two-call Faxbacks
You can use fax files and the token programming language to perform onecall and two-call faxbacks. Most of this functionality is preconfigured for
you inside Amanda using specific mailboxes.
A one-call faxback is a call from a fax machine so that a document can be
faxed to the caller at that fax machine. Unless you have a toll-free telephone
line, the faxing is at the caller’s expense.
A two-call faxback requires two calls. Someone calls from his telephone,
indicates what documents to fax, and leaves his fax number. Amanda calls
the fax machine and sends the documents. This second call is at your
expense, so you may want to do two-call faxbacks only in your area code or
under other special circumstances.
You must have already installed and configured an appropriate fax modem
for Amanda before the following examples can work.
Sending Faxes to Amanda
Before you can send faxes from Amanda, the data to be faxed must be stored
on the hard drive. Because Amanda uses a proprietary fax format, you must
fax the data to her. You can set up a mailbox to do both of the following:
•
•
Receive the data that you fax to Amanda
Store the faxes with numbered names in the C:\FAX directory, from
which they can be used in one-call and two-call faxbacks
You can also create the documents to be faxed using Amanda Fax. Copy
those documents to Amanda using Amanda Monitor or the FileCopy
command on Amanda Standalone’s Main screen. For more information
about Amanda Fax, see Using [email protected] Workstation Features.
Chapter 16: Programming Examples
263
If you decide to use a fax machine and a mailbox, the mailbox that performs
these tasks must have:
Extension Field: @R(G1,%S1,30)J(“C:/FAX/
%S1”,””,”%X%FH”)G(999)
DND:
OFF
Screen Calls:
OFF
Store Messages: YES
Greeting 1:
Please enter the number of the fax that you are sending
new.
%S1 must not be used in any other application.
%X must be defined in 1001.PBX.
%F must be the extension that is physically connected to the fax modem
and must be set in the install.cfg file, the file controlled by the Setup
utility.
Do not enter more than eight digits in response to this greeting (because
of DOS naming conventions). The number you enter becomes the name
of the file. For example, if you type in 32, the fax is stored as
C:\FAX\32.
NOTE: You must have created the C:\FAX directory previously. Amanda does not create this directory for you.
One-call Faxback
To set up a one-call faxback, you need to use one mailbox for each
document. If you have no more than ten documents, you need only one
mailbox for the greeting that supplies the menu of available documents.
The following example assumes that you have three documents and uses
only four mailboxes. The documents are named TECH1, TECH2, and
TECH3 to represent technical reports #1 through #3. They are stored in
C:\FAX. It uses mailboxes 92000 to 92003, but you can use any mailboxes.
264
Installing [email protected]
Mailbox 92000 contains the menu. It should have the following settings and
greetings:
Extension Field: blank
DND:
ON
Store Messages: NO
Greeting 1:
If you are calling from your fax machine, please press
the number corresponding to the technical report you
are interested in. For report #1 on SMDI, press 1. For
report #2 on Service Plans, press 2. For report #3 on
Upgrading Voice Boards, press 3.
Menu 1:
92001
Menu 2:
92002
Menu 3:
92003
Mailbox 92001’s Extension field contains the tokens that send technical
report #1.
Extension Field: @T('C:/FAX/TECH1','','P(G1)%X%FH')
DND:
OFF
Store Messages: NO
Greeting 1:
Please press the start button on your fax machine at the
tone.
Mailbox 92002’s Extension field contains the tokens that send technical
report #2.
Extension Field: @T('C:/FAX/TECH2,'','P(G1)%X%FH')
DND:
OFF
Store Messages: NO
Greeting 1:
Please press the start button on your fax machine at the
tone.
Mailbox 92003’s Extension field contains the tokens that send technical
report #3.
Extension Field: @T('C:/FAX/TECH3,'','P(G1)%X%FH')
DND:
OFF
Store Messages: NO
Greeting 1:
Please press the start button on your fax machine at the
tone.
Chapter 16: Programming Examples
265
NOTE: All the quotation marks in these token examples are single
quotation marks (although double quotation marks can be
used). Forward slashes are used (although double backward slashes \\ can also be used with this token).
Two-call Faxback
This example allows the caller to select one or more fax documents, and
leave his fax number. The steps are as follows:
1.
Request the fax area code (this is to determine whether or not to set up
for long distance dialing).
2.
Confirm the area code. If it is not confirmed, go back to step 1.
3.
Request the fax telephone number.
4.
Confirm the telephone number. If it is not confirmed, go back to step 3.
5.
Give the caller the fax document selections and allow him to make more
than one selection. In this example, the documents are named TECH1,
TECH2, and TECH3 to represent technical reports #1 through #3. The
files are stored in C:\FAX.
Mailbox 1000’s Extension field is programmed to ask the caller for his area
code and store the DTMF tones entered by the caller as the variable %S1.
Next it says the numbers that were entered by the caller so the caller can
confirm, reenter, or exit the faxback routine.
Extension Field: @R(G1,%S1,20)P(G2)P(%S1)M(G3,2,30)
DND:
OFF
Store Messages: NO
Greeting 1:
Please enter the area code of your fax machine now.
Greeting 2:
You entered area code:
Greeting 3:
If this area code is correct, press 1 now.
If this area code is not correct and you want to re-enter
it, press 2 now.
If you do NOT want to have documents faxed to you,
press 3 to exit.
Menu 1:
1001
266
Installing [email protected]
Menu 2:
1000
Menu 3:
991
Mailbox 1001’s Extension field contains the tokens that determine whether
or not the entered area code is local (assuming that the local area code is
714). If the area code is not local, it stores the long distance dialing digit '1' in
the variable %S0.
Extension Field: @I(%S1,=,'714',1002)=(%S0,'1')G(1003)
DND:
OFF
Store Messages: NO
If the area code is local, mailbox 1002’s Extension field sets both the long
distance dialing string and the area code string to '' (the empty string).
Extension Field: @=(%S0,'')=(%S1,'')G(1003)
DND:
OFF
Store Messages: NO
Mailbox 1003’s Extension field contains the tokens that request the fax
telephone number and stores it in the variable %S2.
Extension Field: @R(G1,%S2,40)P(G2)P(%S2)M(G3,2,30)
DND:
OFF
Store Messages: NO
Greeting 1:
Please enter the telephone number for your fax machine now.
Greeting 2:
You entered the fax telephone number:
Greeting 3:
If this fax telephone number is correct, press 1 now.
If this number is not correct and you want to re-enter it,
press 2 now.
If you do NOT want to have documents faxed to you,
press 3 to exit.
Menu 1:
1004
Menu 2:
1003
Menu 3:
991
Chapter 16: Programming Examples
267
Mailbox 1004 contains a menu that lists the available documents. It should
have the following settings and greetings:
Extension Field: @<('9,%S0%S1%S2')M(G1,2,30)
DND:
OFF
Store Messages: NO
Greeting 1:
Please press the number corresponding to the technical
report you are interested in. For report #1 on SMDI,
press 1. For report #2 on Service Plans, press 2. For report #3 on Upgrading Voice Boards, press 3.
Menu 1:
10041
Menu 2:
10042
Menu 3:
10043
Mailbox 10041’s Extension field contains the tokens that send technical
report #1.
Extension Field: @P(G1)>('C:/FAX/TECH1')G(1005)
DND:
OFF
Store Messages: NO
Greeting 1:
The technical report on SMDI will be faxed to you.
Mailbox 10042’s Extension field contains the tokens that send technical
report #2.
Extension Field: @P(G1)>('C:/FAX/TECH2')G(1005)
DND:
OFF
Store Messages: NO
Greeting 1:
The technical report on service plans will be faxed to
you.
Mailbox 10043’s Extension field contains the tokens that send technical
report #3.
Extension Field: @P(G1)>('C:/FAX/TECH3')G(1005)
DND:
OFF
Store Messages: NO
Greeting 1:
The technical report on upgrading voice boards will be
faxed to you.
268
Installing [email protected]
Mailbox 1005 allows the caller to select another document to be faxed or to
end the call (Menu 2 goes to 999). You might prefer to have Menu 2 return to
the caller instructions mailbox 991.
Extension Field: blank
DND:
ON
Store Messages: NO
Greeting 1:
To request an additional document, press 1; to exit,
press 2.
Menu 1:
1004
Menu 2:
999
NOTE: All the quotation marks in these token examples are single
quotation marks (although double quotation marks can be
used). Forward slashes are used (although double backward
slashes \\ can also be used with this token).
IVR and Voice Form Applications
This section provides guidelines for writing effective IVR (Interactive Voice
Response) and voice form applications. It also provides examples of how to
use Amanda’s menus, greetings, and messages as well as the Q(), M(), R(),
and P() commands from Amanda’s Token Programming Language.
Before you start, determine whether your application will be used by
infrequent users, expert users, or both.
You might need to design a training mode (which explains the choices—
perhaps using a different voice for the explanations) and an expert mode
(which offers minimal explanation).
Consider using short-cut options that allow expert users to access
information more quickly.
Also think about the average user’s vocabulary and familiarity with similar
systems as well as the type of telephone he will use and the location from
which he will probably call. For example, don’t use technical terms with
non-technical users. If you expect users to call from pay telephones, the
noise around them might make voice response a poor choice.
Chapter 16: Programming Examples
269
Making the User Comfortable
To make users feel that they are in control of the application rather than at
the mercy of it, the greetings should perform the following tasks in order:
1.
Identify the company or service so that the user can determine whether
he has placed his call correctly.
2.
Identify the application as non-human so that the user does not expect
human interaction.
For example, avoid personal pronouns in phrases. Use “Please enter the
number” rather than “tell me the number.”
3.
If necessary, separate callers using touch-tone telephones from those
using dial-pulse telephones.
Use something similar to “If you are calling from a touch-tone phone,
please press 1 now. Otherwise, please remain on the line. An attendant
will help you.”
4.
Early on the first menu, offer the user access to a human attendant.
5.
Offer access to a human attendant and call termination on each menu
level.
6.
Customize the greetings for the user.
For example, if the user has only three of the five services you offer,
never offer him the option of adding the services that he already has or
the option of canceling the services that he does not have.
Using Greetings
The greetings used in your application will fall into the following categories:
•
•
•
Menus that list options from which the users make selections
Requests for responses
Informational—providing answers to users’ requests or other user
feedback
270
Installing [email protected]
Using Menus
As you create your menus, do the following:
•
•
Find logical topics for menus
Offer topics in order: most likely to be selected to least likely. Make
an exception to this rule when the topic itself contains a number.
For example, use “To order the Series 3, press 3” rather than “To order
the Series 3, press 1”—even when your most popular sales item is Series
3.
•
Limit the number of options on each menu. If a menu contains more
than eight options (including reaching an attendant, returning to previous menu, and exiting), break this menu into submenus.
Word your menus carefully using the following suggestions:
•
State the result before the action.
For example, use “For Accounts Payable, press 1” rather than “Press 1
for Accounts Payable.”
•
Be consistent from option to option and menu to menu.
For example, use “Please make your selection now” on each menu level
to indicate that all the menu options have been offered.
•
•
Use “Press” for a single-digit response or “Enter” for multi-digit response.
Say the number on a key rather than a letter on that key—even if the
letter is more significant.
For example, say “Press 3” rather than “Press F.”
Making Requests
Requests to users fall into the following categories:
•
•
•
Request for single-digit response (such as 1 for Yes or 2 for No)
Request for multi-digit response such as a telephone or credit card
number
Group of questions that comprise a voice form
For example, you might ask the user a series of questions, the answers to
which are essentially the fields on a paper form. These voice responses
are saved as messages.
Chapter 16: Programming Examples
271
For single-digit responses, you can use a greeting as a menu.
For multi-digit responses, you can use the R() command to convert the
DTMF tones to an ASCII number.
For voice forms, you can use the Q() command to save the responses for up
to 20 questions as a message.
Word your requests carefully using the following suggestions:
•
Use consistent wording.
For example, use “Please” to indicate that a request is coming.
•
Make it clear what type of input is expected from the user (keypad
input or voice response).
For example, use “At the tone, please say your last name” or “On your
touch-tone phone, please enter the letters of your last name.”
•
Use “Press” for single choice, “Enter” for data, and “Say” for voice
response.
For voice response, end the request with “now” or start it with “At
the tone, please say…”—whichever is appropriate.
Providing Information and Feedback
Be sure to provide some type of feedback for every user action and allow
users to reverse unintended operations. For example, you can:
•
Repeat the data provided by the user.
For example, you can use the P() command to play the telephone number stored by the R() command or use the Q() command to give the
caller the opportunity to edit (review, rerecord, append, or cancel)
answers to questions on a voice form.
•
•
Request confirmation.
Play a greeting that indicates that the application has moved on to
the next step.
272
Installing [email protected]
•
•
Repeat the current greeting when there is no response. If there is still
no response, provide a message explaining what is happening and either connect the call to an attendant or disconnect it.
Play an error message, status message, or tone.
Status messages, such has “We are still processing your order” should
play after the first two seconds and then every seven to ten seconds.
For an error message, provide a retry greeting (and perhaps suggest a
remedy) before repeating the current greeting. Be sure to notify the user
when returning to the main menu or transferring the user to an attendant
after an error.
Word your informational greetings carefully using the following
suggestions:
•
Don’t say Standard Time unless you do not shift to Daylight Savings
Time.
For example, on the west coast, say “Pacific Time.”
•
•
•
Be brief. When that is impossible, allow the user to listen to the
greeting again.
When providing a telephone number, always repeat it.
Eliminate unnecessary words.
For example, use “Please press 1 ‘Yes’ or 2 for ‘No’” rather than “Please
press the key with the 1 on it for ‘Yes’ or the key with the 2 on it for
‘No’.”
•
When pairing opposite phrases, use words that sound differently.
For example, avoid pairing Turn On and Turn Off because they sound so
much alike.
•
Don’t use open-ended or ambiguous questions.
For example, use “Do you have your account number?” rather than
“Have your account number ready.”
•
Be polite, non-judgmental, and avoid humor.
For example, use “That password is invalid” rather than “You entered
the password incorrectly.”
Chapter 16: Programming Examples
273
Using the Telephone Keypad
If the users enter their choices via the telephone keypad, follow these
guidelines:
•
Assign keys consistently. This is especially true for Delete and other
destructive options.
For example, don’t use 3 for Delete on one menu and Save on another.
•
•
•
Offer alternates to * and # keys because those keys might be disabled.
Use keys 1 and 2 for the most frequently selected options. Users expect to use the 1 and 2 keys most often.
Avoid using keys 1, 2, 5, and 8 as destructive options.
You might want to avoid 5 and 8 entirely as they are the most errorprone key choices. (These two keys are the only ones with a key in each
direction.)
•
•
•
Use the rows and columns of the keypad effectively.
Use the left column for actions that precede or are lower than others.
Use the right column for actions that follow or are higher than others.
For example use a number in the left column to lower a volume and the
corresponding number in the right column to incrmase a volume.
•
Consider using a key in the top row as a response to a greeting that
says “Go to the top” and a key in the bottom row in response to “Go
to the bottom.”
274
Installing [email protected]
Choosing Tokens
A number of commands from the Token Programming Language make IVR
easier and voice forms possible.
To present a menu for your caller, you can use:
•
•
The menu fields associated with the mailbox. The mailbox allows
the caller to enter either a one-digit response to the menu or another
mailbox. Amanda waits long enough to be sure that the caller has finished. (For this method, turn Do Not Disturb ON.)
The M() command. In this case, Amanda waits for only one digit. It
is faster that using menu fields, but it does not allow the caller to enter a mailbox with more than one digit. (For this method, turn Do Not
Disturb OFF.)
To convert the DTMF (or touch) tones entered by the caller into a number,
use:
•
The R() command, which stores a number in a variable.
To play a greeting or play back the number stored by the R() command, use:
•
The P() command. This command has many variations. See the “Token Reference” on page 196 for details.
To play up to 20 questions (from greetings) and store the answers as a single
message, use:
•
The Q() command, which also allows the caller to edit the responses.
Using Tokens
This example describes parts of an application that records consumer
reactions to sample products. For example, hair stylists may be mailed
information about a line of new hair care products.
If interested, a stylist can call an 800 number to request a sample of one of
them. The sample is mailed along with product literature and a test ID that
uniquely identifies the stylist with the product.
Chapter 16: Programming Examples
275
After using the product, the stylist calls again to answer a series of questions.
For services rendered, the stylist is mailed a small fee or a free case of the
product.
Later, the survey company analyzes the data and reports back to the
manufacturer. The application has two parts:
•
•
Gathering information about a potential tester, such as name, address, telephone number, and the product to be sent
Quizzing the testers about the product
The tester information part (explained in “Gathering Testing Information” on
page 276) uses:
•
•
•
•
•
Menus using the M() command and 0 to reach a live attendant at any
time.
The P() command to play a general greeting.
The R() command to request a telephone number, convert the DTMF
tones entered by the stylist, and store the telephone number in a variable.
The |() command (that’s the pipe command or vertical bar command) to add data about the stylist to a database file.
A series of greetings that ask for the parts of an address. The Q()
command plays the greetings and allows the stylist to edit the responses before they are saved as a message.
The quiz part (not explained) uses:
•
•
•
•
Menus using the M() command, using 0 to reach a live attendant at
any time.
The R() command to request the test ID, convert the DTMF tones
entered by the stylist, and store the ID in a variable.
The N() command to look up the test ID in a database file. The database determines what set of questions to ask the stylist. It also contains a field indicating how many calls have come in using this test
ID. Only one call should come in for each ID. If a stylist never calls
in, an employee can call that person. If a stylist calls more than once
(hoping for extra free cases of the product or whatever), an employee talks to the stylist personally, assuming some error has occurred.
The Q() command to play a series of questions (greetings), allows
the stylist to edit the responses, and stores the set of responses as a
message.
276
Installing [email protected]
Gathering Testing Information
Mailbox 880 handles all calls coming in on the 800 number and immediately
passes the call to the caller instructions mailbox 881 (via the Done Chain).
Mailbox 881 has:
Extension Field: @M(G1,2,30)G(0)
Amanda plays the menu in Greeting 1. If there is no response from the caller, Amanda plays Greeting 1 again
after a three-second pause. If there is still no response,
Amanda executes the next token in the Extension field
(which goes to the operator).
DND:
OFF
Store Messages: NO
Greeting 1:
To become one of our testers, press 1. If you are already one of our testers and you want to answer a product questionnaire, press 2….
Menu 1:
1000
Menu 2:
2000
Menu 0:
0
Mailbox 1000 has:
Extension Field: @P(G1)Q(G2,G3,G4,G5,G6,G7,
G1#1001,E)R(G2#1001,%S1,30)G(1001)
Amanda plays Greeting 1 from mailbox 1000 to welcome the tester and to give an overview of the process.
Then Amanda asks for the stylist’s mailing address using a series of greetings and recording the answers as
one message.
Next Amanda asks for a telephone number and stores
it as a variable (%S1).
(It would be a good idea to play this number back to the
stylist and allow reentry, but this example does not do
that. See how this is done in “Two-call Faxback” on
page 265.)
Finally, the call is transferred to mailbox 1001.
DND:
OFF
Store Messages: YES
Chapter 16: Programming Examples
277
Greeting 1: Welcome to….
Greeting 2: Please say your last name now.
Greeting 3: Please say your first name and middle
initial now.
Greeting 4: Please say the name of your business
now.
Greeting 5: Please say your street address now.
Greeting 6: Please say your zip code now.
Greeting 7: Please say the name of your city now.
Greeting 1 of mailbox 1001: Please say the name of your state now.
Greeting 2 of mailbox 1001: Please use your telephone keypad to enter a daytime telephone number where
we can reach you if necessary. Please
start now.
Mailbox 1001 has:
Extension Field: @=(%S2,%M(1000))M(G3,2,30)G(0)
%M[1000] is the number of messages stored in mailbox 1000. Amanda stores this number in a variable
(%S2). This message number becomes associated with
the stylist for the duration of the survey.
Then Amanda plays the menu in Greeting 3. If there is
no response from the caller, Amanda plays Greeting 3
again after a three-second pause. If there is still no response, Amanda executes the next token in the Extension field (which goes to the operator).
NOTE: Using the message number to uniquely identify
the tester works only because no messages will be
deleted from mailbox 1000 until after the survey.
If you will have more messages than disk space,
keep a number in another file. Read the number
using the [() command, increment it by one with
the +() command, and write the new number (for
the next tester) back to the file using the ]() command.
DND:
OFF
Store Messages: NO
278
Installing [email protected]
Greeting 3:
Please select one of the following products….
Menu 1:
1002
Menu 2:
1003
… other menu options …
Menu 0:
0
Mailboxes 1002, 1003, … have:
Extension Field: @=(%S3,%S2)+(10000,%S3)
|(C:\\TESTERS\\TESTX.TXT)P(G1)G(999)
Next Amanda makes a copy (%S3) of the message
number (which identifies the stylist) and adds 10000
(or some other product differentiating number) to it.
This becomes the test ID.
Then Amanda appends the stylist’s telephone number
(%S1), message number (%S2), and product number
(%S3) to a database file (C:\TESTERS\TESTX.TXT).
Finally, Amanda plays Greeting 1 from the current
mailbox and hangs up. (It would be a good idea to have
the user verify that the stylist did indeed want this
product or return to mailbox 1001, but this example
does not do that. You would play a greeting naming the
product and ask the stylist to confirm, similar to reconfirming the telephone number in Example 4.)
DND:
OFF
Store Messages: NO
Greeting 3:
Thank you for agreeing to test product such-and-such.
You will be receiving…within 10 days. Please try the
product and call this system again to answer a few
questions about it….
Chapter 17:
Installing the Clients
Installing from Various Platforms
Now that the Amanda Voice Server is up and running properly, you may
enable each workstation to access [email protected]/DOS by loading
the Amanda Clients.
You can install the Amanda Clients by going from desk to desk with the
installation disks, or you can copy the software onto a network file server
and then install it on each workstation from the file server.
There are two client installation disks. One contains the installation files for
the user clients: Amanda Messenger, Amanda Dialer, and Amanda Fax. For
more information about these clients, see [email protected]/DOS
Workstation Features.
The other installation disk contains the installation files for the administrator
clients: Amanda Administrator and Amanda Monitor. For more information
about these clients, see Administering [email protected]/DOS.
NOTE: The Amanda Company recommends that you install only
the User client programs onto the network file server. As an
extra level of security, the Administration client programs
should be installed only from the installation disk to authorized system administration personnel.
280
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Installing from a File Server
To copy the users’ client files to the file server:
1.
Insert the [email protected]/DOS Users disk into the floppy drive.
2.
Create a directory to store these files on the network drive using File
Manager or Windows Explorer.
3.
Copy the contents of the floppy drive to that directory.
You may need to contact your network system administrator for assistance.
To install the users’ client files from the file server:
1.
If any previously installed Amanda Clients are running, close them.
2.
Access the network drive.
3.
Open the directory where the clients are stored.
4.
Double-click SETUP.EXE.
5.
Follow the directions on the screen.
Installing from a Floppy Drive on Windows 3.11
To install either user or administrator clients:
1.
If any previously installed Amanda Clients are running, close them.
2.
Insert the appropriate [email protected]/DOS installation disk into
the floppy drive.
3.
From the Program Manager, select File and then Run.
4.
At the Command Line, type A:SETUP then click OK.
Chapter 17: Installing the Clients
5.
281
Follow the directions given by the setup program to finish the installation process.
Unless modified by the installer, the directory C:\AMACLNTS stores
the clients.
After the installation, an Amanda icon appears in Program Manager.
The Amanda group displays all the clients installed on this workstation.
Installing from a Floppy Drive on Windows 95
To install either user or administrator clients:
1.
If any previously installed Amanda Clients are running, close them.
2.
Insert the appropriate [email protected]/DOS installation disk into
the floppy drive.
3.
Select the Start button and then select Run.
4.
At the Command Line, type A:SETUP then click OK.
5.
Follow the directions given by the setup program to finish the installation process.
Unless modified by the installer, the directory C:\AMACLNTS contains
the clients.
The Amanda group of clients appears in the Programs section of the
Start menu. The Amanda group contains all the clients installed on this
workstation.
282
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Adding Client Connections
Now that users have the [email protected]/DOS clients, you must add
the appropriate number of Client Connections to the Amanda Voice Server.
Only one client connection comes with Amanda Voice Server. If you add no
client connections, only one client can access the voice server at a time.
Adding client connections requires a Client Connection Bank (CCB) with at
least as many connections as you wish to install at this site.
COM1
VGA Card
432
Modem
COM2
CCB
To Printer Port
Voice Board
Chapter 17: Installing the Clients
283
To add client connections:
1.
If Amanda is running, shut down the Amanda system and turn the
computer off.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
Press Alt+S (if Amanda is running as a standalone) or s (if
Amanda is running as a voice server).
Type in the password. (The default is AMandA with only the
first two and the last letter capitalized.)
Press Enter.
Press Y (to confirm the shutdown).
Press Y again (to reconfirm).
When you reach the DOS prompt C:\AMANDA>, turn the computer off.
Next, attach the CCB to the parallel port on the back of Amanda Voice
Server.
The CCB contains a number of Client Connections, some (or all) of
which can be transferred to this Voice Server.
3.
Turn Amanda Voice Server on.
During the start up process, the system asks:
Do you want to run [email protected]/DOS? Press Y or N
4.
Press Y for Yes.
Amanda detects the CCB and asks for the number of connections to be
added to this Voice Server.
5.
Enter the requested number and follow the prompts to turn off the computer and remove the CCB.
6.
After removing the CCB, turn Amanda Voice Server back on.
7.
During the start up process, the system asks:
Do you want to run [email protected]/DOS? Press Y or N
284
Installing [email protected]/DOS
8.
Press Y for Yes.
9.
This brings Amanda Voice Server and the appropriate number of client
connections online.
Reviewing Client Connections
Each time a user logs onto Amanda Messenger or Amanda Dialer, or the
system administrator logs onto Amanda Administrator or Monitor, he
acquires a client connection. When he logs off, the client connection is
returned to the pool and is available for the next person who logs on. As
more users are added to Amanda, some users may not be able to log on
because all client connections are in use.
To display the maximum number of clients Amanda is configured for:
1.
Run Amanda Monitor.
2.
On the File menu, click Copy….
The Copy dialog box appears.
Chapter 17: Installing the Clients
285
3.
Type C:\AMANDA\INSTALL.CFG.
4.
Select the Voice Server option button to indicate the location of the file.
5.
Indicate the name and location of the file to be created.
If the file is on your workstation (or network), you can click Browse…
to locate the file.
6.
Select the Local option button to indicate the location of the new file.
7.
Click Copy.
If the file already exists, the Confirm File Replace dialog box appears.
8.
9.
Do one of the following:
•
To replace the existing file, click Yes.
•
To preserve the existing file, click No and type a unique name for
your file in the Copy dialog box.
When “File copy completed” appears at the bottom of the Copy dialog
box, click Cancel.
10. View the file using a text editor.
The value for n_clients is the maximum number of clients the Amanda
server currently accepts. Do not edit this value and recopy install.cfg to
the voice server. Changing this value will corrupt the file.
286
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Chapter 18:
Configuration Reference
General Options
Configuration Option
Description
abbreviate_dates
Controls how Amanda says the date for a message dated today or yesterday.
True or False. The default is True.
When True, Amanda says “today” or “yesterday” instead of the actual date, for example, “November 27th , 1996.”
When False, Amanda says only the actual date, such as “November 27th , 1996.”
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set abbreviate_dates true
abbreviate_greeting
Allows you to shorten the system greeting.
True or False. The default is False.
When True, Amanda says, “Please leave a message at the tone.” This is the shortened version of the system greeting.
When False, Amanda says, “Please leave a message for” followed by the name and
extension recording. This is the usual default version of the system greeting.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set abbreviate_greeting false
activation_key
A number you receive from your Amanda Company sales representative to activate
your system. You must set this option if one or more of your voice boards were not
purchased from The Amanda Company.
If you change or add a board later, you need another activation key because the key
is based on the serial numbers for all of the boards and the total number of ports.
The default is 0, which means there is no activation key.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set activation_key 0
288
Installing [email protected]/DOS
General Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
active_hold
When the extension is busy, the caller can hold for the called party—actively or inactively.
True or False. The default is True.
When True, Amanda is set up for active hold. The caller must continually indicate
that he wants to remain on hold. Failure to continue to press * when prompted indicates that the caller is no longer interested in holding. If he doesn’t enter another extension, he is asked for a message. Active hold is best for 800 numbers, support
lines, or when Amanda is used as an Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) device. It
prevents a caller from pressing * to go on hold and staying on hold indefinitely without further interaction. The caller presses * to go on hold and must press * periodically to stay on hold.
When False, Amanda is set up for inactive hold. The caller indicates that he wants
to be on hold only once. If the caller does nothing, Amanda retries the extension
until it is no longer busy. The caller can also enter another extension or press * to
leave a message. In this case, the user uses * to go on hold and * to leave a message.
See also auto_queue.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set active_hold true
adpcm_hq
Sets the sampling rate for outgoing greetings. The higher the sampling rate, the better the sound quality, but also the more disk space used.
24, 32, or 64. The default (and recommended value) is 64.
NOTE: If you change this on an active system, all previously recorded outgoing
greetings need to be re-recorded.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set adpcm_hq 64
adpcm_nq
Sets the sampling rate for incoming messages. The higher the sampling rate, the better the sound quality, but also the more disk space used.
24, 32, or 64. The default (and recommended value) is 32.
NOTE: If you change this on an active system, you should have users delete all
their messages first.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set adpcm_nq 32
Chapter 18: Configuration Reference
289
General Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
adpcm_pq
Sets the sampling rate for the system prompt file. This is set to the sampling rate at
which the system prompt file was recorded.
24, 32, or 64. Correctly set by default.
NOTE: Do not change this unless you have installed the appropriate system prompt
file.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set adpcm_pq x
where x is the correct setting for your prompt files.
advertising
Displays a text string at different locations on the Main screen after the screen saver
starts up. (This option does not apply to Amanda voice server.)
Use any text string ranging from 0 to 79 characters. The recommended length is less
than 30 characters so your message is easy to read and fits on the screen at most locations. 'Buy more AMandAs!' is the default.
See also tmo_blank.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set advertising 'Buy more Amandas!'
ati_mode
Allows Amanda to be used with a Brooktrout x000 board and an ATI board. An ATI
board requires a version 7.x Brooktrout driver.
True or False. The default is false.
When True, Amanda makes the connections needed for the ATI board.
When False, Amanda does not make the ATI connections.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set ati_mode false
CAUTION: RTNI-xATI voice boards cannot detect rotary. If you use an RTNIxATI voice board, you must leave the rotary configuration option set to
false.
290
Installing [email protected]/DOS
General Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
auto_queue
Designed for callers with rotary telephones so that they can be put “on hold” without
having to press *.
True or False. The default is False.
If True and if active_hold is False, callers are automatically put “on hold” when they
reach a busy extension. A custom busy message must explain what’s going on so
that callers are aware that they are “on hold” and that they can dial other extensions—if they prefer.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set auto_queue false
auto_report
The name of a previously saved report file in the RPT.DB subdirectory within the
AMANDA directory which can be executed and printed once each day. When not
set, no auto reporting is done.
Use the name of a report file with the extension .RPT. The default is an empty string
which means that no report file is executed.
To use this feature, verify the following:
•
•
•
A printer with a parallel interface must be connected to Amanda
The parameter lpt_port must be set to 1, indicating the port to
which the printer is attached
The printer must be online and have enough paper
See also auto_report_time and lpt_port.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set auto_report ''
auto_report_time
The time of day at which the report is to be printed (when auto_report is not an empty string).
A time of day in 24-hour MMHH format. The default is 0745 (7:45 a.m.).
See also auto_report and lpt_port.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set auto_report_time 0745
Chapter 18: Configuration Reference
291
General Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
begin_rec_prompt
When record_menu is True, this option controls whether the caller hears Amanda
prompts or only a beep when recording a message. This option has no effect on the
post-record menu. If the caller presses #, the post-record menu indicates how to rerecord, append to, or save a recording.
True or False. The default is True.
When True, Amanda plays, “Begin recording at the tone, finish by pressing # or
hanging up” before the beep.
When False, the caller hears only a beep.
See also record_menu and end_rec_menu.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set begin_rec_prompt true
busycycles
Minimum number of non-ringback cycles necessary before the Brooktrout driver
notifies Amanda that the extension is busy.
The default is 2 cycles. The range is 0 to 20. 0 means do not change the current
Brooktrout setting (which is also 2 cycles).
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set busycycles 2
ca_file
The file (in the C:\AMANDA directory) which stores call accounting (SMDR) data
that comes from the port in ca_port. The data is collected from the telephone switching system, stored while Amanda runs, and then (after a shutdown) read by a call
accounting package that analyzes and manipulates the data.
Use any filename. The default is 'SMDR.DAT'.
See also ca_port.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set ca_file 'SMDR.DAT'
ca_port
The number for the logical serial port that will read SMDR data from the switch
while Amanda is running. The data is stored in the file specified by ca_file unless
the number is 0, in which case no SMDR data is read.
Use 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4. The default is 0.
See also ca_file.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set ca_port 0
292
Installing [email protected]/DOS
General Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
cancel_busy_hold
Determines whether callers can hold for a busy extension.
True or False. The default is False.
When True, busy becomes equivalent to Ring No Answer (RNA). That means that
the caller cannot hold for a busy extension and can only leave a message once RNA
or BUSY is the state of the called extension (assuming the mailbox accepts messages).
When False, the caller can press * to hold for a busy extension.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set cancel_busy_hold false
clock_sync
Controls whether Amanda resynchronizes the DOS software clock with the PC
hardware clock.
True or False. The default is True.
When True, Amanda resynchronizes.
When False, Amanda does not resynchronize. Turn this off if you have another utility that controls the PC clock.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set clock_sync true
cmt_maxlen
Sets the total number of seconds allowed for recording a List Comment. The user
can record a comment while creating a mailing list or later. It names or describes the
contents of the list.
Number of seconds. The range is from 1 to 99. The default is 10.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set cmt_maxlen 10
connect_tone
When an answer is detected and Amanda is not identifying the called party for the
current mailbox, this option determines whether Amanda plays a beep. (On the Standalone system, the mailbox’s ID Call? field is set to NO, and on the Administrator
client, the mailbox’s Identify Called Party check box is cleared.)
True or False. The default is True.
When True, Amanda plays the beep.
When False, there is no beep.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set connect_tone true
Chapter 18: Configuration Reference
293
General Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
create_locked
Controls whether or not new mailboxes are locked when the mailbox template (usually mailbox 997) is locked. The administrator (using mailbox 999 and the telephone) can lock the template (and other mailboxes) using one of the system
administration options. This prevents callers from logging into the mailbox template.
True or False. The default is False.
When True, new mailboxes created from the template are initially locked if the template is locked.
When False, new mailboxes are not locked. This means that they can be logged into
via the telephone immediately after they are created.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set create_locked false
db_locking
Makes Amanda lock each record in a file as it is accessed. No other port or program
can access that record of that file. This is used within the context of using tokens to
read and write to ASCII or dBase files.
The value is 0 or 1. The default is 0.
When 0, Amanda does not perform record locking.
When 1, Amanda attempts to perform record locking which will fail unless
SHARE.EXE, a DOS program (not licensed via The Amanda Company), is running.
This program is usually loaded by the CONFIG.SYS or AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set db_locking 0
defaults_box
Indicates what mailbox to use as a template when creating a new mailbox. The contents of most fields, all notification records, and all automatic scheduling records are
copied from the template to the new mailbox. The Comment and Directory Name
fields are not copied. The Extension field is copied only if it begins with an @
(which indicates token programming).
If the Security Code field of the default mailbox is blank, the security codes for new
mailboxes are their mailbox numbers. Otherwise, the security codes for all new
mailboxes are the same as that of the template mailbox. The Security Code field always appears blank. You must fill it with spaces if you want it to actually be blank.
Use any valid mailbox. The default is 997.
See also guest_defaults.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set defaults_box 997
294
Installing [email protected]/DOS
General Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
diskwarn
When Amanda has only the specified percentage of disk space left, she executes
Disk notification record (if there is one) for mailbox 999. The notification record
may call you at home, call your extension, call your pager, and so forth. For example, use 20 to have Amanda notify you when the remaining disk space falls below
20.
Number (for a percentage). The range is from 1 to 99. The default is 20.
See also tmo_disk.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set diskwarn 20
dl_pickup_on_ring
When an inbound ring is detected and Amanda goes off-hook, this option determines whether Amanda dials the code specified by the dl_pickup parameter in the
1001.PBX file or the current dial codes file for that port.
True or False. The default is False.
When True, Amanda dials the code.
When False, Amanda does not dial the code.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set dl_pickup_on_ring false
Chapter 18: Configuration Reference
295
General Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
dtmf_action
dtmf_busy
dtmf_dnd
dtmf_ring
dtmf_xfer
tmo_xfer
The dtmf_action, dtmf_busy, dtmf_dnd, dtmf_ring, dtmf_xfer, and
tmo_xfer, parameters are required only for telephone switching systems,
such as Comdial DXP and Panasonic KXT-D, that can send DTMF tones in
place of PCPM tones.
For Comdial DXP, The Amanda Company recommends dtmf_action=1,
dtmf_busy='2', dtmf_dnd='3', and dtmf_xfer='1'. (It sends nothing for a
ring—dtmf_ring=''.) tmo_xfer=50 and tmo_rna=25 have been recommended.
For Panasonic KXT-D, The Amanda Company recommends
dtmf_action=1, dtmf_ring='1', dtmf_busy='2', dtmf_dnd='4', dtmf_xfer='5',
and tmo_xfer=20.
tmo_xfer is the number of tenths of seconds that Amanda waits to read a
sequence of DTMF digits from the port prior to doing PCPM. The range is
0 to 255. The default is 0, which disables this and the following parameters.
(If this parameter is blank, the default is used.)
If the tmo_xfer timeout is greater than 0, Amanda waits for digits until the
timeout occurs.
The digits the system might read are:
dtmf_xfer
This sequence of digits means that the extension has been
answered. Amanda releases the call. The default is an empty string (no digit).
NOTE:
The telephone switching system should
bring the call back to the port if this digit
is sent when the phone is ringing rather
than actually answered.
CAUTION:
When using call screening, be aware that
this will play the caller's name and company as well as the call screening menu to a
ringing tone.
dtmf_dnd
This sequence of digits means that the extension is in Do
Not Disturb mode. Amanda treats the call as though it were
not answered (RNA). The default is an empty string (no
digit).
dtmf_busy
This sequence of digits means that the extension is busy so
Amanda performs no PCPM. The default is an empty
296
Installing [email protected]/DOS
General Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
(cont.)
dtmf_action
dtmf_busy
dtmf_dnd
dtmf_ring
dtmf_xfer
tmo_xfer
dtmf_ring
This sequence of digits causes Amanda to stop waiting or
to extend her wait, depending on the value of dtmf_action.
The default is an empty string (no digit).
no digit
If Amanda reads no sequence of digits before the tmo_xfer
timeout occurs, the system stops waiting or extends her
wait, depending on the value of dtmf_action.
The dtmf_action parameter determines what Amanda does if the system receives the digits specified in dtmf_ring or if the timeout specified by
tmo_xfer occurs before the digits arrive.
When 0 (the default), Amanda performs normal PCPM.
When 1, Amanda continues to wait for the digits. The system waits 6 seconds for each of the rings specified for a Ring No Answer (RNA). For example, if the mailbox has 4 rings for RNA, Amanda waits 24 seconds. Then
the system decides that the call is not answered.
For COMDIAL, see also dtmf_dt.
The defaults appear in install.cfg as:
set dtmf_action 0
set dtmf_busy ''
set dtmf_dnd ''
set dtmf_ring ''
set dtmf_xfer ''
set tmo_xfer 10
dtmf_before_ring
Controls whether Amanda clears the voice board’s DTMF buffer when a ring is detected. Clearing the buffer gets rid of digits left over from a previous call.
True or False. The default is False.
When True, the buffer is not cleared. Make sure the telephone switching system can
send DTMF before a ring prior to changing this to True.
When False, Amanda clears the buffer when a ring is detected. You must use False
for Brooktrout 2132 and 4132 because they cannot detect DTMF while on-hook.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set dtmf_before_ring false
dtmf_busy
This option is required only for telephone switching systems, such as Comdial DXP
and Panasonic KXT-D, that can send DTMF tones in place of PCPM tones. See also
dtmf_action.
Chapter 18: Configuration Reference
297
General Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
dtmf_dnd
This option is required only for telephone switching systems, such as Comdial DXP
and Panasonic KXT-D, that can send DTMF tones in place of PCPM tones. See also
dtmf_action.
dtmf_detect
How long a DTMF tone must play for Amanda to recognize that it has occurred.
Number from 2 to 6, each representing 16 ms. (For example, 3 equals 48 ms or .048
seconds.) The default is 0.
Zero means to use the default. The default is 3 (.048 seconds).
When non-zero, both Brooktrout’s DTMFDetect and DTMFDelay channel parameters are set to that value.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set dtmf_detect 0
dtmf_dly
Controls the amount of time between DTMF tones when Amanda is dialing.
Number of hundredths of seconds. The value is 0 or a number from 3 to 19. The default is 10 (which is 100 milliseconds).
Using a value of 0 makes it country-dependent (50ms in the US, 80ms in the UK).
When non-zero, the specified time is used.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set dtmf_dly 10
dtmf_dt
The string of DTMF digits received instead of a dial tone. For example, COMDIAL
sends a '1'.
The string can be any length. The default is an empty string which means that Amanda waits for the dial tone.
If dtmf_dt is not an empty string, and if tmo_dtwait (the dial code that determines
how long to wait for a dial tone or its equivalent) is > 0, Amanda dials dl_dtwait (the
dial code that puts the caller on transfer hold) and then waits for the dtmf_dt digits
to come from the switch.
If Amanda receives fewer digits or if the digits do not match dtmf_dt, Amanda assumes the extension is busy. If Amanda receives the expected digits, she proceeds
with the call. As soon as Amanda receives the correct number of digits, she stops
waiting regardless of the value of tmo_dtwait. Therefore, it should be safe to make
tmo_dtwait substantially larger than the actual time expected.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set dtmf_dt ''
298
Installing [email protected]/DOS
General Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
dtmf_gate
Verifies that the caller is still on the line before transferring him to the operator. This
applies only if the mailbox (usually the operator) specified in the Done Chain for the
Caller Instructions mailbox has Do Not Disturb turned off.
True or False. The default is False.
When True, Amanda verifies that the caller is still on the line after playing the Caller
Instructions and not hearing any DTMF. Amanda asks the caller to “Say ‘yes’ at the
tone” before transferring the call. For example, on telephone switching systems that
do not have disconnect supervision, this can prevent the transfer of a call to the operator or prevent the replaying of a menu when the caller has hung up.
When False, Amanda transfers the call without verifying that the caller is still on the
line.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set dtmf_gate false
dtmf_on
Controls how long Amanda plays each DTMF tone.
Number in hundredths of seconds. The range is from 10 to 90. The default is 20 (.2
seconds).
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set dtmf_on 20
dtmf_ring
This option is required only for telephone switching systems, such as Comdial DXP
and Panasonic KXT-D, that can send DTMF tones in place of PCPM tones. See also
dtmf_action.
dtmf_xfer
This option is required only for telephone switching systems, such as Comdial DXP
and Panasonic KXT-D, that can send DTMF tones in place of PCPM tones. See also
dtmf_action.
end_rec_menu
When record_menu is True, this option determines whether the caller hears the postrecord menu that allows callers or users to review or re-record their messages or
greetings.
True or False. The default is True.
When True, the caller or user hears the menu.
When False, the caller or user does not hear the menu.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set end_rec_menu true
Chapter 18: Configuration Reference
299
General Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
exit_digit
Defines one additional DTMF tone that causes Amanda to stop during recordings
(whether greetings or messages) and play the post-record menu.
The range is from 0 to 9 and also includes * and #. The default is '#'. Remember that
the # key always causes Amanda to stop recording, even when it is not the value of
exit_digit.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set exit_digit '#'
exit_to_0
Allows a caller to leave a message and talk to the operator afterwards.
True or False. The default is True.
When True, the caller can press 0 after recording a message and is transferred to
mailbox 0.
When False, Amanda records the DTMF 0 as part of the message unless 0 is defined
as an exit digit (see exit_digit).
NOTE: Regardless of the setting for exit_to_0, a caller can press 0 during the “Begin recording at the tone...” prompt and go to mailbox 0 immediately. If the
caller presses any other key (1-9, #, *), Amanda stops the prompt, plays the
beep, and starts recording the message.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set exit_to_0 true
future_delivery
Specifies the mailbox that stores messages to be delivered in the future. This mailbox must be able to store messages.
The default is 995, but you can use any valid mailbox. -1 means no mailbox has been
assigned.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set future_delivery 995
gain_loud
Controls the volume of the custom busy message.
Number. The range is from -8 to 8 and the default is 0.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set gain_loud 0
gain_norm
The initial volume for all ports.
Number. The range is from -8 to 8 and the default is 0.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set gain_norm 0
300
Installing [email protected]/DOS
General Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
guest_defaults
The mailbox to use as a template when creating a new guest mailbox.
The default is 996, but you can use any valid mailbox. -1 means no mailbox has been
assigned.
See also defaults_box which explains what fields are copied.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set guest_defaults 996
guest_min
The starting mailbox for guest mailboxes. If this value is 90000, the first guest mailbox is 90000. The second is 90001, and so forth.
See also guest_max. Guest_max must be larger than guest_min.
Any valid mailbox. The default is 90000.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set guest_min 90000
guest_max
The last mailbox for guest mailboxes. If this value is 90199, the highest possible
number for a guest mailbox is 90199. Along with the guest_min, you limit the number of guest mailboxes that Amanda can create. Guest_max must be larger than
guest_min.
A valid mailbox. The default is 90199.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set guest_max 90199
integration_greeting
Determines what greeting plays for integrated calls that have both rrr and sss (or rrrr
and ssss) fields set. (The r’s indicate the number of digits in the extension of the user
who was called but did not answer. The s’s indicate the number of digits in the extension of the user who made the call. See “Using Character Codes” on page 84 for
more information.)
True or False. The default is True.
When True, Amanda plays the RNA greeting for the mailbox identified by rrr.
When False, Amanda plays the system greeting.
In either case, a message is taken for rrr from sss.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set integration_greeting true
Chapter 18: Configuration Reference
301
General Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
integration_term
A one-character string containing the character that terminates DTMF input. The default is the empty string. When Amanda sees the character that matches
integration_term, she terminates the integration input.
This can be used to speed up slow systems. The terminating character is not removed
from the input, so be sure that your integration patterns include it or allow for it.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set integration_term ''
irq
The IRQ over which the voice board communicates with the Amanda system.
The default is 7. The range is 0-15, but do not change this setting unless instructed
to by an Amanda Company employee. Most IRQs are unavailable because they are
used by PC components.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set irq 7
lcoff
The minimum necessary duration of loop current off before the voice board driver
recognizes that the loop current is off. Corresponds to the Brooktrout global parameter LcOff.
Number of hundredths of seconds (from 1 to 6553) or the number -1 or 0. For example 10 is .1 second. The default is -1.
When 0, the voice board’s default is used. The default is .1 seconds.
When -1, there is no wait.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set lcoff -1
lcvalid
The length of time that the voice board driver ignores loop current transition events
(on, off, and drop) after starting PCPM. Corresponds to the Brooktrout channel parameter LcValid.
Number of hundredths of seconds (from 1 to 255) or the number -1 or 0. For example
10 is .1 second. The default is 0.
When 0, the voice board’s default is used. The default is 4 seconds.
When -1, this option is disabled and no events are ignored.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set lcvalid 0
302
Installing [email protected]/DOS
General Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
lcwait
The minimum time after dialing a digit string before the voice board driver decides
the loop current drop is an answer. Corresponds to the Brooktrout channel parameter
LcWait.
Number of hundredths of seconds (from 1 to 255) or the number -1 or 0. For example
10 is .1 second. The default is 0.
When 0, the voice board’s default is used. The default is 100 ms (.1 seconds).
When -1, this option is disabled and there is no minimum time.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set lcwait 0
list_delay
When a message is sent to a list, this is the delay between deliveries to mailboxes on
the list. It has no effect on direct messaging or future deliveries. Slowing down the
delivery rate makes sending to long lists less likely to slow down the system.
Number of tenths of a second. The default is 10 (which is 1 second). The range is 0
to 255.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set list_delay 10
lognam
The name of the file to be used as the system log file. It is stored in the C:\AMANDA
directory. This log file contains start-up information, any execution error information, DOS errors, disk errors, system actions, and shutdown information.
The default filename is 'AMANDA.LOG'.
NOTE: Since this file grows (slowly), archive or delete it once or twice a year when
you perform preventative maintenance.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set lognam 'AMANDA.LOG'
lpt_port
Number of the printer port to which a printer is attached to Amanda.
The default is 0, which means that no printer is attached.
While a printer can be attached to LPT ports 1, 2, or 3, use 1 for best results and attach the printer to LPT1.
If you use a non-zero value, but no printer is attached, Amanda halts.
See also auto_report and auto_report_time.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set lpt_port 0
Chapter 18: Configuration Reference
303
General Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
max_chain
Controls the number of digits the caller can enter for a mailbox.
For example, if you have a three-digit extension plan, setting this parameter
to 3 allows Amanda to transfer to the mailbox immediately after three digits
have been dialed, instead of waiting for a timeout or the # terminator.
The default is 8, the largest number allowed in [email protected]
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set max_chain 8
max_dl_inits
The number of ports that can go off-hook simultaneously and dial the telephone
switching system initialization code.
The range is from 1 to the number of ports defined for Amanda. The default is 2.
The PBX file option dl_init (What to dial on each port after the system starts) works
on the ports specified here.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set max_dl_inits 2
max_ports
Number of ports in use on the Amanda system. This option needs to be set when the
number of ports available is greater than the number of ports in use. For example, if
you have a four-port voice board but are currently using only three ports, set this option to 3 to ensure that Amanda does not try to use the fourth port.
The default is 24. The range is 1-24. If you are using all the ports that your voice
boards can support, it is OK to have a number here that is greater than the number
of ports you have.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set max_ports 24
max_prompt
The number of times Amanda repeats menu options before hanging up on a user who
is logged in to a mailbox.
Number from 1 to 9. The default is 2.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set max_prompt 2
304
Installing [email protected]/DOS
General Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
minmsg
Amanda requires a minimum length for recorded messages. If a message is shorter
than this, it is not saved. The most common reason for changing this parameter is
when the Q() token is used and short answers are expected. If so, you should change
this to 1 (0.1 seconds.) Otherwise, using a setting that is small results in an increased
number of messages that contain only a hangup sound.
Number of tenths of seconds. The default is 10 (1 sec.).The range is 0 to 65535.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set minmsg 10
minoff
Minimum amount of time necessary for an inbound ring’s off period.
Number of tenths of seconds. The default is 5 (.5 second). The range is 1-655.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set minoff 5
minring
Minimum amount of time necessary for an inbound ring’s on period.
Number of tenths of seconds.
The default is 0 which tells Amanda to use the voice board's default (which is 2 for
Denmark or Holland and 3 elsewhere). Otherwise, the range is 1-655.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set minring 0
Chapter 18: Configuration Reference
305
General Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
modified_call_
screening
When a mailbox has both call screening and called party identification on, this option controls whether Amanda announces only the name and extension of the called
party or both that and the name and company of the caller. This is usually used only
when more than one mailbox calls the same extension.
When call screening is on, Amanda plays the Call Screening menu when the telephone is answered. Then the person who answers can accept some calls and reject
others based on the information that he hears. Amanda treats the rejected calls as
Ring No Answers.
Do not use Call Screening (modified or not) with a mailbox that performs unsupervised (blind) transfers. These transfers have an H in the Extension field (for example, 127H). When the call is unsupervised, no recording is played to the user.
True or False. The default is True.
When True, the person who answers hears the called party’s name and extension recording. Amanda does not ask the caller for a “name and company.”
When False, the person who answers hears both the caller’s name and company and
the called party’s name and extension recording.
The following is an example where John (mailbox 111) and Mary (mailbox 112)
share Extension 100. John is at lunch, and Mary is answering all calls at Extension
100.
The caller enters 111 trying to reach John.
Amanda rings Extension 100 and Mary answers.
Amanda says, “This call is for John, Extension 111. To accept this call, press 1. To
reject this call press 2 and hang up….” Mary presses 2. The caller hears John’s current greeting.
NOTE: If a user wants Amanda to announce only for the caller’s name and company, ID Call? should be NO (on Amanda standalone) or the Identify Called
Party check box should be cleared (in Amanda Administrator for Amanda
Voice Server).
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set modified_call_screening true
306
Installing [email protected]/DOS
General Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
msg_log
Amanda creates the specified file in the C:\AMANDA directory and logs:
The date and time every message is received
The date and time every mailbox is checked for messages along with the DTMF the
user entered.
The default is no filename, which means no log is written to. We recommend using
'MSG.LOG'.
See also user_log.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set msg_log ''
n_ochan
Allows you to dedicate ports to notification. The default is 0 (no dedicated ports). A
positive integer n dedicates the first n ports.
For example, when n_ochan is 2, ports 1 and 2 are dedicated and do not answer incoming calls. When using dedicated notification, be sure to direct incoming calls to
ports 3 and up (in this case).
Dedicated notification eliminates the notification collision (known as glare) caused
when Amanda inadvertently begins a notification on a port receiving an incoming
call. However, you can no longer use the port for incoming calls.
When 0, Amanda does either roving or restricted notification (depending on the value of notify_restriction). With roving notification, Amanda starts with the last port
in the hunt group and works backwards until she locates an idle port. Restricted notification uses only one port, usually the last port in the hunt group. However, that
port is not dedicated to notification. The port can still receive calls.
NOTE: When using roving or restricted notification, program the ports to be in a
linear hunt group (not a circular hunt group).
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set n_ochan 0
nam_maxlen
The maximum number of seconds to allow for recording a mailbox’s name and extension. Amanda plays the name and extension recording to provide callers with information from the employee directory and to identify who is being called.
A number of seconds. The range is from 1 to 99. The default is 5.
See also box_idx and modified_call_screening.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set nam_maxlen 5
Chapter 18: Configuration Reference
307
General Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
new_send
Determines whether a user can send a message to more than one user, when those
users are not part of a single list.
True or False. The default is True.
When True, a user can send a message to several mailboxes “on the fly.” When the
user presses 4 to send a new message, then 1 to select a mailbox destination, Amanda asks for the “next mailbox or the # sign to finish.” When the user presses 3 to
send, or 5 to send with verification, the message is sent to every mailbox that was
entered.
When False, the user can send a message only to one mailbox or to a previously created list of mailboxes.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set new_send true
non_relay_ok
Normally a caller presses ## to end the greeting and leave a message. With this option, the caller can simply press # (unless the mailbox does relay paging which is
activated by the #).
True or False. The default is False.
When True and the mailbox does not have a relay paging notification record, pressing # takes the caller to the end of the greeting.
When False, the caller must press ## to end the greeting.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set non_relay_ok false
notify_restriction
If you specify a port, Amanda restricts notification to that port. However, the port
still takes incoming calls.
Use any port number or 0. 0, the default, means that roving or dedicated notification
is being used instead of restricted notification. You typically use the last port in the
linear hunt group.
You must use this option if you install Amanda on a telephone switching system that
requires the same port to turn message lights both on and off. In this case, roving
notification could cause a message light to come on and stay on.
Restricted notification does not eliminate the possibility of notification collisions
(known as glare).
If notify_restriction is set to an invalid value, Amanda detects that during startup,
resets notify_restriction to the highest port number, and logs that fact. See also
n_ochan.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set notify_restriction 0
308
Installing [email protected]/DOS
General Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
off_dly
Amount of time after a line goes off-hook before the voice board notifies Amanda
that the line is off-hook.
Number of hundredths of seconds. The default is 50 (.5 sec.). The range is 1-6553.
The numbers 0 and -1 have special meanings.
When 0, Amanda uses the voice board's default (which is also 50).
When -1, there is no delay.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set off_dly 50
partial_q_ok
Determines what messages are saved when the Q() command is used to get answers
from a caller.
True or False. The default is False.
When True, Amanda saves a message even if the caller hangs up before answering
all the questions.
When False, Amanda does not save a message using the Q() command unless all the
questions have been answered.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set partial_q_ok false
password
Sets the Amanda password. The password is case-sensitive, so uppercase letters are
different from lowercase letters. That means that AMandA, Amanda, and amanda
all represent different passwords.
Use a text string with a maximum length is 8 characters. The default is AMandA.
If you use the null string (that is, no password), you must use a dealer password to
operate and shut down Amanda.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set password 'AMandA'
Chapter 18: Configuration Reference
309
General Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
PBX
This option is described here in case you decide to change it by editing install.cfg.
(However, setting this option is not recommended.) The PBX option (not to be confused with the pbx option) does not appear in the General Configuration section of
the Setup utility because Setup makes changes to this option automatically. This option indicates a number for a PBX and a name for its .PBX and .TON files.
Setup assigns the number 1 to your first PBX and the number 2 to your second (if
you have a second PBX).
Setup automatically assigns a name (up to 8 characters) to the .PBX and .TON files
that Amanda uses with your telephone switching system. By default, Setup uses
1001 for the first PBX and 2001 for the second. You can use any name in install.cfg,
but it is best to use the defaults. If you must change this option, use a number greater
than 2001 or a non-numeric name.
Amanda's Setup utility provides a list of PBXs. When you select your first telephone
switching system, information about that switch’s known dial codes, integration patterns, and so forth is automatically copied to 1001.PBX. When you select the second, information bout that switch is copied to 2001.PBX.
Then you modify those files to suit your needs.
If you run Setup or Diag to discover tone patterns, the patterns are stored in
1001.TON and 2001.TON respectively.
See also pbx in the Per Port section.
The defaults (which do not start with the word set) appear in install.cfg as:
PBX 1 1001
play_from
When playing your messages, this option controls whether Amanda identifies the
Amanda user who sent (or forwarded) each message.
True or False. The default is False.
When True, Amanda indicates who sent an internal message before she plays the
message. She plays the name and extension recording for the sender (if it exists). She
says the mailbox number (for example, mailbox 1-4-7) when there is no recording.
When False, Amanda only plays the message.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set play_from false
310
Installing [email protected]/DOS
General Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
play_new_first
Determines what message is played next when the user has logged on to his mailbox
to play messages.
True or False. The default is False.
When True, pressing 1 plays the next new message and pressing 75 plays the messages in order, regardless of whether they have been heard.
When False, pressing 1 plays the messages in order and pressing 75 plays the next
new message.
See also urgent_to_front which affects the order of the mailbox’s message.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set play_new_first true
play_skip
The number of seconds to rewind or skip forward during message playback when a
* (rewind) or # (skip forward) is pressed.
The range is from 1 to 99. The default is 5.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set play_skip 5
please_hold
Controls the use of the “Please hold” prompt.
True or False. The default is True.
When True, Amanda says “Please hold while I try that extension” before transferring a caller.
When False, Amanda says nothing and immediately puts the caller on transfer hold.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set please_hold true
product_activation_
key
A number you receive from your Amanda Company sales representative to
activate your system. If one or more of your voice boards were not purchased from The Amanda Company, you must also set activation_key. See
“activation_key” on page 287.
If you change the first board in your system, you need another product activation key because the key is based on the serial number for the first
Amanda Company board.
The default is 0, which means there is no product activation key.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set product_activation_key 0
Chapter 18: Configuration Reference
311
General Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
prompt_file
Specifies the language that Amanda uses when a call first comes in on a given port.
ENGLISH or SPANISH. The default is ENGLISH.
You can change the prompt file for that port “on the fly” using the L() command
from the Token Programming Language. Amanda can also change the language
prompts for that port based on the DTMF sent by the telephone switching system or
the central office.
The ENGLISH.IDX file contains the English prompts. SPANISH.IDX is also available. Please contact your Amanda Marketing Partner, Solution Provider, or sales
representative for more information and pricing.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set prompt_file 'ENGLISH'
purge
Controls how long messages that have been heard are stored before they are purged.
Number of days. The range is from 0 to 99. The default is 0.
If 0, no messages are purged.
Otherwise, messages that have been heard are purged after the specified number of
days. When users log in, Amanda tells them how many messages will be purged
when they exit message mode. This number is the number of heard messages that
have been stored longer than the number of days you specify here.
NOTE: Once a message is purged, there is no way to retrieve it.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set purge 0
ramdisk
Name of the ram drive (if any) used for temporary files.
The default is the C drive. The range is a single uppercase character from C to Z.
Before you change this make sure that you have set up a ram drive using the RAMDRIVE.SYS program from DOS.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set ramdisk 'C:'
312
Installing [email protected]/DOS
General Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
range1
range2
range3
range4
If you have a range key (for example range1_key for range1 or range2_key for
range2), you can activate 10000 mailboxes. Ranges and range keys are used for
third-party applications that program a range of mailboxes to perform certain functions using the Token Programming Language. For more information, contact your
Amanda Company sales representative.
You set this option to the first number in the mailbox range. This number must be a
multiple of 10000.
The default is 10000 for range1, 20000 for range2, 30000 for range3, and 40000 for
range4.
See also range1_key, range2_key, range3_key, and range4_key.
The defaults appear in install.cfg as:
set range1 10000
set range2 20000
set range3 30000
set range4 40000
range1_key
range2_key
range3_key
range4_key
If you buy a third-party application that was customized for Amanda using the Token Programming Language, you import the mailboxes programmed for that application with the import utility.
Then, to activate that application, you set one of these options to the activation key
(or range key) that allows Amanda to use those mailboxes. For more information,
contact your Amanda Company sales representative.
The default is 0, which means there is no key.
See also range1, range2, range3, and range4, the options that you set to the first of
the mailboxes that correspond to the range key.
The defaults appear in install.cfg as:
set range1_key 0
set range2_key 0
set range3_key 0
set range4_key 0
recall_delay
Amount of time the voice board waits after an earth recall (used in place of a hookflash on some telephone switching systems).
Number of hundredths of seconds. 0 tells Amanda to use the voice board's default
(which is 15 for Denmark or Holland and 50 elsewhere). Otherwise, the range is 16553.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set recall_delay 0
Chapter 18: Configuration Reference
313
General Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
record_beep
Controls the beep that the user or caller hears as the system begins recording.
True or False. The default is True.
When True, the system beeps as it begins to record.
When False, the beep is not used. Be aware that, unless you have changed
the prompt set, the prompt the user hears as the system begins to record says
“Begin recording at the tone.”
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set record_beep true
record_menu
Controls Amanda’s use of prompts and menus before and after recordings.
True or False. The default is True.
When True, Amanda checks the values of begin_rec_prompt and end_rec_menu to
determine what to say.
When False, Amanda does not prompt the caller to leave a message at the tone nor
the user to record a greeting at the tone. She also does not play the post-record menu
that allows the caller or user to review and re-record.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set record_menu true
recursive_deletes
Controls whether Amanda deletes the guest mailboxes that were created for
a mailbox at the same time the mailbox is deleted.
True or False. The default is False.
When True, when Amanda deletes a mailbox, the guest mailboxes that were
created for that mailbox are also deleted. This deletion is recursive.
When False, only the mailbox is deleted. Its guest mailboxes remain available for use.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set recursive_deletes false
314
Installing [email protected]/DOS
General Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
rmt_rna
In a notification record, when using W(0,P) or W(0,V) to wait for a pager or voice
answer, the number for this option replaces the 0 and provides the number of remote
rings that Amanda must hear before she decides that there is no answer.
The default is 4. The range is 1 to 9.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set rmt_rna 4
rotary
Controls the detection of rotary digits.
True or False. The default is False.
When True, Amanda detects rotary digits.
When False, Amanda does not detect rotary digits.
NOTE: Only rotary digits 3(9 and 0 are currently detected on the Brooktrout 2132
and 4132 boards. Therefore, if you plan to use this feature, make sure that
all your mailboxes exclude the digits 1 or 2. Also, there are no * and # signs
on rotary phones, therefore setting this to True introduces additional delays
when the system detects the dialed number. For full rotary detection, please
contact your Amanda Sales Representative for other options.
NOTE: The Brooktrout 232 and 432 boards do not support rotary detection. If rotary detection is required, use Brooktrout 2132 and 4132 boards.
NOTE: The 727 Brooktrout drivers (shipped with Amanda version 6.02) does not
support rotary. You can switch to the 537 drivers. First save VOICECNF.EXE as VOICECNF.727 and RHETDRV.EXE as RHETDRV.727.
Then copy VOICECNF.537 to VOICECNF.EXE and RHETDRV.537 to
RHETDRV.EXE. These files are in C:\PLATFORM.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set rotary false
screen_save
The file in the C:\AMANDA directory in which screen traces are saved. Whenever
you use screen trace, the data is saved to the designated file. Otherwise, the data appears only on the screen.
The default filename is SCREEN.OUT.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set screen_save 'screen.out'
Chapter 18: Configuration Reference
315
General Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
sec_code_display
Controls whether security codes are visible from the User screen on Amanda standalone and from Amanda Administrator.
True or False. The default is False.
When True, the security codes are visible.
When False, they are replaced by asterisks.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set sec_code_display false
security_min_length
The minimum length of a user’s security code (when changed by a user over the telephone or when using Amanda Messenger). This does not affect the length of security
codes that are entered from Amanda standalone or from Amanda Administrator. The
administrator can use any password of 8 or fewer characters.
A number from 1 to 8. The default is 1.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set security_min_length 1
short_direct_send
The direct message mailbox (usually 998) is for leaving messages for any Amanda
user. It does not ring that user’s extension. After entering 998, the caller is asked for
the destination mailbox then leaves his message.
This option controls how Amanda identifies the user before the message is left. This
confirms that the caller entered the mailbox that he intended to.
True or False. The default is False.
When True, the caller hears “You entered” followed by the name and extension recording for the user—if there is one. Amanda says the mailbox number (for example, mailbox 1-4-7) when there is no recording.
When False, the caller hears the mailbox’s current greeting (which can be skipped
by pressing # twice).
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set short_direct_send false
316
Installing [email protected]/DOS
General Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
shutdown
The day and time that Amanda performs her weekly automatic shutdown for disk
maintenance and/or tape backup.
A day of the week followed by a space and a time of day. The default is '2 130'
(Tuesday, at 1:30 a.m.).
For the day of the week, 0 means Sunday, 1 is Monday, ..., 6 is Saturday, and -1 is
everyday.
The time is in the 24-hour format. For example, 9:30 p.m. is 2130 without the colon
(:).
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set shutdown '2 130'
tape_length
When a user selects 1, 7, 8 (for continuous play) from the top level menu, this option
indicates how long Amanda will play messages continuously (with a beep between
them). Usually this is equal to the length of one side of a tape. It allows users to archive their messages. Users can record the messages on tape using a microphone if
the telephone does not have a jack for this purpose.
Number of minutes from 1 to 99. The default is 30.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set tape_length 30
timestamp_forwards
Controls the date and time given to a forwarded message.
True or False. The default is True.
When True, the date and time tell when the message was forwarded. This can prevent messages from appearing to be delayed when they are forwarded without explanatory prefixes.
When False, the date and time tell when the message was first recorded.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set timestamp_forwards true
tmo_blank
Controls how long Amanda waits after the last keystroke before blanking the Main
screen (to prevent screen burn-in). Amanda blanks the screen only if the Main screen
is displayed. A value of 0 stops Amanda from ever blanking the screen. (This option
does not apply to Amanda voice server.)
Number of minutes. The range is 0 to 99. The default is 5.
See also advertising.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set tmo_blank 5
Chapter 18: Configuration Reference
317
General Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
tmo_dir_transfer
Controls whether the caller hears the 411 directory information prompt with
the instructions about how to be transferred to an extension. If the value is
0, the prompt is not played. If you use a number greater than 0, Amanda
waits that number of seconds for a response from the caller. The default is 2.
The prompt after each match is: “To be transferred to this extension, press
*. Otherwise, press # to continue.”
If you are selecting a recipient for voice mail, the prompt is: “To select this
extension, press *. Otherwise, press # to continue.”
When there are no more matching directory entries, the prompt is: “To
search the directory again, press *. Otherwise, press #.”
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set tmo_dir_transfer 2
tmo_disk
Controls how often Amanda checks for low disk space. Amanda also checks for low
disk space when she starts up.
Number of minutes. The range is 0 to 255. The default is 60.
See also diskwarn.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set tmo_disk 60
tmo_dtmf
The amount of time Amanda waits after a DTMF digit before deciding the caller has
finished the entry. (If the caller presses #, Amanda immediately recognizes this as
the end of a DTMF entry.)
Number of tenths of seconds (from 1 to 255). The default is 12 (1.2 seconds).
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set tmo_dtmf 12
tmo_hold
Determines how long Amanda waits after a caller presses * to hold for an extension
that is busy before trying to transfer the call again. This is only used when the file
C:\AMANDA\HOLD.VOX, which Amanda normally plays for callers on hold, is
missing. Usually Amanda tries to transfer the call after playing the file.
Number of seconds. The default is 20. The range is 0 to 255.
NOTE: You can record over HOLD.VOX using the system administration menu
from the system administration mailbox (mailbox 999.) You may want to
save the original first.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set tmo_hold 20
318
Installing [email protected]/DOS
General Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
tmo_idle
Number of seconds of inactivity after which Amanda decides that the port is idle.
The default is 0. The range is 0-999.
When greater than 0, Amanda goes off-hook and back on-hook after deciding that
the port is idle. This is necessary when a telephone system does not release a station
that is connected to Amanda even after Amanda has gone on-hook (a rare occurrence).
When 0, Amanda does not go off-hook and back on-hook if a port is idle.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set tmo_idle 0
tmo_integrate
During inband integration, this option causes Amanda to wait the specified number
of seconds for the first digit to arrive. Then the seconds in the timeout period (specified in the .pbx file) begin. After the first digit arrives, Amanda continues to read
digits until the timeout period ends.
The range is 0 to 255. The default is 0.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set tmo_integrate 0
tmo_menu
The amount of time Amanda waits before repeating a menu when no selection is
made.
Number of tenths of seconds from 1 to 99. The default is 20 (2.0 seconds).
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set tmo_menu 20
tmo_pickup
The minimum amount of time Amanda waits between an on-hook and off-hook
event.
Number of tenths of seconds from 1 to 99. The default is 20 (2.0 seconds).
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set tmo_pickup 20
Chapter 18: Configuration Reference
319
General Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
tmo_rna
For some PBXs, Amanda assumes that the called party is not going to answer the
telephone if there is no answer after a certain length of time. The amount of time she
waits is the product of this setting times the maximum number of rings for a Ring
No Answer. (The maximum number of rings is set per mailbox using the Maximum
Rings field for Amanda Standalone or the Adjust Maximum Rings text box in
Amanda Administrator.)
This setting is in tenths of seconds and is the estimated length of time it takes for a
ring. The default is 60 (which is an estimated six seconds per ring). The range is 0
to 65535.
The defaults appear in install.cfg as:
set tmo_rna 40
tmo_serial
Number of seconds to wait for a response from a peripheral device connected to one
of Amanda’s serial ports.
When communicating with peripheral devices through a serial port, Amanda needs
a timeout value so she doesn't wait forever for a response.
Number of seconds from 1 to 999. The default is 2.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set tmo_serial 2
tmo_silence
The maximum seconds of silence before Amanda decides that the caller or user is
finished recording a message or greeting.
The post record menu plays if the record_menu option is True. The caller can press
3 to append the message if he was just pausing too long.
If the number is 0, Amanda does not use silence to determine completion.
Number of seconds from 0 to 255. The default is 5.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set tmo_silence 5
tmo_sound
The maximum seconds of continuous sound/dial tone before Amanda decides that
the caller or user is finished recording a message or greeting and has hung up. If the
number is 0, Amanda does not use sound/dial tone to determine completion.
Number of seconds from 0 to 255. The default is 5.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set tmo_sound 5
320
Installing [email protected]/DOS
General Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
tmo_xfer
This option is required only for telephone switching systems, such as Comdial DXP
and Panasonic KXT-D, that can send DTMF tones in place of PCPM tones. See also
dtmf_action.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set tmo_xfer 20
tokens_available
Lists the tokens available to program with. Depending on the type of Amanda system you have, you may not be able to use all the tokens in the list.
You can make additional restrictions by deleting tokens that your system can use
from the list. For example, deleting the G token makes it impossible to program a
move from one mailbox to another via tokens.
The default is 'GIJLMNOPQRSTUVW<>+-?=|[]{^@'
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set tokens_available 'GIJLMNOPQRSTUVW<>+-?=|[]{^@'
use_tutorial
Controls whether Amanda uses the tutorial for setting up mailboxes when
users use the telephone user interface for the first time.
True or False. The default is True.
When True, Amanda suggests that the user use the tutorial to set up his or
her mailbox. Amanda continues to make this suggestion until the mailbox
has been set up.
When False, Amanda does not suggest that the user use the tutorial.
Regardless of the setting, Amanda retains information about who has and
hasn’t set up mailboxes so that anytime this configuration parameter is set
to True, Amanda behaves correctly.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set use_tutorial true
Chapter 18: Configuration Reference
321
General Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
urgent_to_front
Controls the priority of urgent messages. This is not supported in [email protected]/DOS when the server is enabled.
True or False. The default is True.
When True, Amanda places urgent messages in front of other messages (new and
old) for a mailbox. The user cannot press 4 to wrap from the first to the last message.
He must listen to the urgent messages first.
When False, urgent messages are mixed in with other messages in the order that they
were received.
See also play_new_first.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set urgent_to_front true
use_pvc
Controls whether Amanda uses the positive voice control feature available on the
Brooktrout voice board.
True or False. The default is True.
When True, Amanda detects a human voice faster, but there is a greater chance of
identifying an unanswered call as answered and ending her supervision of the call
too soon.
When False, Amanda may take more time to detect an answer during supervised
transfers, but false answer detects are less likely.
See also voice_analysis_length.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set use_pvc true
use_tutorial
Controls whether Amanda uses the tutorial for setting up mailboxes when
users use the telephone user interface for the first time.
True or False. The default is True.
When True, Amanda suggests that the user use the tutorial to set up his or
her mailbox. Amanda continues to make this suggestion until the mailbox
has been set up.
When False, Amanda does not suggest that the user use the tutorial.
Regardless of the setting, Amanda retains information about who has and
hasn’t set up mailboxes so that anytime this configuration parameter is set
to True, Amanda behaves correctly.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set use_tutorial true
322
Installing [email protected]/DOS
General Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
user_log
If you provide a file name, Amanda creates that file and logs:
The date, time, and mailbox when any mailbox is accessed by DTMF. For example,
whenever a caller enters a mailbox, that information is logged.
The file can be analyzed later for call distribution and access to mailboxes by date,
day, and time.
The default is to not log data (because no file name is provided). We recommend
using 'USER.LOG'.
See also msg_log.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set user_log ''
voice_analysis_
length
When positive voice control is used, this option specifies how long a noise must continue before Amanda decides that it is a voice answer and not just a glitch.
Number of hundredths of seconds. The range is from 1 to 6553. The suggested range
is 1 to 100. The default is 19.
NOTE: The default (.19 seconds) appears to eliminate false answer detection on
Panasonic and Samsung telephone switching systems, allowing them to
work with the 5.54 Brooktrout driver.
See also use_pvc.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set voice_analysis_length 19
Chapter 18: Configuration Reference
323
Fax Options
Configuration Option
Description
fax_direct_
connect
The string to send (after "AT") to the fax modem to make it connect to a ringing telephone, play the CNG tone, and send the fax. Use a maximum of 20 characters. This
option defaults to 'H1O0' which some Zoom modems require.
NOTE: The value of H1O0 contains four distinct characters: alphabetic H, numeric one, alphabetic O, and numeric zero.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set fax_direct_connect 'H1O0'
fax_dl_init
When a user is listening to messages over the telephone and discovers that he has a
fax message, he dials 72 to send the message to a fax machine followed by the telephone number for the fax machine. Amanda dials this option before she dials the fax
machine's number. Usually, it is the dial code for accessing an outside line. The default is '9,'. Use a maximum of 20 characters.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set fax_dl_init '9,'
fax_flow_control
Defines the Class 2 command to set the type of flow control for the fax modem. The
default is '&K3'. Use a maximum of 20 characters.
For
Rockwell-based fax modems
Aceex modems
Practical Peripherals modems
Zoom modems
Smart One 1442 modems
Boca modem M144EW
Use
&K3
\Q3 X3 &K3
X3 &K3
&K3
&K4
&K3
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set fax_flow_control '&K3'
fax_id
Identifies your fax modem. Use the company name or the telephone number of your
fax machine. Use a maximum of 20 characters.
By default, no identification is provided. When two faxes connect, they exchange
and then display each other’s identifying strings.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set fax_id ''
324
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Fax Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
fax_id_pad
Controls whether '1111' is added to the front of the fax_id. Many older fax modems
need some extra characters as padding. Otherwise, part of the identifying string is
cut off.
True or False. The default is True, but if '1111' appears on the receiving fax machine,
change this option to False (so no padding characters are added).
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set fax_id_pad true
fax_init
String sent to initialize a fax modem (give it a known starting state). The default is
'&F0E0'. Use a maximum of 20 characters.
Some modems require "&F" rather than "&F0". The "E0" insures that the modem is
in non-echo mode, because the command that puts the modem into Class 2 or Class
2.0 mode expects the fax modem to be in non-echo mode first.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set fax_init '&FE0'
fax_log
Use this option to log data about files (not messages) that are faxed. Amanda creates
a log file in the C:\AMANDA directory and logs:
•
The names of the files that were faxed
•
The telephone numbers to which the files were sent
By default, no filename is used and no log is written. Use a maximum of 20 characters. We recommend using 'FAX.LOG'.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set fax_log ''
fax_max_retries
Defines the maximum number of times, after the first, to retry sending a fax file if it
is unsuccessful. This is used only when sending the fax in two-call mode (where the
caller enters a fax telephone number and the fax modem sends the file to that number).
The range is 0 to 9. The default is 1.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set fax_max_retries 1
Chapter 18: Configuration Reference
325
Fax Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
fax_receive_reverse
True or False. Depends solely on the fax modem you are using. For most Rockwellchipset-based Class 2 modems, this parameter should be True. For most other modems (including Class 2.0), it should be False.
If set incorrectly, received faxes cannot be retransmitted or viewed at all. Setting it
to True reverses the bits within each received byte, correcting for an oddity in the
Rockwell firmware.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set fax_receive_reverse false
fax_receive_speed
The maximum speed for receiving faxes.
The value can be '0', '1', '3'. Use '0' for 2400 bps, '1' for 4800 bps, and '3' for 9600 bps.
Normally a value of '3' works for 486 CPUs at 25MHz or higher (and is the default).
If you experience data loss on your faxes, lower this setting.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set fax_receive_speed '3'
fax_requeue_
interval
Defines the number of minutes to wait between retries.
The range is 1 to 99. The default is 5.
See also max_retries.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set fax_requeue_interval 5
fax_reset
Defines the reset command to send to your fax modem when DTR (Data Terminal
Ready) is dropped. For most Rockwell-based fax modems, it should be '&D3', which
is the default.
Possible values: See your fax modem manual. Use a maximum of 20 characters.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set fax_reset '&D3'
fax_send_reverse
True or False, depends solely on your Class 2 or Class 2.0 fax modem. For most fax
modems, this option should be False.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set fax_send_reverse false
326
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Fax Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
fax_send_speed
The maximum speed that Amanda uses to send faxes.
The value can be '0', '1', '3'. Use '0' for 2400, '1' for 4800, and '3' for 9600 bps. Normally a value of '3' works for 486 CPUs at 25MHz or higher (and is the default), but
it depends on your computer.
If you experience data loss on your faxes, lower this setting.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set fax_send_speed '3'
fax_start_char
Controls whether the system waits for the start character or not.
True or False. The default is False.
When True, Amanda waits for the character.
When False, Amanda does not wait.
Early drafts of the CCITT Class 2 Specification require that, when sending a fax, the
sender wait for the fax modem to send a control character indicating that it is ready
for the data to begin. Some modems lose data if the computer starts sending before
the fax modem indicates that it's ready to receive. Unfortunately, not all Class 2 fax
modems send the start character.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set fax_start_char false
fax1
fax2
fax3
fax4
Use these options to define the station, or extension, number to which your fax modem is connected. For example, if the first fax modem is connected to extension 101,
set fax1 to '101'.
By default, no extension is set for a fax modem. Use a maximum of 7 digits.
The defaults appear in install.cfg as:
set faxn ''
where n is logical serial port 1, 2, 3, or 4. See serial_portn.
max_local_
extension
The maximum number of digits that can be considered an extension number.
The default number is 6. The range is 1 to 6.
Users (at the message menu) can send fax messages they have received to a fax machine by entering 72 then a fax machine’s telephone number. Amanda applies
fax_dl_init (usually '9' for an outside line) if the telephone number entered by the
user has more digits than max_local_extension.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set max_local_extension 6
Chapter 18: Configuration Reference
327
Hot Box Options
Configuration Option
Description
hot_box
Defines the mailboxes to which Amanda goes when she detects special PCPM tones.
You can have up to 10 hot_boxes. For example, you can configure a hot_box to detect connections from TDD machines for deaf communications.
In most cases, only one hot_box is defined to detect fax tones and the remainder are
unused.
You provide a mailbox next to the corresponding PCPM code (12 to 21). The default
mailbox is -1, which means no mailbox. We recommend using 994 as the first
hot_box mailbox, but you can use any valid mailbox.
NOTE: To add a specific tone to the tone table, it must be one of the first four tones
defined, and it must be marked as a terminating tone. Call to be faxed Technical Note 8, “Special Tone Detection.”
The defaults appear in install.cfg as:
set hot_box -1 n
where n is either -1 or the PCPM code minus 12. (For example, for PCPM code 12,
you use 12-12 which is 0. The range for n is from -1 to 9.)
328
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Network Options
Configuration Option
Description
client_activation_
key
Activation key that validates the value specified by n_clients. It is normally generated automatically as the client connections are installed. If you change or add a
board later, you need another activation key because the key is based on the serial
number for the first board. The first board is based on its low I/O port number (the
first Brooktrout board is usually 300H). Get the key from your Amanda Company
sales representative.
The default is 0, which means there is no client activation key.
See also n_clients.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set client_activation_key 0
dialer_max_port
Specifies the highest Amanda telephone port to be considered for use when Amanda
Dialer dials a number. The range is 0 to the highest port number available.
The default is 0. When dialer_min_port and dialer_max_port are both 0, Amanda
uses all ports.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set dialer_max_port 0
dialer_min_port
Specifies the lowest Amanda telephone port to be considered for use when Amanda
Dialer dials a number. The range is 0 to the highest port number available.
The default is 0. When dialer_min_port and dialer_max_port are both 0, Amanda
uses all ports.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set dialer_min_port 0
dir_format
Determines how names associated with mailboxes in the employee directory are formatted for the client applications. “%1” expands to the “Directory Name 1” field,
“%2” to the “Directory Name 2” field, and “%c” to the “Comment” field. Other
characters (such as space) are taken literally. The most common value is '%1 %2'.
The default is '%1 %2'.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set dir_format '%1 %2'
Chapter 18: Configuration Reference
329
Network Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
multiple_clients
Controls whether multiple connections (logons) are allowed from the same mailbox.
The default is 3.The range is from 1 to 3. When 1, only one connection is allowed
per mailbox. When 2, only one connection is allowed per mailbox, with the exception of the special mailbox 999, which can connect multiple times. When 3, any
mailbox can connect multiple times.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set multiple_clients 3
n_clients
Along with client_activation_key, controls the number of client connections
(logons) that can simultaneously connect to the [email protected]/DOS server. This is normally set automatically when the client connections are installed into
the server.
The default is 0, which means 1 client. The range is from 0 to 99 (99 is 100 clients).
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set n_clients 0
service_name
The server's NETBIOS name.
The default is 'AMANDASERVER'.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set service_name 'AMANDASERVER'
tmo_call_screening
The number of seconds that Amanda waits for the user to accept or reject a call. This
applies to call screening and to waiting call processing.
The default is 30. The range is 0 to 255.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set tmo_call_screening 30
330
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Outdial Options
Configuration Option
Description
box_outdial
Controls special mailbox options.
You provide a mailbox for each telephone digit that becomes a special mailbox option.
While logged into a mailbox, a user presses 7 to reach special options, then a digit,
0-9, depending on what you specify here. Then Amanda executes the tokens in the
extension field of the mailbox you specify for that digit.
Setting the mailbox to -1 disables that special mailbox option. For example, to allow
users to press 7 then 5 to call for the time of day, you might type 149 next to the digit
5. In this case, 149’s Extension field should contain the telephone number Amanda
dials for the weather (perhaps 9,8531212). Later, users log into their mailboxes and
press 75 for the current time. Afterwards they continue other mailbox options.
The defaults appear in install.cfg as:
set box_outdial -1 x
where x is a digit from 0 to 9
CAUTION: If you use box_outdial to give users an outside line, you might want to
use telephone lines that are toll restricted.
Chapter 18: Configuration Reference
331
Per Port Options
Configuration Option
Description
box_grt
Determines what greeting the caller hears first. This is set per Amanda telephone
port by assigning a mailbox to the port. Greeting 1 for that mailbox is the greeting
that the caller hears. By default, all ports are assigned 990, the Company Greeting
mailbox.
The defaults appear in install.cfg as:
set box_grt 990 n
where 990 is a mailbox and
where n is a port number from 1 to 24.
box_idx
Sets the mailbox for the employee directory. This is set per Amanda telephone port
by assigning a mailbox to the port. The employee directory contains the names of all
the users as they appear in the Dir Name 1 and Dir Name 2 fields (on the Users
screen of the Standalone) or Directory Name 1 or Directory Name 2 (in the mailbox
window in Amanda Administrator).
The default is 411 for every port.
For example, to use one employee directory for the ports 1 and 2, another for port 3,
and a third for port 4, set box_idx to 411 for ports 1 and 2, 511 for port 3, and 611
for port 4.
NOTE: Callers use their telephone pad to spell the names of the users they want to
reach. Amanda plays the name and extension recording for every user that
matches. If there is no name and extension recording, Amanda says “mailbox” and the number of that mailbox. Digits 7 and 9 should be used for letters Q and Z respectively.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set box_idx 411 n
where 411 is a mailbox and
where n is a port number from 1 to 24.
For reference purposes, the per port options are listed here in alphabetical order. In the Setup utility,
they are listed: pbx, box_grt, box_idx, box_snd, n_rings, and hangup_supervision.
332
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Per Port Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
box_snd
Indicates what mailbox serves as the direct message mailbox. This is set per Amanda
telephone port by assigning a mailbox to the port. The direct message mailbox allows you to leave a message for a mailbox without processing the mailbox. Amanda
does not execute the Extension field’s tokens or play a greeting. For example, an operator can use the direct message mailbox to transfer callers directly to a user’s voice
mail.
The default is 998 for all ports.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set box_snd 998 n
where 998 is a mailbox and
where n is a port number from 1 to 24.
hangup_supervision
Allows you to use hangup supervision. This is set per Amanda telephone port.
True or False. The default is True.
Use True if your telephone switching system supports Loop Current Drop for
hangup supervision on the specified port. Even if it doesn’t, using True usually has
no negative effect.
Use False if you notice call transfer problems such as disconnects during three-way
conferences. However, if the problems persists, return to True.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set hangup_supervision true
where n is a port number from 1 to 24.
n
For reference purposes, the per port options are listed here in alphabetical order. In the Setup utility,
they are listed: pbx, box_grt, box_idx, box_snd, n_rings, and hangup_supervision.
Chapter 18: Configuration Reference
333
Per Port Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
n_rings
Sets the number of rings that Amanda waits before answering a call on a given port.
To have port 7 answer after the second ring use n_rings 2 for port 7. This is
useful for those telephone switching systems that do not allow incoming lines to ring
in a station hunt group or do not provide delayed ringing. Also, it may be used to set
up backup answering for a secondary attendant operation.
The rings range from 0 to 9.
NOTE: There is a side-effect. When users want to pickup their messages, they must
wait the specified number of rings before Amanda answers.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set n_rings 1 n
where 1 is the number or rings and
where n is a port number from 1 to 24.
pbx
Indicates which Amanda telephone ports are connected to which PBXs. You provide the PBX's number (usually 1 or 2).
The defaults appear in install.cfg as:
set pbx 1 n
where 1 is the PBX number and
where n is a port number from 1 to 24.
For reference purposes, the per port options are listed here in alphabetical order. In the Setup utility,
they are listed: pbx, box_grt, box_idx, box_snd, n_rings, and hangup_supervision.
334
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Serial Port Options
Configuration Option
Description
baud1
baud2
baud3
baud4
The bps (bits per second) for the logical serial port with the same number. For example, baud1 gives the bps for serial_port1. (Serial_port1 can be mapped to any
COM port.)
Possible values: Any valid bps rate. The default is 19200.
The defaults appear in install.cfg as:
set baudn 19200
where n is the logical serial port 1, 2, 3, or 4.
databits1
databits2
databits3
databits4
The number of data bits for the logical serial port with the same number. For example, databits1 gives the number of data bits for the COM port defined as serial_port1.
(Serial_port1 can be mapped to any COM port.)
Possible values are 7 or 8. The default is 8.
The defaults appear in install.cfg as:
set databitsn 8
where n is the logical serial port 1, 2, 3, or 4.
parity1
parity2
parity3
parity4
The parity for the logical serial port with the same number. For example, parity1
gives the parity for serial_port1. (Serial_port1 can be mapped to any COM port.)
Possible values are none, even, odd, mark, or space. The default is none.
The defaults appear in install.cfg as:
set parityn none
where n is the logical serial port 1, 2, 3, or 4.
Chapter 18: Configuration Reference
335
Serial Port Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
serial_port1
serial_port2
serial_port3
serial_port4
To communicate with peripheral devices connected to COM/RS232 ports, Amanda
needs to know which ports are connected.
This option matches the serial ports as Amanda knows them (called the logical serial
ports) to the actual COM1, COM2, COM3, and COM4 ports on the computer (called
the physical serial ports).
Possible values are 0 through 4. The default is 0, which means that the port is not
connected.
Only after this matching can Amanda communicate with devices, such as SMDI interfaces, connected to her COM ports. For example, serial_port1 2 matches
serial_ port1 (Amanda’s first logical serial port) to the physical COM port 2 of the
PC. However, it is less confusing to use serial_port1 1, matching logical and
physical ports with the same number.
The defaults appear in install.cfg as:
set serial_portn 0
where n is the logical serial port 1, 2, 3, or 4.
stopbits1
stopbits2
stopbits3
stopbits4
The number of stop bits for the logical serial port with the same number. For example, stopbits1 gives the number of stop bits for serial_port1. (Serial_port1 can be
mapped to any COM port.)
Possible values are 1 and 2. The default is 1.
The defaults appear in install.cfg as:
set stopbitsn 1
where n is the logical serial port 1, 2, 3, or 4.
336
Installing [email protected]/DOS
SMDI Options
Configuration Option
Description
smdi_activation_key
A number you receive from your Amanda Company sales representative to allow
your system to use SMDI.
If you change or add a board later, you need another activation key because the key
is based on the serial numbers for the boards and the number of ports.
The default is 0, which means there is no smdi activation key.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set smdi_activation_key 0
smdi_base_port
Use this option to identify Amanda’s first voice mail port. The first voice mail port
is identified as logical port 1, with every successive port having a sequential logical
port number.
These numbers must be consecutive. The number for the second port must be one
more than the number for the first port, and so on.
The default number is 1. The range is 0 to 32000.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set smdi_base_port 1
smdi_delay
The time that Amanda waits after the phone rings and is answered, before looking
at the integration information (if any).
Use a number of tenths of seconds or 0. The default is 0. The range is 0-255. This
option does not apply to inband integration.
When non-zero, Amanda waits the specified time. This allows more than one string
to be sent to a given port per telephone call. The number should allow enough time
for all the strings to arrive, forcing Amanda to use only the last (most recent) one.
(The integration time specified in the 1001.PBX configuration file can be zero or
near zero, because Amanda has already waited for smdi_delay time to pass.)
For example, if smdi_delay is set to 30 (3 seconds), it is OK to use a pattern such as
integration 1 '...', which designates a 0.1-second integration timeout because Amanda waits 3 seconds for the last packet to be received.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set smdi_delay 0
smdi_max
The maximum number of characters expected in a generic SMDI packet.
The default is 143. The range is from 1 to 143. Use this when smdi_type is 'generic'.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set smdi_max 143
Chapter 18: Configuration Reference
337
SMDI Options (Continued)
smdi_port
The logical serial port (represented by serial_portn) to use for SMDI integration.
The port should already have been configured as a serial port using the options in
the Serial section of Advanced Configuration.
The range is 0 to 4. The default is 0 (no serial port used).
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set smdi_port 0
smdi_pretimeout
The maximum number of seconds that an SMDI packet can precede the forwarded
call.
The default is 50. The range is from 1 to 99. Use this when the smdi_type is 'smdi',
'necmci', or 'generic'.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set smdi_pretimeout 50
smdi_start
The position in the integration packet sent by the telephone switching system where
the field containing the port number begins. The first position in the packet is number 1.
Use this option when smdi_type is 'necmci' or 'generic'.
The default is 8. The range is 0-65535.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set smdi_start 8
smdi_stop
The position in the integration packet sent by the telephone switching system where
the field containing the port number ends. The first position in the packet is number
1.
Use this option when smdi_type is 'necmci' or 'generic'.
The default is 11. The range is 0-65535.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set smdi_stop 11
338
Installing [email protected]/DOS
SMDI Options (Continued)
smdi_term
Used only when smdi_type is 'generic'. The terminating characters (if any) which
define the end of a generic SMDI packet. You can include the following “escape”
sequences (similar to those used in strings within tokens)
Sequence Meaning
\n
newline (carriage return followed by a linefeed)
\r
carriage return
\j
linefeed
\a
attention
\d
end of transmission
\\
backslash
\t
tab
\digits The digits must represent the octal number for any character in the range
0 to 377 (That is 0 to 255 decimal). For example, to include the ASCII
character A (which is 101 in octal), you use \101.
When this option is not set, packets end only when smdi_max characters have been
received.
The default is an empty string, which means that packets end only when smdi_max
characters have been received.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set smdi_term ''
smdi_type
Indicates which SMDI integration protocol Amanda is to use.
For Bellcore Standard, use 'smdi'.
For AT&T System 75 or Definity-G3, use 's75'.
For NEC 2000 Message Center Interface use 'necmci'.
For Ericsson M-110 use 'md110'.
For the generic driver, use 'generic'.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set smdi_type 'smdi'
Chapter 18: Configuration Reference
339
T1/DID Options
Configuration Option
Description
did_dtmf
Indicates what kind of integration digits Amanda reads when did_mode is True.
True or False. The default is True.
When True, Amanda expects either MF or DTMF digits.
When False, she expects the digits as pulse.
See also did_mf and did_mode.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set did_dtmf true
did_mf
Determines what kind of integration digits Amanda reads when did_dtmf is True
and did_mode is True. Otherwise, Amanda ignores this option.
True or False. The default is False.
When True, Amanda expects MF digits.
When False, Amanda expects DTMF digits.
See also did_dtmf and did_mode.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set did_mf false
did_mode
Indicates whether Amanda is using DID.
True or False. The default is False.
When True, Amanda expects a DID interface (such as EXACOM) that processes a
hookflash as battery reversal.
When False, Amanda does not expect a DID interface.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set did_mode false
n_ani
The number of Automatic Number Identification (ANI) digits to be read by Amanda
between the first and second wink in a 2-wink T1 environment.
The default is 0. The range is 0-255.
In a 2-wink T1 environment, Amanda may receive more digits than the Brooktrout
buffer can hold. So Amanda reads up to n_ani digits between the first and second
winks and starts processing them as part of the regular inband integration. After the
second wink, Amanda reads the remaining digits.
See also t1_mode and n_winks.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set n_ani 0
340
Installing [email protected]/DOS
T1/DID Options (Continued)
Configuration Option
Description
n_winks
If t1_mode is True, tells whether the environment is an immediate (0-wink), 1-wink,
or 2-wink environment.
Number from 0 to 2. The default is 1. When 2, you need to set n_ani.
See also t1_mode and n_ani.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set n_winks 1
ring_mode
Indicates whether Amanda expects a loop start or a DID interface line.
True or False. The default is True.
When True, Amanda expects a loop start line, and new calls are indicated by ring
voltage.
When False, Amanda expects a DID interface line, and new calls are indicated by
loop current.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set ring_mode true
t1_mode
Indicates whether Amanda is to use a T1 line.
True or False. The default is False.
When True, Amanda expects a T1 line and can process it using a Brooktrout 24000
board.
When False, Amanda does not expect a T1 line.
The default appears in install.cfg as:
set t1_mode false
Appendix A:
Troubleshooting Amanda
New Problems
Solving a problem often requires sending annotated trace files to The
Amanda Company. Amanda Company customer service representatives
need to know what happened, what SHOULD HAVE happened, what time,
and so on. The trace files need to go to the right people in a timely manner. If
a line connected to Amanda goes out of service, The Amanda Company
needs trace information on the last activity on that line. Submit trace files to
a place accessible to everyone even if the customer service representative
you have been working with is out of the office: [email protected]
Resetting a Port from the Main Screen
Amanda standalone uses the Main screen primarily to display information
about the system. However, Amanda also allows you to reset a port from the
Main screen so that the system does not have to be completely shut down.
This is a hidden feature, so that people will not accidentally make a port idle.
No dialog box appears on the screen.
If you are using the server version of Amanda, the same feature is available
within the Monitor client which is usually used by the system administrator.
Ports are represented by two digits. Port 1 is 01, port 5 is 05, port 13 is 13,
and so forth.
342
Installing [email protected]/DOS
To reset a specific port (make it go IDLE), do the following:
1.
Press Ctrl+Home.
2.
Press Alt+P.
3.
Enter the two-digit port number.
This forces a hangup on the specified port.
CAUTION:
Anyone using the port being reset is disconnected
without warning.
What to Do When…
This section explains what to do when:
•
•
•
•
•
Amanda does not transfer the call
The caller doesn’t hear the Busy or RNA Greeting
Notification does not work correctly
The Host/Remote programs do not work
You see the message: RDSP Not Located at any Interrupt Vector
Amanda Does Not Transfer the Call
If Amanda does not transfer the call, one of the following may be causing the
problem.
Problem:
The mailbox has Do Not Disturb turned ON.
Solution:
If ON, no transfer is attempted and the caller immediately hears the current greeting of the mailbox. Check the mailbox you are calling to make
sure Do Not Disturb is OFF.
Problem:
The dial codes are incorrect.
Solution:
Run the Setup utility, selection 1, to verify that the dial codes are correct
for the telephone switching system Amanda is connected to.
NOTE: The telephone switching system dial codes should be in the
system’s manual.
Appendix A: Troubleshooting Amanda
Problem:
The telephone switching system returns stutter dial tone on a transfer hookflash.
Solution:
If stutter dial tone is returned, change the value of the Number of seconds
to wait for dial tone detection option to 0 seconds. (Run the Setup utility,
selection 1.)
Problem:
The telephone switching system does not return dial tone on a transfer hookflash—and it is supposed to.
Solution:
Do one or more of the following:
• Check your single line station card to see if it is operating properly
• Use a buttset or single line telephone to verify that the switch is not
giving dial tone to the ports
• Check to see that you have enough Touch Tone Receivers (TTRs,
also called DTMF receivers)
Problem:
Token programming is being used and a hookflash has not been entered in the Extension field.
Solution:
Review the tokens and insert a hookflash where needed. When the Extension field starts with @, a F- or %X will not enable PCPM. Amanda
does not listen for call progress tones. The W() token can be used to listen
for voice.
Problem:
An additional hookflash is needed because the transfer involves both
Centrex lines and a telephone switching system.
Solution:
Include another F- in the Dial code to put a caller on transfer hold option
(also known as dl_dtwait). (Run the Setup utility, selection 1.)
Problem:
The call progress tones are not correct.
Solution:
You should use GetTones or AccuCall Plus to correct the call progress
tones. See “Defining Dial Codes” on page 53 or “Using AccuCall Plus”
on page 64.
Problem:
There may be insufficient intercom paths on older analog telephone
switching systems.
Solution:
Check your telephone switching system’s intercom path capability to see
if additional hardware will add more intercom paths.
343
344
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Caller Doesn’t Hear the Busy Message or RNA Greeting
If the caller does not hear a busy or RNA (ring no answer) greeting, one of
the following may be causing the problem.
Problem:
Amanda is unable to recognize a busy or RNA tone.
Solution:
Rerun GetTones or AccuCall Plus to requalify the tones Amanda is listening for. See “Defining Dial Codes” on page 53 or “Using AccuCall
Plus” on page 64.
Problem:
Amanda is doing blind transfers rather than supervised transfers.
Solution:
Check the Extension field of the mailbox you are calling and the What to
dial AFTER dialing the mailbox extension option (also known as
dl_suffix) to see if an H has been added. (Run the Setup utility, selection
1.) If the integration codes are unique, blind transfers are OK, but the stations must be forwarded back to Amanda.
Problem:
The U token (used to indicate a partially supervised transfer) is unrecognized, so the call is not processed correctly.
Solution:
Remove the U token and place the call again to see if the greeting can be
heard or look at the trace file to see which token within the extension field
is failing.
Problem:
The integration patterns are incorrect.
Solution:
Run a trace on the system to see if the integration strings coming across
the port match the ones Amanda is expecting. (Run the Setup utility, selection 3.)
Problem:
The Busy and Ring No Answer integration patterns are identical, so
Amanda treats both types of calls the same.
Solution:
Remove one of the integration strings by running the Setup utility, selection 3. Integration strings include:busy ('bbbb')
ring no answer ('rrrr')
NOTE: This prevents the caller from hearing one of the two greetings. You should remove the busy integration string (the
one including the b’s).
Problem:
The Busy chain or RNA chain sends the call to another mailbox.
Solution:
Check the mailbox you are calling to be sure the Busy and RNA chains
are empty.
Appendix A: Troubleshooting Amanda
345
Notification Does Not Work Correctly
If notification does not work correctly, one of the following may be causing
the problem.
If using roving notification, make sure that all single line ports connected to
the voice board ports get dial tone when they go off-hook and also program
the phone system to grant all Amanda ports outside dial tone, when a 9 or
some other code is dialed.
If using dedicated or restricted notification, make sure that the designated
port has the attributes stated in the above paragraph.
Problem:
H in Notify Method field.
Solution:
Check to see that the dial string in the Notify Method field for the mailbox does not contain an H.
Problem:
Using %E in a Method field
Solution:
You cannot use %E in a notification Method field unless the Extension
field contains only the extension number. To insert an extension number
into a Method field when you cannot use %E, do one of the following:
• Use %U instead of %E if the extension number and the mailbox
number are the same
• Put the extension number in the Variable field in the notification
record and use %V in the Method field
Problem:
Timing problems (pager with voice greeting, Amanda not waiting
for dial tone).
Solution:
Call the pager and count the seconds and/or rings it takes to respond. Use
the W token to wait an appropriate time and/or number of rings.
Problem:
Wrong code for message waiting lights.
Solution:
Check your telephone switching system manual to verify that the codes
for turning on a message waiting light from a single line extension are
correct. Test by using a single-line telephone or sending both on and off
strings.
Problem:
Wrong type of notification record.
Solution:
Be sure you selected the right type for the notification record. For example, the notification record that turns the message light off must have the
type PICKUP.
Problem:
Max Times is set for 0.
Solution:
Make the value in the Max Times field in the Notify record greater than
zero.
346
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Host/Remote Programs Do Not Work
If the Host and Remote programs do not work, one of the following may be
causing the problem. See “Chapter 14: Accessing Amanda Remotely.”
Problem:
Both modems used have a bps higher than 2400.
Solution:
Make sure you use /f on the command line if both modems are faster than
2400 bps (bits per second).
Problem:
Host is not loaded in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file or has not been loaded manually.
Solution:
Check your AUTOEXEC.BAT to see if “rem” is in front of
LH HOST /4 statement. Or type LH HOST /x with the COM port x at the
DOS prompt (C:\).
Problem:
Host is installed on the wrong COM port.
Solution:
Check what COM port your modem is using and change the LH HOST
statement to use that port number.
Be sure that the host program is not using the same COM port as any other
process, such as SMDI or your fax modem.
Problem:
An internal modem is being used and there is an IRQ or a COM port
conflict with the computer’s controller card.
Solution:
Check your computer’s controller card and verify that your modem’s
COM port is disabled on the controller card.
Problem:
Remote is installed on a COM port other than COM 1 or 2.
Solution:
To use the Remote program, the modem must use only COM 1 or COM
2. Verify that the modem is set for one of these ports. Then run the remote
program designating the correct port.
Problem:
Other communications software is still running.
Solution:
Remove all other remote software from the computer’s AUTOEXEC.BAT file and do not load any other remote software manually.
Message: RDSP Not Located at Any Interrupt Vector
If you see the RDSP Not Located at any Interrupt Vector message, one of the
following may be causing the problem.
Problem:
The CMOS settings are incompatible.
Solution:
Make sure the CMOS settings disable all adapter ROM shadowing or
shadow RAM, except for the F000 (hexadecimal) segment/system ROM
shadow.
Appendix A: Troubleshooting Amanda
Problem:
The Exclusion statement in CONFIG.SYS is incorrect.
Solution:
Back up your existing CONFIG.SYS, AUTOEXEC.BAT, and \PLATFORM\CONFIG files.
347
Then try to rerun, from the C:\ prompt, 1STTIME.BAT to reconfigure your
PC’s memory.
Problem:
There is a conflict between the settings in the CONFIG.SYS and
\PLATFORM\CONFIG files.
Solution:
Check to see that the dualport statement in the \PLATFORM\CONFIG
file matches the first two characters in the exclusion (X=) statement in
the CONFIG.SYS file.
NOTE: Reboot after making any changes in the CONFIG.SYS file,
AUTOEXEC.BAT file, or \PLATFORM\CONFIG file.
Problem:
RHETDRV.EXE and VOICECNF.EXE files are not the same version.
Solution:
As installed, RHETDRV.EXE and VOICECNF.EXE are Version 7.27.
Each earlier version has the file extension that matches its version number. For example, RHETDRV.554 means Brooktrout driver version 5.54.
Problem:
The Brooktrout board is not installed or properly seated in the PC.
Solution:
Turn the power off and check that the board is properly seated in its slot
on the motherboard.
System Halts
Problem:
The 727 Brooktrout driver is installed and the rotary configuration
option is set to true.
Solution:
The 727 Brooktrout driver (shipped with Amanda version 6.02) does not
support rotary. You can switch to the 537 drivers. First save VOICECNF.EXE as VOICECNF.727 and RHETDRV.EXE as RHETDRV.727.
Then copy VOICECNF.537 to VOICECNF.EXE and RHETDRV.537 to
RHETDRV.EXE. These files are in C:\PLATFORM.
Problem:
The lpt_port option is set to a non-zero number but no printer is attached.
Solution:
Run Setup as explained in “Chapter 6: Running the Setup Utility.” Select
System Configuration Options, then General Configuration, then General Defaults. Change x in “Printer attached to LPT [x]” to zero if no printer
is attached.
Problem:
The host is loaded on a non-existent COM port.
Solution:
Check to see that the internal modem has not been removed.
348
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Appendix B:
Troubleshooting the Clients
NIC Configuration
If you purchase a NIC other than the preconfigured NIC from The Amanda
Company, you may have to run the Setup program for that NIC. The
Amanda Company’s default settings for its NIC are:
•
•
•
IRQ 10
I/O 340
Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) (10BASE T)
Addresses 300 through 305 are not available for the NIC. The voice boards
in the system will be using this range (300-305.) If there is a conflict with
configuring the I/O address, please remove the voice boards for the duration
of the configuration process. Set the I/O for 340 and then reinstall the voice
boards.
If you must use settings other than the default settings, you will need to edit
your PROTOCOL.INI and reconfigure your system accordingly.
350
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Common Error Messages
Problem:
NetBIOS Not Available
Solution:
The protocol required to run the Amanda Clients is NetBIOS.
To define the NetBIOS protocol in Windows 3.11:
1.
From the Program Manager, select Network.
2.
Select Network Setup.
3.
Select Drivers.
4.
Highlight Microsoft NetBEUI.
5.
Select Set as Default Protocol.
6.
Close this window and continue exiting until you are told to restart Windows.
7.
Select Restart Windows to have your changes take effect.
To define the NetBIOS protocol in Windows 95:
1.
Select My Computer.
2.
Select Control Panel.
3.
Select Network.
4.
Highlight NetBEUI→NE2000.
5.
Select Properties.
6.
Select the Advanced tab.
7.
Enable This Protocol to be default.
Appendix B: Troubleshooting the Clients
Problem:
Server not available.
Solution:
The most likely solutions are:
• The computer on which the server runs needs to be turned on
• The server may not be enabled
351
However, if the problem is not so easily resolved, check (on the client
workstation) for how NetBEUI is latched. (See the preceding problem for
how to view network settings.) If NetBEUI is displayed more than once,
select the one that is NOT latched to NE2000. It is most likely latched to a
Dial Up Adaptor or similar setting. Disable this so that the client finds the
server on the network instead of looking at the Adaptor first.
Problem:
Server did not respond in allotted time.
The voice server is busy. This may cause a disconnection from the voice
server.
Solution:
Exit the program and try again later.
Problem:
Not enough resources (memory) available.
Too many applications running.
Solution:
Start by closing some of the applications you are running and try again.
If that doesn’t work, completely exit and restart Windows.
Problem:
Connection with Server closed.
The voice server is shutting down.
Too many network conflicts.
Other applications may be taking too much processing time for this
application to respond in the allotted amount of time.
Solution:
Exit the program and try again later.
Problem:
Session (connection with server) has ended abnormally.
The voice server is shutting down.
Too many network conflicts.
Other applications may be taking too much processing time for this
application to respond in the allotted amount of time.
Solution:
Exit the program and try again later.
Problem:
Client Connection unavailable.
Solution:
Not enough Client Connections activated on the Amanda Voice Server.
To review or change the number of clients, see “Adding Client Connections” on page 282 and “Reviewing Client Connections” on page 284.
Please contact your Amanda Company representative for a new CCB.
352
Installing [email protected]/DOS
Problem:
Server did not respond in allotted time.
No connection with Server with current session number.
Session number out of range.
Connection with Server closed.
Server is unavailable.
Session (connection with server) has ended abnormally.
Solution:
The server and client were never connected or have become disconnected. You need to log back on to Amanda Voice Server. Amanda Administrator, Amanda Monitor, and Amanda Messenger have Log On…
commands on their first menus.
Index
- token 208
Symbols
#
end greeting 307
end of DTMF entry 317
%A token 216
%B token 216
%C token 216
%D token 216
%E token 216, 345
%F token 217
%G token 217
%H token 218
%I token 220
%M() token 231
%N token 232
%P token 233
%R token 242
%T token 245
%U token 246, 345
%V token 247, 345
%W token 248
%X token 249
%Y token 250
%Z token 250
+() token 214
, token 208
<() token 214
=() token 215
>() token 215
?() token 208
@ token 209
[() token 210
\
backslash keystroke 210
\A
Ctrl+G keystroke 210
\B
Ctrl+B keystroke 211
\N
Ctrl+J keystroke (newline)
211
\R
return keystroke (Ctrl+M)
211
\T
tab keystroke (Ctrl+I) 211
]() token 211
^() token 212
{ } token 213
|() token 213
~ token 213
Numerics
0 122
1001.PBX 53, 73
adding integration patterns
411
83
122, 331
prompt for transfer 317
8 122
990 122
991 122
994 123
995 123
996 123
997 123
998 123
998 shortcut
mailbox 122
999 124
A
abbreviate_dates 287
abbreviate_greeting 287
abbreviating
dates 287
system greeting 287
absolute value
P() token 234
accessing
Amanda remotely 169
mailboxes 226
AccuCall Plus 64
tone patterns 64
Accucall Plus 343, 344
activating
Amanda 287, 310
mailboxes 312
SMDI 336
activation key 328
activation_key 287
354
Installing [email protected]
active_hold 288
addressing
RDSP/x000 voice boards
19
RDSP/x32 voice boards 8
RTNI-xATI voice boards
26
ShowJump utility 11, 31
adpcm_hq 288
adpcm_nq 288
adpcm_pq 289
advertising 289
alphabetical
token list 208
Amanda
accessed from another
computer 169
configuring 115
installing 39
protecting 36
shutdown 51, 316
shutting down 228
uninstalling 39
updating 39
Amanda Dialer
maximum port number
328
minimum port number
328
Amanda Fax 262
Amanda upgrades 48
Amanda Voice Server modes
48
analog
telephone switching systems 343
ANI 218, 339
character code 85
answering
beeps 292
answers
storing 241
applications
using mailboxes and tokens 312
asking
questions 241
assigning
variables 183, 215
assumptions iv
AT&T System 75 338
serial integration 146
ati_mode 289
attendant
automated 3
off-duty 3
primary 3
secondary 3
auto_queue 290
auto_report 290
auto_report_time 290
AUTOEXEC.BAT
load Host program 346
automated attendant 3
Automatic Number Identification 218, 339
B
b
character code 85
base I/O ports 25, 28
baudn 334
beeps
connection 292
for recording 291
recording 313
begin_rec_prompt 291
Bellcore Standard 138, 338
blind transfers 344
boards
voice 214, 216
box_grt 122, 331
box_idx 122, 331
box_outdial 330
box_snd 123, 167, 168, 332
bps 334
bps rates
modem 346
Brooktrout
voice board 321
buses
MVIP 23, 28
Busy 68
busy
active hold 288
character code 85
dial code 56
dl_bsyret 56
no holding 292
Rhetorex notification option 291
time between transfer attempts 317
treated as Ring No Answer
292
Busy chain 344
busy extensions 290
busy message 344
volume 299
busycycles 291
bypassing
security codes 226
C
c
character code 85
ca_file 291
ca_port 291
Index
355
cables
connecting computers 173
call accounting 291
call screening 305
client timeout 329
dial code 57
dl_hupret 57
caller
character code 85
Caller ID 218
caller ID
character code 85
caller instructions
mailboxes 122
callers
still on line 298
calling
operator after message
299
calls
conferencing 227
not transferred 342
transferred after number of
digits 303
cancel_busy_hold 292
CCB 283
center
voice messaging 4
changing
CONFIG.SYS 48
records in files 232
volume 212
character codes
integration patterns 84
characters
DTMF terminator 301
in SMDI packet 336
terminating SMDI packet
338
checking
disk space 317
clearing
DTMF buffer 296
Client Connection Bank 283
client_activation_key 328
clients
activation key 328
adding connections 282
call screening timeout 329
displaying connections
284
information in employee
directory 328
installing 279
number of connections
329
reviewing connections
284
clock_sync 292
clocks
synchronizing 292
CMOS settings
incompatible 346
cmt_maxlen 292
codes
character 84
PCPM 123, 295, 301,
327
COM port
conflict 346
commands 183
Comment field 217
communications software 346
companies
sharing Amanda 157
company greetings
mailboxes 122
per port 158
comparing
mailbox security codes
224
values with tokens 221
conference call
dial code 58
dl_conference 58
conference calls 227
CONFIG.SYS 347
changing 48
configuration
defining dial codes 53
defining DTMF integration patterns 73
defining tone patterns 61
configuring
Amanda 115
incoming calls 115
language 118
messages 116
notification 118
passwords 117
printers 118
RDSP/x000 voice boards
19
RDSP/x32 voice boards 8
RTNI-xATI voice boards
26
screen saver 118
shutdown 118
voice server 119
connect
dial code 57
dl_connect 57
connect_tone 292
connecting
beeps 292
computers by cable 173
computers by modem 174
356
ports 12, 30
connections
number available for clients 329
conventions iv
copyright ii
create_locked 293
creating
mailboxes 293
messages 228
Ctrl+B
\B token 211
Ctrl+G
\A token 210
Ctrl+I
\T token 211
Ctrl+J
\N token 211
Ctrl+M
\R token 211
custom busy message
volume 299
customer support 5
D
database records
locking 293
databitsn 334
dates
%W token 248
%Y token 250
abbreviated 287
forwarded messages 316
P() token 233
playing 233
said by Amanda 287
days of week
%W token 248
db_locking 293
dealer sales 5
Installing [email protected]
dedicated notification
120,
306
defaults
guest mailboxes 300
mailboxes 121, 293
defaults_box 123, 293
defining
dial codes 53
tone patterns 61
Definity-G3 338
serial integration 146
delay
after DTMF entry 317
before integration 336
between disk space checks
317
between DTMF tones 297
between menu repetitions
318
between messages when
delivering list
302
between on-hook and offhook events 318
between SMDI packet and
call 337
end of recording detected
319
hold between transfer attempts 317
screen saver starts 316
waiting for peripheral 319
deleting
mailboxes 313
messages 225, 311
records from files 229
deliveries
in future 123
delivering
message in future 299
departments
sharing Amanda 157
detecting
DTMF tones 297
fax machines automatically 131
Diagrams
Token Programming Example 255
dial codes
busy 56
call screening 57
connect 57
defining 53
dial tone detection 59
dl_bsyret 56
dl_conference 58
dl_connect 57
dl_dtwait 55
dl_hangup 59
dl_hupret 57
dl_init 58
dl_ndtret 56
dl_pickup 58
dl_prefix 57
dl_rnaret 56
dl_stop 58
dl_suffix 57
flash time 59
flashtm 59
hangup detection 59
incorrect 342
kinds of 55
message waiting indicators
59
off hook 58
prefix 57
Index
357
ring no answer 56
suffix 57
system shutdown 58
system startup 58
tmo_dtwait 59
transfer dial tone 56
transfer hold 55
dial tone 297
%X token 249
not returned 343
stutter 343
wait 249
when recording 319
dial tone detection
dial code 59
Dialer
maximum port number
328
minimum port number
328
dialer_max_port 328
dialer_min_port 328
dialtone detection
tmo_dtwait 59
DID 155, 339
did_dtmf 156, 157, 339
did_mf 156, 157, 339
did_mode 156, 157, 339
digits
DTMF 215, 238, 239,
295, 299
Dir Name 1 field 217
Dir Name 2 field 217
dir_format 328
direct dial
character code 85
direct messages 315, 332
direct messaging
mailbox 123
per port 168
directory
employee 331
disk space
%D 216
checking 317
P() token 235
playing amount of 235
warning 294
diskwarn 294
displaying
security codes 315
trace information 180
distribution sales 5
dl_bsyret 56
dl_conference 58
dl_connect 57
dl_dtwait 55, 343
dl_hangup 59
dl_hupret 57
dl_init 58
dl_ndtret 56
dl_pickup 58
configuration setting for
294
dl_pickup_on_ring 294
dl_prefix 57
dl_rnaret 56
dl_stop 58
dl_suffix 57, 344
Do Not Disturb 342
documents
faxing 135, 214, 215
dollars
P() token 234
DOS clock
synchronizing 292
DOSMODE 48
drivers
Rhetorex 322
DTMF 295
cleared from buffer 296
P() token 238, 239
playing 238, 239
saving caller’s entry 242
stored as variable 242
time between tones 297
time tones played 298
timeouts 318
tokens 242
tone detection 297
tones 295
waiting for 295
DTMF digits 215, 238, 239
DTMF entry
ending 317
DTMF integration
trace files 74
DTMF integration patterns
adding 83
defining 73
testing 75
trace files 77
DTMF termination character
301
dtmf_action 295
dtmf_before_ring 296
dtmf_busy 295
dtmf_detect 297
dtmf_dly 297
dtmf_dnd 295
dtmf_dt 297
dtmf_gate 298
dtmf_on 298
dtmf_ring 295
dtmf_xfer 295
358
Installing [email protected]
E
e
character code 85
E token 216
earth recall 216, 312
employee directories
mailboxes 122
per port 167
employee directory 331
client information 328
end user
support 5
end_rec_menu 298
ending
DTMF entry 317
DTMF input 301
recording 319
English 311
Ericsson MD-110
serial integration 148
STX character 211
Error Message
NetBIOS not available
350
Server not available 351
EXACOM 339
exit_digit 299
exit_to_0 299
Extension fields
contents 216
normal processing 178,
209
programming more than
one 178
extensions
busy 290
number of digits 303
F
F token 217
failure
token execution 179
fax machines
detecting automatically
131
fax modems
using 125
fax_direct_connect 323
fax_dl_init 216, 323
fax_flow_control 323
fax_id 323
fax_id_pad 324
fax_init 324
fax_log 324
fax_max_retries 324
fax_receive_reverse 325
fax_receive_speed 325
fax_requeue_interval 325
fax_reset 325
fax_send_reverse 325
fax_send_speed 326
fax_start_char 326
faxbacks 262
one-call 263
two-call 265
faxes 262
incoming 327
one-call faxbacks 263
sending 135, 246
two-call faxbacks 265
faxing
accessing outside lines
216
documents 135
files 214, 215
hot box mailboxes 132
hot boxes 134
faxing, to Amanda 262
faxn 326
fields 217
messages 220, 222
files 250, 251
appending 213
call accounting 291
deleting records 229
faxing 214, 215
modifying matching
records 232
reading 210
reading tokens from 213
recording 228
retrieving values from
fields 248
screen traces 314
system logs 302
temporary 311
trace 341
tracing tokens 180
voice 228
writing 211, 213
First Use Questionnaire 91
flash time
dial code 59
flashtm 59
flashtm 59
francs
P() token 234
frequencies
playing 223, 224
future
delivering messages 299
future delivery 123
mailbox 123
future_delivery 123, 299
G
G() token
go to mailbox 218
gain_loud 299
Index
gain_norm 299
generic
serial integration 151
GetTones utility 61
global 217
goto 218
greetings 344
ended with # 307
integrated calls 300
per port 331
playing 236
recording 313
rotary training 229
sampling rates 288
guest mailboxes
deleting 313
guest_defaults 123, 300
guest_max 300
guest_min 300
guests
mailbox defaults 300
maximum mailbox 300
minimum mailbox 300
guide
purpose 4
guidelines, IVR 268
H
H token 218, 345
H() token 219
hang up
H 218, 219
mailbox 124
hanging up
on user 303
supervised 332
hangup detection
dial code 59
dl_hangup 59
hangup_supervision 332
359
hangups
supervised 332
hardware interrupts 301
hold
active 288
disabled 292
please hold prompt 310
time between transfer attempts 317
HOLD.VOX
missing 317
hookflash 217, 343
substitute 216
host computers
setting up 171
Host program 346
HOST.COM 169
hot box 327
hot box mailboxes 132
hot boxes 134
hot_box 123, 327
I
i
character code 85
I() token 221
idle
ports 318
if statements 221
ignoring
loop current 301
immediate record
character code 85
in band integration patterns
adding 83
inband integration
trace files 74
waiting periods 318
inband integration patterns
defining 73
testing 75
trace files 77
incoming
faxes 327
incoming calls
configuring 115
information system 4
initialization
dl_init 58
installation
support 6
installation checklist
RDSP/RTNI voice boards
17
RDSP/x32 voice boards 7
installing
Amanda 39
clients 279
LAN cards 35
MVIP cable 33
RDSP/RTNI voice boards
32
RDSP/x32 voice boards
11
integration 137
Bellcore Standard 138
Definity-G3 146
DTMF digits 339
Ericsson MD-110 148
generic 151
greetings 300
MF digits 339
NEC 2000/2400 143
pulse 339
SMDI 138
System 75 146
waiting 336
Integration Helper 87
integration patterns 344
360
Installing [email protected]
adding 83
character codes 84
defining 73
Integration Helper 87
test calls 88
testing 75
trace files 77
integration_greeting 300
integration_term 301
international sales 5
international support 5
interrupts
hardware 301
irq 301
IRQ conflict 346
IVR 308
IVR guidelines 268
IVR token 241
J
J() token 222
JOVE 53, 73
jumpers
RDSP/x000 voice boards
20
RDSP/x32 voice boards 9
RTNI-xATI voice boards
27
K
K 223
KA() token 223
KB() token 224
KC() token 224
KD() token 225
keys
activating Amanda 310
product activation 48
keys, activating Amanda 287
keys, activating range of mailboxes 312
keys, activating SMDI 336
keys, activation 328
KI() token 225
KJ() token 226
KL() token 226
KM token 227
KP() token 227
KR() token 228
KS() token 228
KT() token 229
KV() token 229
L
L() token 230
LAN cards
installing 35
language
configuring 118
prompts 311
languages
switching 230, 254
lcoff 301
lcvalid 301
lcwait 302
length
messages 304
Name and Extension recording 306
ring 319
security codes 315
strings 230
letters
playing 235
LIGHT.ON 250, 251
lights
message 120
off 59
on 59
line interface
RTNI-xATI boards 29
lines
accessing telephone 216
loop start 340
reading from files 210
reading tokens from files
213
searching for 208
writing to files 211
lines of code 178
lines, t1 339, 340
list comment
recording 292
list_delay 302
lists
token for sending messages to list of users
226
literals 181
locking
database records 293
log files 302
logging
mailbox information 322
mailboxes 306
messages 306
system information 302
logical
serial port 337
serial ports 335
lognam 302
logons
multiple 329
loop current 340
drop 302
ignoring 301
off 301
loop start 155
loop start line 340
lpt_port 302
Index
361
LPT1 302
M
M() token 231
mailbox
total messages 231
mailbox log 322
mailboxes
%U token 246
accessing 226
activating 312
caller instructions 122
company greetings 122
created as read-only 293
default 121
default templates 293
deleting 313
deleting messages via tokens 225
direct messaging 123
employee directories 122
future delivery 123
guest default template 300
guest defaults 123
hang up 124, 219
hot box 123
hot boxes 132
logging information 322
maximum for guest 300
messages from other users
309
minimum for guest 300
multiple logons from clients 329
number of digits 303
operators 122
PCPM 123
playing messages 237
playing new messages
237
previous mailbox token
233
security codes 224
sending messages to 307
setting security codes 227
settings for token programming 179
templates 123
total messages 236
manual
purpose 4
Max Times
notification 345
max_chain 303
max_dl_inits 303
max_local_extension 326
max_ports 303
max_prompt 303
maximum
characters in SMDI packet
336
maximum time
Name and Extension recording 306
recording a list comment
292
maximums
number of ports 303
ports for Dialer 328
MD-110
serial integration 148
menus
port-recording 313
post-recording 298
processing 231
recording 313
repeated 303
repeating 318
message lights 120
message log 306
message waiting indicators
dial codes 59
off 59
on 59
on and off 223
messages
automatic deletion 311
configuring 116
continuous play time 316
creating via tokens 228
deleting 225, 311
delivered in future 123
delivery in future 299
direct 123, 315, 332
fields 220, 222
forwarding date/time 316
left by other users 309
light on/off 345
log 306
minimum length 304
new 232
order 310
play new first 310
playing 237
playing new messages for
the specified
mailbox 237
purging 311
recording 298, 313
reviewing 298
rewind time 310
sampling rates 288
saving 304
sending 307
skip forward time 310
storing voice responses
308
362
Installing [email protected]
token for sending to list of
users 226
total number per mailbox
231, 236
urgent 321
messages, storing voice responses 241
messaging center 4
Method fields
normal processing 178
minimum length
security codes 315
minimum time
DTMF tone detection 297
ignoring loop current 301
loop current drop 302
loop current off 301
messages 304
minimums
ports for Dialer 328
ring’s off period 304
ring’s on period 304
minmsg 304
minoff 304
minring 304
modems
bps rate 346
connecting computers 174
modes
Amanda Voice Server 48
modified_call_screening 305
modifying
records in files 232
money
P() token 234
msg_log 306
multiple_clients 329
MVIP streams 21
configuring 22
MVIP termination 23, 28
N
N() token 232
n_ani 339
n_clients 329
n_ochan 306
n_rings 333
n_winks 340
nam_maxlen 306
Name and Extension recording
P() token 238, 240
names
server 329
NEC 2000 338
serial integration 143
NEC 2400
serial integration 143
NEC MCI 338
NETMODE 48
network cards
installing 35
new installation
configuring 115
new_send 307
newline 211
NIC cards
installing 35
NIC Configuration 349
non_relay_ok 307
notification
configuring 118
dedicated 120, 306
Max Times 345
restricted 120, 307
roving 120
telephone numbers 239
Type 345
notification records
canceling 225
Ring No Answer 314
Notify Max Times 345
Notify Method field
%V 240
%V token 247
normal processing 209
Notify Type 345
notify_restriction 307
numbers
number of digits in 230
O
O() token 232
OEM codes 48
off
ring time 304
off hook
dial code 58
dl_pickup 58
off_dly 308
off-duty attendant 3
off-hook 308, 318
on
ring time 304
on hold 290
on hook token 232
one-call faxbacks 263
on-hook 318
operator
after message 299
operators
mailboxes 122
options
special 330
orders
shipping 259
P
P() token
absolute value 234
dates 233
Index
363
disk space 235
greeting 236
money 234
Name and Extension recording 238,
240
new messages 237
play digits entered by caller 239
play digits in Variable field
240
play tones represented by
number 238
playing letters 235
playing messages 237
playing prompts 239
times 235
total messages 236
packet
terminating characters
338
pager
problems with 345
wait 249
pager number
Method field 240, 247
paging
%R token 242
Method field 247
users 253
parityn 334
partial_q_ok 308
partially supervised transfers
344
passwords 308, 315
configuring 117
patterns
integration 344
tone 343, 344
pause
half second 208
two-second 208
PBX 309
pbx 333
PBX.DB 53, 73
PBXs
ports for 333
using more than one 309
PC clock
synchronizing 292
PCPM 295, 301, 327
mailbox for 123
peripheral
waiting for 319
pesos
P() token 234
physical
serial ports 334
play_from 309
play_new_first 310
play_skip 310
playing
frequencies 223, 224
greetings 236
messages 237
prompts 239
Variable field 240
please_hold 310
port
call accounting 291
resetting 341
SMDI 336, 337
port number
SMDI 337
port variables 243
ports
base I/O 25, 28
bps 334
changing volume 212
COM1-COM4 335
company greetings 158
connecting 12, 30
data bits 334
direct messaging 168,
332
employee directories 167
greetings 331
idle 318
in use 303
initial volume 299
LPT 302
maximum 303
maximum for Amanda Dialer 328
message lights 120
minimum for Amanda Dialer 328
number 216
parity 334
printer 302
receiving strings 244
resetting 341
rings before answering
333
sending strings 244
simultaneously off-hook
303
stop bits 335
using different PBXs 333
positive voice control 320,
321
time 322
post-record menu 298,
power conditioning 36
prefix
dial code 57
dl_prefix 57
313
364
primary attendant 3
printer
LPT port 302
printers
configuring 118
problems
new 341
processing
menus 231
product activation keys 48
product_activation_key 310
programming
special options 330
programs
Host/Remote 346
prompt
transferring caller to user’s
mailbox during
411 317
prompt files 230
prompt_file 311
prompts
for recording 291
language 311
playing 239
recording 313
sampling rates 289
protecting
Amanda 36
pulse 155
purge 311
purging
messages 311
purposes
Amanda 3
Q
Q() token 241
questionnaire
first use 91
Installing [email protected]
standalone version 93
voice server version 104
questions
asking 241
R
r
character code 85
R() token 242
ramdisk 311
rangex 312
rangex_key 312
RDSP 347
RDSP Not Located 346
RDSP/RTNI voice boards
installation checklist 17
RDSP/x000 boards
base I/O ports 25
requirements 19
RDSP/x000 voice boards
installing 32
installing MVIP cable 33
MVIPbuses 23
RDSP/x32
connecting ports 12
RDSP/x32 voice boards
installation checklist 7
reading
lines of files 210
tokens from files 213
read-only
mailboxes 293
recall
earth 312
recall_delay 312
receptionists
mailboxes 122
recognizing
loop current drop 302
loop current off 301
record
character code 85
record menu 313
record_beep 313
record_menu 313
recording
beeps 313
dial tone 319
files 228
greetings 313
list comment 292
messages 228, 298, 313
silence 319
stop 299, 319
records
deleting from files 229
locking 293
modifying 232
retrieving values from
fields 248
recursive_deletes 313
relay paging
%R token 242
remote access
Amanda 169
remote computers
setting up 172
Remote program 346
REMOTE.COM 169
Reorder 70
repeating
menus 303, 318
reports
automatic 290
daily 290
requirements 1
RDSP/x000 voice boards
19
Index
365
resetting
port 341
restricted notification 120
retrieving
values from records 248
return
\R token 211
reviewing
messages 298
RHETDRV.EXE 347
Rhetorex
AccuCall Plus utility 64
busy notification 291
driver 322
options and defaults 297,
301, 302, 314
voice board 320, 321
voice board problem 347
voice boards 61
ring
off period 304
on period 304
ring length 319
Ring No Answer 67
notification records 314
ring no answer
dial code 56
dl_rnaret 56
ring voltage 340
ring_mode 156, 157, 340
ring-no-answer
character code 85
rings
before answering port 333
rmt_rna 314
RNA chain 344
RNA greeting
played for integrated call
300
rotary 290, 314
digit detection 314
rotary training 229
roving notification 120
RTNI-2T1 voice boards
installing 32
installing MVIP cable 33
RTNI-xATI
Amphenol 50-pin connector 30
connecting ports 30
MVIPbuses 28
RTNI-xATI boards
base I/O ports 28
line interface 29
RTNI-xATI voice boards
installing 32
installing MVIP cable 33
running
Setup 51
S
s
character code 85
S() token 244
sales
dealers 5
distribution 5
international 5
sampling rates
greetings 288
incoming messages 288
prompts 289
saving
DTMF entered by caller
242
messages 304
screen output 314
screen blanker 289
screen output
tracing 314
screen saver 289
configuring 118
starting 316
screen_save 314
screening
for caller 305
searching
line 208
strings 225
sec_code_display 315
secondary attendant 3
security codes
bypassing 226
comparing 224
displaying 315
minimum length 315
setting 227
security_min_length 315
sending
faxes 135
messages 307
serial integration 137
Bellcore Standard 138
Definity-G3 146
Ericsson MD-110 148
generic 151
NEC 2000/2400 143
SMDI 138
System 75 146
serial numbers 48
serial ports
bps 334
COM1-COM4 335
data bits 334
logical 337
parity 334
physical 335
366
receiving strings 244
sending strings 244
stop bits 335
serial_portn 335
servers
NETBIOS name 329
service 5
service_name 329
setting up
host computers 171
remote computers 172
Setup
defining dial codes 53
defining tone patterns 61
Setup utility 51
running 51
sharing Amanda 157
shifting
port variables 223
shipping
orders 259
short_direct_send 315
shortening
system greeting 287
ShowJump 11, 31
shutdown 316
Amanda 51
configuring 118
dl_stop 58
shutting down 316
Amanda 228
silence
when recording 319
SMDI 138
base port 336
characters in packet 336
integration 336
port 337
port number 337
Installing [email protected]
terminating characters
338
time packet can precede
call 337
type 338
smdi_activation_key 336
smdi_base_port 336
smdi_delay 336
smdi_max 336
smdi_port 337
smdi_pretimeout 337
smdi_start 337
smdi_stop 337
smdi_term 338
smdi_type 338
SMDR 291
Software
installation 39
software upgrades 48
space
%D token 216
P() token 235
warning 294
spaces
playing 235
Spanish 311
special
options 330
spelling
strings 235
starting
screen saver 316
startup
dl_init 58
stopbitsn 335
stopping
recording 299, 319
storing
answers 241
streams
MVIP 21
MVIP configuration 22
strings
contents 235
length 230
receiving from serial ports
244
searching 225
sending to serial ports 244
spelling 235
stutter dial tone 343
STX
character 211
success
token execution 179
suffix
dial code 57
dl_suffix 57
supervised transfer 216
please hold 310
supervised transfers 227, 344
supervising
hangups 332
support 5
end user 5
installation 6
international 5
system administration 5
Token Programming Language 6
switching
languages 254
synchronizing
DOS and PC clocks 292
system
log files 302
password 308
shutdown 51, 316
Index
367
shutting down 228
voice processing 3
System 75
serial integration 146
system administration
support 5
system dial codes
defining 53
system greeting
played for integrated call
300
shortening 287
system initialization
dl_init 58
system integration patterns
character codes 84
Integration Helper 87
test calls 88
system shutdown
dial code 58
dl_stop 58
system startup
dial code 58
dl_init 58
system tone patterns
defining 61
T
t
character code 86
T() token 246
T1 155
t1 lines 339, 340
t1_mode 340
tab
\T token 211
tape_length 316
telephone lines
kinds 155
telephone number
Method field 240, 247
notification 239
telephone switching systems
analog 343
templates
guest mailboxes 123, 300
mailboxes 123, 293
temporary
files 311
terminating
DTMF input 301
test calls
integration patterns 88
testing
inband integration patterns
75
time
after DTMF entry 317
automatic reports 290
before integration 336
between disk space checks
317
between DTMF tones 297
between menu repetitions
318
between messages when
delivering list
302
between on-hook and offhook events 318
between SMDI packet and
call 337
continuous message play
316
DTMF tone detection 297
DTMF tones played 298
end of recording detected
319
for positive voice control
322
forwarded messages 316
hold between transfer attempts 317
ignoring loop current 301
loop current drop 302
loop current off 301
messages 304
Name and Extension recording 306
port is idle 318
recording a list comment
292
rewinding 310
screen saver starts 316
skipping forward 310
storing messages 311
wait for DTMF digit 295
waiting for peripheral 319
timed break recall 213
timeout
inband integration 318
timeouts
call screening 329
timers
tmo_blank 316
tmo_disk 317
tmo_dtmf 317
tmo_idle 318
tmo_menu 318
tmo_pickup 318
tmo_serial 319
tmo_silence 319
tmo_sound 319
tmo_xfer 295
times
%T token 245
%Z token 250
368
P() token 235
playing 235
timestamp
forwarded messages 316
timestamp_forwards 316
tmo_blank 316
tmo_call_screening 329
tmo_dir_transfer 317
tmo_disk 317
tmo_dtmf 317
tmo_dtwait 59
tmo_hold 317
tmo_idle 318
tmo_integrate 318
tmo_menu 318
tmo_pickup 318
tmo_rna 319
tmo_serial 319
tmo_silence 319
tmo_sound 319
tmo_xfer 295
today 287
token
definition 177
token programming
mailbox settings 179
token failure 179
token success 179
Token Programming Language
support 6
Tokens
Token Programming Language 177
types of 181
tokens
application examples 253
DTMF 242
if comparisons 221
listed alphabetically 208
Installing [email protected]
listed by purpose 196
reference 196
rotary training 229
tracing 180
troubleshooting 251
tokens_available 320
tone patterns 343, 344
AccuCall Plus 64
defining 61
running GetTones 61
tones
DTMF 295, 296, 297,
298, 299
for recording 291
PCPM 123, 301, 327
saving caller’s entry 242
totals
messages 231, 236
new messages 232
trace files 341
DTMF integration 74
inband integration 74
inband integration patterns
77
tracing
on screen 180
screen output 314
tokens 180
trace files 180
trademarks ii
transfer dial tone
dial code 56
dl_ndtret 56
transfer hold
dial code 55
dl_dtwait 55
please hold 310
transferring
blind 344
busy-hold time 317
call 342
from 411 to user’s mailbox
317
partially supervised 344
supervised 344
transfers
partially supervised 247
supervised 216, 227
Troubleshooting
error messages 351
NIC Configuration 349
troubleshooting
token programs 251
trunk
character code 86
two-call faxbacks 265
Type
notification 345
type
SMDI 338
U
U token 247, 344
uninstalling
Amanda 39
uninterrupted power supply 36
updating
Amanda 39, 48
upgrading
Amanda 48
UPS 36
urgent messages 321
urgent_to_front 321
use_pvc 321
use_tutorial 320, 321
user_log 322
Index
369
users
messages for other users
309
paging 253
playing new messages
237
uses
Amanda 3
fraudulent iii
information system 4
off-duty attendant 3
primary attendant 3
secondary attendant 3
voice messaging center 4
using
fax modems 125
utilities
ACTIVATE.EXE 48
GetTones 61
Host/Remote 346
Setup 51
ShowJump 11, 31
V
V() token 248
Vantage boards 229
Variable field
playing 240
variables
assigning 183, 215
definition 182
global 217
port 243
reading from files 210
shifting 223
writing to files 211, 213
verifying
caller still on line 298
voice
wait 249
voice board
problem 347
voice boards 214, 216
addressing RDSP/x000
voice boards 19
addressing RDSP/x32
voice boards 8
addressing RTNI-xATI
boards 26
Brooktrout 321
clearing DTMF buffer
296
configuring RDSP/x000
voice boards 19
configuring RDSP/x32
voice boards 8
configuring RTNI-xATI
boards 26
installing MVIP cable 33
installing RDSP/RTNI
voice boards 32
installing RDSP/x32 voice
boards 11
jumpers for RDSP/x000
voice boards 20
jumpers for RDSP/x32
voice boards 9
jumpers for RTNI-xATI
voice boards 27
problem 347
Rhetorex 61, 64, 320,
321
Vantage with Rotary on
Board 229
voice boards, not from The
Amanda Company
287, 310, 336
321
voice control 320,
time 322
voice forms 241, 268, 308
voice mail
mailbox 122
voice messaging center 4
voice processing system 3
voice responses, storing 241,
308
voice server
configuring 119
questionnaire 104
voice_analysis_length 322
VOICECNF.EXE 347
volume
changing 212
custom busy message 299
initial 299
W
W token 345
W() token 249
wait
dial tone 249
pager answer 249
voice answer 249
waiting
before integration 336
for DTMF 295
for peripheral 319
warning
disk space 294
warranty ii
web site 5
wild card
character code 86
winks, t1 lines 340
writing
lines of files 211, 213
370
Installing [email protected]
X
x
character code
86
X() token 250
Y
Y() token 250
yesterday 287
Z
Z() token 251
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement